Xb30330.xb30350 management guide

Stackable Fast Ethernet Switch
Management Guide

Management Guide
Guide
XB30330 Stackable Fast Ethernet Switch
with 24 10/100BASE-TX (RJ-45) Ports,
2 Gigabit Combination Ports (RJ-45/SFP),
and 2 1000BASE-T/Stacking Ports
XB30350 Stackable Fast Ethernet Switch
with 48 10/100BASE-TX (RJ-45) Ports,
2 Gigabit Combination Ports (RJ-45/SFP),
and 2 1000BASE-T/Stacking Ports

XB30330
XB30350
F2.2.6.0 E032005-R01
149100006100H

i
Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction 1-1
Key Features 1-1
Description of Software Features 1-2
System Defaults 1-5
Chapter 2: Initial Configuration 2-1
Connecting to the Switch 2-1
Configuration Options 2-1
Required Connections 2-2
Remote Connections 2-3
Stack Operations 2-3
Unit Numbering 2-3
Recovering from Stack Failure or Topology Change 2-4
Resilient IP Interface for Management Access 2-4
Basic Configuration 2-4
Console Connection 2-4
Setting Passwords 2-5
Setting an IP Address 2-6
Manual Configuration 2-6
Dynamic Configuration 2-7
Enabling SNMP Management Access 2-8
Community Strings 2-8
Trap Receivers 2-9
Saving Configuration Settings 2-9
Managing System Files 2-9
Chapter 3: Configuring the Switch 3-1
Using the Web Interface 3-1
Navigating the Web Browser Interface 3-2
Home Page 3-2
Configuration Options 3-3
Panel Display 3-3
Main Menu 3-4
Basic Configuration 3-8
Displaying System Information 3-8
Displaying Switch Hardware/Software Versions 3-9
Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities 3-11
Setting the Switch’s IP Address 3-12
Manual Configuration 3-13
Using DHCP/BOOTP 3-14

Contents
ii
Managing Firmware 3-15
Downloading System Software from a Server 3-16
Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings 3-18
Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server 3-19
Console Port Settings 3-20
Telnet Settings 3-22
Configuring Event Logging 3-24
System Log Configuration 3-24
Remote Log Configuration 3-26
Displaying Log Messages 3-27
Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts 3-28
Resetting the System 3-30
Setting the System Clock 3-31
Configuring SNTP 3-31
Setting the Time Zone 3-32
Simple Network Management Protocol 3-33
Setting Community Access Strings 3-33
Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types 3-34
User Authentication 3-35
Configuring User Accounts 3-35
Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication 3-37
Configuring HTTPS 3-40
Replacing the Default Secure-site Certificate 3-41
Configuring the Secure Shell 3-42
Generating the Host Key Pair 3-44
Configuring the SSH Server 3-46
Configuring Port Security 3-47
Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication 3-49
Displaying 802.1X Global Settings 3-50
Configuring 802.1X Global Settings 3-51
Configuring Port Settings for 802.1X 3-51
Displaying 802.1X Statistics 3-54
Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access 3-55
Access Control Lists 3-57
Configuring Access Control Lists 3-57
Setting the ACL Name and Type 3-58
Configuring a Standard IP ACL 3-59
Configuring an Extended IP ACL 3-60
Configuring a MAC ACL 3-62
Binding a Port to an Access Control List 3-63
Port Configuration 3-64
Displaying Connection Status 3-64
Configuring Interface Connections 3-66
Creating Trunk Groups 3-68
Statically Configuring a Trunk 3-69

Contents
iii
Enabling LACP on Selected Ports 3-70
Configuring LACP Parameters 3-73
Displaying LACP Port Counters 3-75
Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side 3-77
Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side 3-79
Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds 3-80
Configuring Port Mirroring 3-82
Configuring Rate Limits 3-83
Rate Limit Granularity 3-83
Rate Limit Configuration 3-84
Showing Port Statistics 3-85
Address Table Settings 3-89
Setting Static Addresses 3-89
Displaying the Address Table 3-90
Changing the Aging Time 3-92
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3-92
Displaying Global Settings 3-93
Configuring Global Settings 3-96
Displaying Interface Settings 3-99
Configuring Interface Settings 3-102
VLAN Configuration 3-104
IEEE 802.1Q VLANs 3-104
Enabling or Disabling GVRP (Global Setting) 3-107
Displaying Basic VLAN Information 3-107
Displaying Current VLANs 3-108
Creating VLANs 3-110
Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index) 3-111
Adding Static Members to VLANs (Port Index) 3-113
Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces 3-114
Private VLANs 3-116
Displaying Current Private VLANs 3-117
Configuring Private VLANs 3-118
Associating VLANs 3-118
Displaying Private VLAN Interface Information 3-119
Configuring Private VLAN Interfaces 3-120
Class of Service Configuration 3-122
Layer 2 Queue Settings 3-122
Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces 3-122
Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues 3-124
Selecting the Queue Mode 3-125
Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes 3-126
Layer 3/4 Priority Settings 3-127
Mapping Layer 3/4 Priorities to CoS Values 3-127
Selecting IP Precedence/DSCP Priority 3-128
Mapping IP Precedence 3-128

Contents
iv
Mapping DSCP Priority 3-130
Mapping IP Port Priority 3-131
Mapping CoS Values to ACLs 3-132
Multicast Filtering 3-134
Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query) 3-134
Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters 3-135
Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router 3-136
Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router 3-137
Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services 3-139
Assigning Ports to Multicast Services 3-140
Chapter 4: Command Line Interface 4-1
Using the Command Line Interface 4-1
Accessing the CLI 4-1
Console Connection 4-1
Telnet Connection 4-1
Entering Commands 4-3
Keywords and Arguments 4-3
Minimum Abbreviation 4-3
Command Completion 4-3
Getting Help on Commands 4-3
Showing Commands 4-4
Partial Keyword Lookup 4-5
Negating the Effect of Commands 4-5
Using Command History 4-5
Understanding Command Modes 4-5
Exec Commands 4-6
Configuration Commands 4-6
Command Line Processing 4-8
Command Groups 4-9
Line Commands 4-10
line 4-10
login 4-11
password 4-12
timeout login response 4-13
exec-timeout 4-13
password-thresh 4-14
silent-time 4-15
databits 4-15
parity 4-16
speed 4-17
stopbits 4-17
disconnect 4-18
show line 4-18

Contents
v
General Commands 4-19
enable 4-19
disable 4-20
configure 4-21
show history 4-21
reload 4-22
end 4-22
exit 4-23
quit 4-23
System Management Commands 4-24
Device Designation Commands 4-24
prompt 4-24
hostname 4-25
User Access Commands 4-25
username 4-26
enable password 4-27
IP Filter Commands 4-28
management 4-28
show management 4-29
Web Server Commands 4-30
ip http port 4-30
ip http server 4-30
ip http secure-server 4-31
ip http secure-port 4-32
Telnet Server Commands 4-33
ip telnet port 4-33
ip telnet server 4-33
Secure Shell Commands 4-34
ip ssh server 4-36
ip ssh timeout 4-37
ip ssh authentication-retries 4-37
ip ssh server-key size 4-38
delete public-key 4-38
ip ssh crypto host-key generate 4-39
ip ssh crypto zeroize 4-39
ip ssh save host-key 4-40
show ip ssh 4-40
show ssh 4-41
show public-key 4-42
Event Logging Commands 4-43
logging on 4-43
logging history 4-44
logging host 4-45
logging facility 4-45
logging trap 4-46

Contents
vi
clear logging 4-46
show logging 4-47
show log 4-48
SMTP Alert Commands 4-49
logging sendmail host 4-49
logging sendmail level 4-50
logging sendmail source-email 4-51
logging sendmail destination-email 4-51
logging sendmail 4-52
show logging sendmail 4-52
Time Commands 4-53
sntp client 4-53
sntp server 4-54
sntp poll 4-55
show sntp 4-55
clock timezone 4-56
calendar set 4-56
show calendar 4-57
System Status Commands 4-57
light unit 4-57
show startup-config 4-58
show running-config 4-60
show system 4-62
show users 4-62
show version 4-63
Frame Size Commands 4-64
jumbo frame 4-64
Flash/File Commands 4-65
copy 4-65
delete 4-68
dir 4-68
whichboot 4-69
boot system 4-70
Authentication Commands 4-71
Authentication Sequence 4-71
authentication login 4-71
authentication enable 4-72
RADIUS Client 4-73
radius-server host 4-73
radius-server port 4-74
radius-server key 4-74
radius-server retransmit 4-75
radius-server timeout 4-75
show radius-server 4-76

Contents
vii
TACACS+ Client 4-76
tacacs-server host 4-77
tacacs-server port 4-77
tacacs-server key 4-78
show tacacs-server 4-78
Port Security Commands 4-79
port security 4-79
802.1X Port Authentication 4-81
dot1x system-auth-control 4-81
dot1x default 4-82
dot1x max-req 4-82
dot1x port-control 4-82
dot1x operation-mode 4-83
dot1x re-authenticate 4-84
dot1x re-authentication 4-84
dot1x timeout quiet-period 4-84
dot1x timeout re-authperiod 4-85
dot1x timeout tx-period 4-85
show dot1x 4-86
Access Control List Commands 4-89
IP ACLs 4-90
access-list ip 4-90
permit, deny (Standard ACL) 4-91
permit, deny (Extended ACL) 4-92
show ip access-list 4-94
ip access-group 4-94
show ip access-group 4-95
map access-list ip 4-95
show map access-list ip 4-96
MAC ACLs 4-97
access-list mac 4-97
permit, deny (MAC ACL) 4-98
show mac access-list 4-99
mac access-group 4-99
show mac access-group 4-100
map access-list mac 4-100
show map access-list mac 4-101
ACL Information 4-102
show access-list 4-102
show access-group 4-102
SNMP Commands 4-103
snmp-server community 4-103
snmp-server contact 4-104
snmp-server location 4-104
snmp-server host 4-105

Contents
viii
snmp-server enable traps 4-106
show snmp 4-107
Interface Commands 4-108
interface 4-108
description 4-109
speed-duplex 4-109
negotiation 4-110
capabilities 4-111
flowcontrol 4-112
shutdown 4-113
switchport broadcast packet-rate 4-114
clear counters 4-114
show interfaces status 4-115
show interfaces counters 4-116
show interfaces switchport 4-117
Mirror Port Commands 4-119
port monitor 4-119
show port monitor 4-120
Rate Limit Commands 4-121
rate-limit 4-121
rate-limit granularity 4-122
show rate-limit 4-122
Link Aggregation Commands 4-123
channel-group 4-124
lacp 4-125
lacp system-priority 4-126
lacp admin-key (Ethernet Interface) 4-127
lacp admin-key (Port Channel) 4-128
lacp port-priority 4-129
show lacp 4-129
Address Table Commands 4-133
mac-address-table static 4-134
clear mac-address-table dynamic 4-135
show mac-address-table 4-135
mac-address-table aging-time 4-136
show mac-address-table aging-time 4-136
Spanning Tree Commands 4-137
spanning-tree 4-137
spanning-tree mode 4-138
spanning-tree forward-time 4-139
spanning-tree hello-time 4-140
spanning-tree max-age 4-140
spanning-tree priority 4-141
spanning-tree pathcost method 4-141
spanning-tree transmission-limit 4-142

Contents
ix
spanning-tree spanning-disabled 4-142
spanning-tree cost 4-143
spanning-tree port-priority 4-144
spanning-tree edge-port 4-144
spanning-tree portfast 4-145
spanning-tree link-type 4-146
spanning-tree protocol-migration 4-147
show spanning-tree 4-147
VLAN Commands 4-149
Editing VLAN Groups 4-149
vlan database 4-149
vlan 4-150
Configuring VLAN Interfaces 4-151
interface vlan 4-151
switchport mode 4-152
switchport acceptable-frame-types 4-152
switchport ingress-filtering 4-153
switchport native vlan 4-154
switchport allowed vlan 4-155
switchport forbidden vlan 4-156
Displaying VLAN Information 4-156
show vlan 4-157
Configuring Private VLANs 4-158
private-vlan 4-159
private vlan association 4-160
switchport mode private-vlan 4-161
switchport private-vlan host-association 4-161
switchport private-vlan isolated 4-162
switchport private-vlan mapping 4-163
show vlan private-vlan 4-163
GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 4-164
bridge-ext gvrp 4-164
show bridge-ext 4-165
switchport gvrp 4-165
show gvrp configuration 4-166
garp timer 4-166
show garp timer 4-167
Priority Commands 4-168
Priority Commands (Layer 2) 4-168
queue mode 4-169
switchport priority default 4-169
queue bandwidth 4-170
queue cos-map 4-171
show queue mode 4-172
show queue bandwidth 4-172

Contents
x
show queue cos-map 4-173
Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) 4-174
map ip port (Global Configuration) 4-174
map ip port (Interface Configuration) 4-175
map ip precedence (Global Configuration) 4-175
map ip precedence (Interface Configuration) 4-176
map ip dscp (Global Configuration) 4-177
map ip dscp (Interface Configuration) 4-177
show map ip port 4-179
show map ip precedence 4-179
show map ip dscp 4-180
Multicast Filtering Commands 4-181
IGMP Snooping Commands 4-181
ip igmp snooping 4-182
ip igmp snooping vlan static 4-182
ip igmp snooping version 4-183
show ip igmp snooping 4-183
show mac-address-table multicast 4-184
IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2) 4-185
ip igmp snooping querier 4-185
ip igmp snooping query-count 4-185
ip igmp snooping query-interval 4-186
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 4-187
ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 4-187
Static Multicast Routing Commands 4-188
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter 4-188
show ip igmp snooping mrouter 4-189
IP Interface Commands 4-190
ip address 4-190
ip default-gateway 4-191
ip dhcp restart 4-192
show ip interface 4-192
show ip redirects 4-193
ping 4-193

Contents
xi
Appendix A: Software Specifications A-1
Software Features A-1
Management Features A-2
Standards A-2
Management Information Bases A-3
Appendix B: Troubleshooting B-1
Problems Accessing the Management Interface B-1
Using System Logs B-2
Glossary
Index

xiii
Tables
Table 1-1 Key Features 1-1
Table 1-2 System Defaults 1-5
Table 3-1 Configuration Options 3-3
Table 3-2 Main Menu 3-4
Table 3-3 Logging Levels 3-25
Table 3-4 HTTPS System Support 3-40
Table 3-5 802.1X Statistics 3-54
Table 3-6 LACP Port Counters 3-75
Table 3-7 LACP Internal Configuration Information 3-77
Table 3-8 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information 3-79
Table 3-9 Port Statistics 3-85
Table 3-10 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues 3-124
Table 3-11 CoS Priority Levels 3-124
Table 3-12 Mapping IP Precedence 3-128
Table 3-13 Mapping DSCP Priority Values 3-130
Table 3-14 Egress Queue Priority Mapping 3-132
Table 4-1 Command Modes 4-5
Table 4-2 Configuration Modes 4-7
Table 4-3 Command Line Processing 4-8
Table 4-4 Command Groups 4-9
Table 4-5 Line Commands 4-10
Table 4-6 General Commands 4-19
Table 4-7 System Management Commands 4-24
Table 4-8 Device Designation Commands 4-24
Table 4-9 User Access Commands 4-25
Table 4-10 Default Login Settings 4-26
Table 4-11 IP Filter Commands 4-28
Table 4-12 Web Server Commands 4-30
Table 4-13 HTTPS System Support 4-31
Table 4-14 Telnet Server Commands 4-33
Table 4-15 SSH Commands 4-34
Table 4-16 show ssh - display description 4-41
Table 4-17 Event Logging Commands 4-43
Table 4-18 Logging Levels 4-44
Table 4-19 show logging flash/ram - display description 4-47
Table 4-20 show logging trap - display description 4-48
Table 4-21 SMTP Alert Commands 4-49
Table 4-22 Time Commands 4-53
Table 4-23 System Status Commands 4-57
Table 4-24 Frame Size Commands 4-64
Table 4-25 Flash/File Commands 4-65
Table 4-26 File Directory Information 4-69

Tables
xiv
Table 4-27 Authentication Commands 4-71
Table 4-28 Authentication Sequence 4-71
Table 4-29 RADIUS Client Commands 4-73
Table 4-30 TACACS Commands 4-76
Table 4-31 Port Security Commands 4-79
Table 4-32 802.1X Port Authentication 4-81
Table 4-34 IP ACLs 4-90
Table 4-33 Access Control Lists 4-90
Table 4-36 MAC ACLs 4-97
Table 4-38 ACL Information 4-102
Table 4-39 SNMP Commands 4-103
Table 4-40 Interface Commands 4-108
Table 4-41 Interfaces Switchport Statistics 4-118
Table 4-42 Mirror Port Commands 4-119
Table 4-43 Rate Limit Commands 4-121
Table 4-44 Link Aggregation Commands 4-123
Table 4-45 show lacp counters - display description 4-130
Table 4-46 show lacp internal - display description 4-131
Table 4-47 show lacp neighbors - display description 4-132
Table 4-49 Address Table Commands 4-133
Table 4-48 show lacp sysid - display description 4-133
Table 4-50 Spanning Tree Commands 4-137
Table 4-51 VLANs 4-149
Table 4-52 Editing VLAN Groups 4-149
Table 4-53 Configuring VLAN Interfaces 4-151
Table 4-54 Show VLAN Commands 4-156
Table 4-55 Private VLAN Commands 4-158
Table 4-56 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 4-164
Table 4-57 Priority Commands 4-168
Table 4-58 Priority Commands (Layer 2) 4-168
Table 4-59 Default CoS Priority Levels 4-171
Table 4-60 Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) 4-174
Table 4-61 Mapping IP Precedence Values 4-176
Table 4-62 IP DSCP to CoS Vales 4-178
Table 4-63 Multicast Filtering Commands 4-181
Table 4-64 IGMP Snooping Commands 4-181
Table 4-65 IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2) 4-185
Table 4-66 Static Multicast Routing Commands 4-188
Table 4-67 IP Interface Commands 4-190
Table B-1 Troubleshooting Chart B-1

xv
Figures
Figure 3-1 Home Page 3-2
Figure 3-2 Panel Display 3-3
Figure 3-3 System Information 3-8
Figure 3-4 Switch Information 3-10
Figure 3-5 Bridge Extension Configuration 3-11
Figure 3-6 Manual IP Configuration 3-13
Figure 3-7 DHCP IP Configuration 3-14
Figure 3-8 Copy Firmware 3-16
Figure 3-9 Setting the Startup Code 3-16
Figure 3-10 Deleting Files 3-17
Figure 3-11 Downloading Configuration Settings for Startup 3-19
Figure 3-12 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings 3-19
Figure 3-13 Console Port Settings 3-21
Figure 3-14 Enabling Telnet 3-23
Figure 3-15 System Logs 3-25
Figure 3-16 Remote Logs 3-26
Figure 3-17 Displaying Logs 3-27
Figure 3-18 Enabling and Configuring SMTP Alerts 3-29
Figure 3-19 Resetting the System 3-30
Figure 3-20 SNTP Configuration 3-31
Figure 3-21 Setting the System Clock 3-32
Figure 3-22 Configuring SNMP Community Strings 3-34
Figure 3-23 Configuring IP Trap Managers 3-35
Figure 3-24 Access Levels 3-36
Figure 3-25 Authentication Settings 3-39
Figure 3-26 HTTPS Settings 3-41
Figure 3-27 SSH Host-Key Settings 3-45
Figure 3-28 SSH Server Settings 3-46
Figure 3-29 Configuring Port Security 3-48
Figure 3-30 802.1X Global Information 3-50
Figure 3-31 802.1X Global Configuration 3-51
Figure 3-32 802.1X Port Configuration 3-52
Figure 3-33 Displaying 802.1X Port Statistics 3-55
Figure 3-34 Creating an IP Filter List 3-56
Figure 3-35 Selecting ACL Type 3-58
Figure 3-36 ACL Configuration - Standard IP 3-59
Figure 3-37 ACL Configuration - Extended IP 3-61
Figure 3-38 ACL Configuration - MAC 3-62
Figure 3-39 Binding a Port to an ACL 3-63
Figure 3-40 Displaying Port/Trunk Information 3-65
Figure 3-41 Port/Trunk Configuration 3-67
Figure 3-42 Configuring Static Trunks 3-69

Figures
xvi
Figure 3-43 LACP Trunk Configuration 3-71
Figure 3-44 LACP Port Configuration 3-74
Figure 3-45 LACP - Port Counters Information 3-76
Figure 3-46 LACP - Port Internal Information 3-78
Figure 3-47 LACP - Port Neighbors Information 3-79
Figure 3-48 Port Broadcast Control 3-81
Figure 3-49 Mirror Port Configuration 3-82
Figure 3-50 Rate Limit Granularity Configuration 3-83
Figure 3-51 Output Rate Limit Port Configuration 3-84
Figure 3-52 Port Statistics 3-88
Figure 3-53 Configuring a Static Address Table 3-90
Figure 3-54 Configuring a Dynamic Address Table 3-91
Figure 3-55 Setting the Address Aging Time 3-92
Figure 3-56 Displaying Spanning Tree Information 3-95
Figure 3-57 Configuring Spanning Tree 3-98
Figure 3-58 Displaying Spanning Tree Port Information 3-101
Figure 3-59 Configuring Spanning Tree per Port 3-103
Figure 3-60 Enabling GVRP 3-107
Figure 3-61 Displaying Basic VLAN Information 3-107
Figure 3-62 Displaying Current VLANs 3-109
Figure 3-63 Configuring a VLAN Static List 3-110
Figure 3-64 Configuring a VLAN Static Table 3-112
Figure 3-65 VLAN Static Membership by Port 3-113
Figure 3-66 Configuring VLANs per Port 3-115
Figure 3-67 Private VLAN Information 3-117
Figure 3-68 Private VLAN Configuration 3-118
Figure 3-69 Private VLAN Association 3-119
Figure 3-70 Private VLAN Port Information 3-120
Figure 3-71 Private VLAN Port Configuration 3-121
Figure 3-72 Port Priority Configuration 3-123
Figure 3-73 Traffic Classes 3-125
Figure 3-74 Queue Mode 3-126
Figure 3-75 Configuring Queue Scheduling 3-127
Figure 3-76 IP Precedence/DSCP Priority Status 3-128
Figure 3-77 Mapping IP Precedence Priority Values 3-129
Figure 3-78 Mapping IP DSCP Priority Values 3-130
Figure 3-79 IP Port Priority Status 3-131
Figure 3-80 IP Port Priority 3-132
Figure 3-81 ACL CoS Priority 3-133
Figure 3-82 IGMP Configuration 3-136
Figure 3-83 Displaying Multicast Router Port Information 3-137
Figure 3-84 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration 3-138
Figure 3-85 IP Multicast Registration Table 3-139
Figure 3-86 IGMP Member Port Table 3-140

1-1
Chapter 1: Introduction
This switch provides a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching. It includes a
management agent that allows you to configure the features listed in this manual.
The default configuration can be used for most of the features provided by this
switch. However, there are many options that you should configure to maximize the
switch’s performance for your particular network environment.
Key Features
Table 1-1 Key Features
Feature Description
Configuration Backup
and Restore
Backup to TFTP server
Authentication Console, Telnet, web – User name / password, RADIUS, TACACS+
Web – HTTPS; Telnet – SSH
SNMP v1/2c – Community strings
Port – IEEE 802.1X, MAC address filtering
Access Control Lists Supports up to 88 IP or MAC ACLs
DHCP Client Supported
Port Configuration Speed, duplex mode and flow control
Rate Limiting Input and output rate limiting per port
Port Mirroring One port mirrored to a single analysis port
Port Trunking Supports up to 4 trunks using either static or dynamic trunking (LACP)
Broadcast Storm
Control
Supported
Static Address Up to 8K MAC addresses in the forwarding table
IEEE 802.1D Bridge Supports dynamic data switching and addresses learning
Store-and-Forward
Switching
Supported to ensure wire-speed switching while eliminating bad frames
Spanning Tree
Algorithm
Supports standard STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
Virtual LANs Up to 255 using IEEE 802.1Q, port-based, or private VLANs
Traffic Prioritization Default port priority, traffic class map, queue scheduling, IP Precedence or
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP), and TCP/UDP Port
Multicast Filtering Supports IGMP snooping and query

Introduction
1-2
1
Description of Software Features
The switch provides a wide range of advanced performance enhancing features.
Flow control eliminates the loss of packets due to bottlenecks caused by port
saturation. Broadcast storm suppression prevents broadcast traffic storms from
engulfing the network. Port-based and private VLANs, plus support for automatic
GVRP VLAN registration provide traffic security and efficient use of network
bandwidth. CoS priority queueing ensures the minimum delay for moving real-time
multimedia data across the network. While multicast filtering provides support for
real-time network applications. Some of the management features are briefly
described below.
Configuration Backup and Restore – You can save the current configuration
settings to a file on a TFTP server, and later download this file to restore the switch
configuration settings.
Authentication – This switch authenticates management access via the console
port, Telnet or web browser. User names and passwords can be configured locally or
can be verified via a remote authentication server (i.e., RADIUS or TACACS+).
Port-based authentication is also supported via the IEEE 802.1X protocol. This
protocol uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs (EAPOL) to request
user credentials from the 802.1X client, and then verifies the client’s right to access
the network via an authentication server.
Other authentication options include HTTPS for secure management access via the
web, SSH for secure management access over a Telnet-equivalent connection, IP
address filtering for SNMP/web/Telnet management access, and MAC address
filtering for port access.
Access Control Lists – ACLs provide packet filtering for IP frames (based on
address, protocol, TCP/UDP port number or TCP control code) or any frames
(based on MAC address or Ethernet type). ACLs can be used to improve
performance by blocking unnecessary network traffic or to implement security
controls by restricting access to specific network resources or protocols.
Port Configuration – You can manually configure the speed, duplex mode, and
flow control used on specific ports, or use auto-negotiation to detect the connection
settings used by the attached device. Use the full-duplex mode on ports whenever
possible to double the throughput of switch connections. Flow control should also be
enabled to control network traffic during periods of congestion and prevent the loss
of packets when port buffer thresholds are exceeded. The switch supports flow
control based on the IEEE 802.3x standard.
Rate Limiting – This feature controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or
received on an interface. Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a
network to limit traffic into or out of the network. Traffic that falls within the rate limit is
transmitted, while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped.

Description of Software Features
1-3
1
Port Mirroring – The switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a
monitor port. You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to
perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity.
Port Trunking – Ports can be combined into an aggregate connection. Trunks can
be manually set up or dynamically configured using IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation
Control Protocol (LACP). The additional ports dramatically increase the throughput
across any connection, and provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in
the trunk should fail. The switch supports up to four trunks.
Broadcast Storm Control – Broadcast suppression prevents broadcast traffic from
overwhelming the network. When enabled on a port, the level of broadcast traffic
passing through the port is restricted. If broadcast traffic rises above a pre-defined
threshold, it will be throttled until the level falls back beneath the threshold.
Static Addresses – A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this
switch. Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved.
When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored and
will not be written to the address table. Static addresses can be used to provide
network security by restricting access for a known host to a specific port.
IEEE 802.1D Bridge – The switch supports IEEE 802.1D transparent bridging. The
address table facilitates data switching by learning addresses, and then filtering or
forwarding traffic based on this information. The address table supports up to 8K
addresses.
Store-and-Forward Switching – The switch copies each frame into its memory
before forwarding them to another port. This ensures that all frames are a standard
Ethernet size and have been verified for accuracy with the cyclic redundancy check
(CRC). This prevents bad frames from entering the network and wasting bandwidth.
To avoid dropping frames on congested ports, the switch provides 8 MB for frame
buffering. This buffer can queue packets awaiting transmission on congested
networks.
Spanning Tree Algorithm – The switch supports these spanning tree protocols:
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP, IEEE 802.1D) – This protocol provides loop detection
and recovery by allowing two or more redundant connections to be created between
a pair of LAN segments. When there are multiple physical paths between segments,
this protocol will choose a single path and disable all others to ensure that only one
route exists between any two stations on the network. This prevents the creation of
network loops. However, if the chosen path should fail for any reason, an alternate
path will be activated to maintain the connection.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP, IEEE 802.1w) – This protocol reduces the
convergence time for network topology changes to 3 to 5 seconds, compared to 30
seconds or more for the older IEEE 802.1D STP standard. It is intended as a
complete replacement for STP, but can still interoperate with switches running the
older standard by automatically reconfiguring ports to STP-compliant mode if they
detect STP protocol messages from attached devices.

Introduction
1-4
1
Virtual LANs – The switch supports up to 255 VLANs. A Virtual LAN is a collection
of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical
location or connection point in the network. The switch supports tagged VLANs
based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard. Members of VLAN groups can be dynamically
learned via GVRP, or ports can be manually assigned to a specific set of VLANs.
This allows the switch to restrict traffic to the VLAN groups to which a user has been
assigned. By segmenting your network into VLANs, you can:
• Eliminate broadcast storms which severely degrade performance in a flat network.
• Simplify network management for node changes/moves by remotely configuring
VLAN membership for any port, rather than having to manually change the network
connection.
• Provide data security by restricting all traffic to the originating VLAN.
• Use private VLANs to restrict traffic to pass only between data ports and the uplink
ports, thereby isolating adjacent ports within the same VLAN, and allowing you to
limit the total number of VLANs that need to be configured.
Traffic Prioritization – This switch prioritizes each packet based on the required
level of service, using four priority queues with strict or Weighted Round Robin
Queuing. It uses IEEE 802.1p and 802.1Q tags to prioritize incoming traffic based on
input from the end-station application. These functions can be used to provide
independent priorities for delay-sensitive data and best-effort data.
This switch also supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3/4 traffic to
meet application requirements. Traffic can be prioritized based on the priority bits in
the IP frame’s Type of Service (ToS) octet or the number of the TCP/UDP port.
When these services are enabled, the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service
value by the switch, and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue.
Multicast Filtering – Specific multicast traffic can be assigned to its own VLAN to
ensure that it does not interfere with normal network traffic and to guarantee
real-time delivery by setting the required priority level for the designated VLAN. The
switch uses IGMP Snooping and Query to manage multicast group registration.

System Defaults
1-5
1
System Defaults
The switch’s system defaults are provided in the configuration file
“Factory_Default_Config.cfg.” To reset the switch defaults, this file should be set as
the startup configuration file (page 3-20).
The following table lists some of the basic system defaults.
Table 1-2 System Defaults
Function Parameter Default
Console Port
Connection
Baud Rate 9600
Data bits 8
Stop bits 1
Parity none
Local Console Timeout 0 (disabled)
Authentication Privileged Exec Level Username “admin”
Password “admin”
Normal Exec Level Username “guest”
Password “guest”
Enable Privileged Exec from Normal
Exec Level
Password “super”
RADIUS Authentication Disabled
TACACS Authentication Disabled
802.1X Port Authentication Disabled
HTTPS Enabled
SSH Disabled
Port Security Disabled
IP Filtering Disabled
Web Management HTTP Server Enabled
HTTP Port Number 80
HTTP Secure Server Enabled
HTTP Secure Port Number 443
SNMP Community Strings “public” (read only)
“private” (read/write)
Traps Authentication traps: enabled
Link-up-down events: enabled

Introduction
1-6
1
Port Configuration Admin Status Enabled
Auto-negotiation Enabled
Flow Control Disabled
Rate Limiting Input and output limits Disabled
Port Trunking Static Trunks None
LACP (all ports) Disabled
Broadcast Storm
Protection
Status Disabled (all ports)
Broadcast Limit Rate 32,000 octets per second
Spanning Tree
Algorithm
Status Enabled, RSTP
(Defaults: All values based on IEEE 802.1w)
Fast Forwarding (Edge Port) Disabled
Address Table Aging Time 300 seconds
Virtual LANs Default VLAN 1
PVID 1
Acceptable Frame Type All
Ingress Filtering Disabled
Switchport Mode (Egress Mode) Hybrid: tagged/untagged frames
GVRP (global) Disabled
GVRP (port interface) Disabled
Traffic Prioritization Ingress Port Priority 0
Weighted Round Robin Queue: 0 1 2 3
Weight: 1 2 4 6
IP Precedence Priority Disabled
IP DSCP Priority Disabled
IP Port Priority Disabled
IP Settings IP Address 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask 255.0.0.0
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
DHCP Client: Enabled
BOOTP Disabled
Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Snooping: Enabled
Querier: Enabled
Table 1-2 System Defaults (Continued)

System Defaults
1-7
1
System Log Status Enabled
Messages Logged Levels 0-6 (all)
Messages Logged to Flash Levels 0-3
SMTP Email Alerts Event Handler Enabled (but no server defined)
SNTP Clock Synchronization Disabled
Table 1-2 System Defaults (Continued)

2-1
Chapter 2: Initial Configuration
Connecting to the Switch
Configuration Options
The switch includes a built-in network management agent. The agent offers a variety
of management options, including SNMP, RMON (Groups 1, 2, 3, 9) and a
web-based interface. A PC may also be connected directly to the switch for
configuration and monitoring via a command line interface (CLI).
Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default. To change this
address, see “Setting an IP Address” on page 2-6.
The switch’s HTTP web agent allows you to configure switch parameters, monitor
port connections, and display statistics using a standard web browser such as
Netscape Navigator version 6.2 and higher or Microsoft IE version 5.0 and higher.
The switch’s web management interface can be accessed from any computer
attached to the network.
The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS-232 serial
console port on the switch, or remotely by a Telnet connection over the network.
The switch’s management agent also supports SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol). This SNMP agent permits the switch to be managed from
any system in the network using network management software such as
HP OpenView.
The switch’s web interface, CLI configuration program, and SNMP agent allow you
to perform the following management functions:
• Set user names and passwords
• Set an IP interface for a management VLAN
• Configure SNMP parameters
• Enable/disable any port
• Set the speed/duplex mode for any port
• Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input or output rates
• Control port access through IEEE 802.1X security or static address filtering
• Filter packets using Access Control Lists (ACLs)
• Configure up to 255 IEEE 802.1Q VLANs
• Enable GVRP automatic VLAN registration
• Configure IGMP multicast filtering
• Upload and download system firmware via TFTP
• Upload and download switch configuration files via TFTP
• Configure Spanning Tree parameters
• Configure Class of Service (CoS) priority queuing

Initial Configuration
2-2
2
• Configure up to 4 static or LACP trunks
• Enable port mirroring
• Set broadcast storm control on any port
• Display system information and statistics
• Configure any stack unit through the same IP address
Required Connections
The switch provides an RS-232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or
terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch. A null-modem console cable is
provided with the switch.
Note: When configuring a stack, connect to the console port on the Master unit.
Attach a VT100-compatible terminal, or a PC running a terminal emulation program
to the switch. You can use the console cable provided with this package, or use a
null-modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the
Installation Guide.
To connect a terminal to the console port, complete the following steps:
1. Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal, or a PC running
terminal emulation software, and tighten the captive retaining screws on the
DB-9 connector.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the RS-232 serial port on the switch.
3. Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows:
• Select the appropriate serial port (COM port 1 or COM port 2).
• Set the baud rate to 9600 bps.
• Set the data format to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.
• Set flow control to none.
• Set the emulation mode to VT100.
• When using HyperTerminal, select Terminal keys, not Windows keys.
Notes: 1. When using HyperTerminal with Microsoft® Windows® 2000, make sure that
you have Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later installed. Windows 2000
Service Pack 2 fixes the problem of arrow keys not functioning in
HyperTerminal’s VT100 emulation. See www.microsoft.com for information
on Windows 2000 service packs.
2. Refer to “Line Commands” on page 4-10 for a complete description of
console configuration options.
3. Once you have set up the terminal correctly, the console login screen will be
displayed.
For a description of how to use the CLI, see “Using the Command Line Interface” on
page 4-1. For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the
CLI, refer to “Command Groups” on page 4-9.

Stack Operations
2-3
2
Remote Connections
Prior to accessing the switch’s onboard agent via a network connection, you must
first configure it with a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway using a
console connection, DHCP or BOOTP protocol.
The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default. To manually
configure this address or enable dynamic address assignment via DHCP or BOOTP,
see “Setting an IP Address” on page 2-6.
Note: This switch supports four concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions.
After configuring the switch’s IP parameters, you can access the onboard
configuration program from anywhere within the attached network. The onboard
configuration program can be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to
the network. The switch can also be managed by any computer using a web
browser (Internet Explorer 5.0 or above, or Netscape Navigator 6.2 or above), or
from a network computer using SNMP network management software.
Note: The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration functions. To
access the full range of SNMP management functions, you must use
SNMP-based network management software.
Stack Operations
You can stack up to eight XB30330 units, four XB30350 units, or four units when
both switch types are stacked together. Refer to the Installation Guide for details on
stacking these units. One unit in the stack acts as the Master for configuration tasks
and firmware upgrade. All of the other units function in Slave mode.
Note: If more than one stack Master is selected using the Master push button on the
switch’s front panel, the stack will not function. Also, if a stack consists of more
than one unit, and the Master button is not depressed on any unit, the stack will
not function.
Unit Numbering
Note the following points about unit numbering:
• When the stack is initially powered on, the Master unit is designated as unit 1 in a
ring topology. In a line topology, the stack is simply numbered from top to bottom,
with the first unit in the stack designated at unit 1. This unit identification number
can be selected on the front panel graphic of the web interface, or from the CLI.
• To configure any unit in the stack, first verify the unit number by counting down
from the Master unit in a ring topology or from the top unit in a line topology (or use
the light unit command to display the unit number via the port LEDs as described
on page 4-57), and then select the appropriate unit number from the web or
console management interface.
• If a unit in the stack fails or is removed from the stack, the unit numbers will not
change. This means that when you replace a unit in the stack, the original
configuration for the failed unit will be restored to the replacement unit.

2-4
2
Recovering from Stack Failure or Topology Change
Note the following points about recovering from a stack change:
• When using a “line” topology, if any link or unit in the stack fails, the stack will be
split into two separate segments. The new stack segments will then reboot and
resume normal operation if a new segment contains the original Master unit, or if a
new segment now contains only one switch. In other words, a new segment will
resume normal operation unless it contains more than one switch and the Master
button is not depressed on any of these switches. If the later case is true, and a
segment fails to resume operation, you can either replace the failed connection to
restore operation to the original stack, or depress the Master button on one of the
switches in this segment..
• If you are using a wrap-around stack topology, a single point of failure in the stack
will not cause the stack to fail. It would take two or more points of failure to break
the stack apart. The stack will merely reboot to detect the new stack’s topology,
and then resume normal operation.
• When a link or unit in the stack fails, a trap message is sent and a failure event is
logged. The stack will be rebooted after any system failure or topology change. It
takes two to three minutes for the stack to reboot. Also note that powering down a
unit or inserting a new unit in the stack will cause the stack to reboot.
Resilient IP Interface for Management Access
The stack functions as one integral system for management and configuration
purposes. You can therefore manage the stack through any unit in the stack. The
Master unit does not even have to include an active port member in the VLAN
interface used for management access. However, if the unit to which you normally
connect for management access fails, and there are no active port members on the
other units within this VLAN interface, then this IP address will no longer be
available. To retain a constant IP address for management access across fail over
events, you should include port members on several units within the primary VLAN
used for stack management.
Basic Configuration
Console Connection
The CLI program provides two different command levels — normal access level
(Normal Exec) and privileged access level (Privileged Exec). The commands
available at the Normal Exec level are a limited subset of those available at the
Privileged Exec level and allow you to only display information and use basic
utilities. To fully configure the switch parameters, you must access the CLI at the
Privileged Exec level.
Note: You can only access the console interface through the Master unit in the stack

Basic Configuration
2-5
2
Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords. The switch
has a default user name and password for each level. To log into the CLI at ]the
Privileged Exec level using the default user name and password, perform these
steps:
1. To initiate your console connection, press <Enter>. The “User Access
Verification” procedure starts.
2. At the Username prompt, enter “admin.”
3. At the Password prompt, also enter “admin.” (The password characters are not
displayed on the console screen.)
4. The session is opened and the CLI displays the “Console#” prompt indicating
you have access at the Privileged Exec level.
Setting Passwords
Note: If this is your first time to log into the CLI program, you should define new
passwords for both default user names using the “username” command, record
them and put them in a safe place.
Passwords can consist of up to 8 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive.
To prevent unauthorized access to the switch, set the passwords as follows:
1. Open the console interface with the default user name and password “admin” to
access the Privileged Exec level.
2. Type “configure” and press <Enter>.
3. Type “username guest password 0 password,” for the Normal Exec level, where
password is your new password. Press <Enter>.
4. Type “username admin password 0 password,” for the Privileged Exec level,
where password is your new password. Press <Enter>.
Note: ‘0’ specifies the password in plain text, ‘7’ specifies the password in encrypted
form.
Username: admin
Password:
CLI session with the Stackable Intelligent Switch is opened.
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].
Console#configure
Console(config)#username guest password 0 [password]
Console(config)#username admin password 0 [password]
Console(config)#

2-6
2
Setting an IP Address
You must establish IP address information for the stack to obtain management
access through the network. This can be done in either of the following ways:
Manual — You have to input the information, including IP address and subnet mask.
If your management station is not in the same IP subnet as the stack’s master unit,
you will also need to specify the default gateway router.
Dynamic — The switch sends IP configuration requests to BOOTP or DHCP
address allocation servers on the network.
Manual Configuration
You can manually assign an IP address to the switch. You may also need to specify
a default gateway that resides between this device and management stations that
exist on another network segment. Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal
numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything outside this format will not be
accepted by the CLI program.
Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default.
Before you can assign an IP address to the switch, you must obtain the following
information from your network administrator:
• IP address for the switch
• Default gateway for the network
• Network mask for this network
To assign an IP address to the switch, complete the following steps:
1. From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt, type
“interface vlan 1” to access the interface-configuration mode. Press <Enter>.
2. Type “ip address ip-address netmask,” where “ip-address” is the switch IP
address and “netmask” is the network mask for the network. Press <Enter>.
3. Type “exit” to return to the global configuration mode prompt. Press <Enter>.
4. To set the IP address of the default gateway for the network to which the switch
belongs, type “ip default-gateway gateway,” where “gateway” is the IP address
of the default gateway. Press <Enter>.
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.5 255.255.255.0
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 192.168.1.254
Console(config)#

Basic Configuration
2-7
2
Dynamic Configuration
If you select the “bootp” or “dhcp” option, IP will be enabled but will not function until
a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received. You therefore need to use the “ip dhcp
restart” command to start broadcasting service requests. Requests will be sent
periodically in an effort to obtain IP configuration information. (BOOTP and DHCP
values can include the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.)
If the “bootp” or “dhcp” option is saved to the startup-config file (step 6), then the
switch will start broadcasting service requests as soon as it is powered on.
To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or DHCP
address allocation servers on the network, complete the following steps:
1. From the Global Configuration mode prompt, type “interface vlan 1” to access
the interface-configuration mode. Press <Enter>.
2. At the interface-configuration mode prompt, use one of the following commands:
• To obtain IP settings via DHCP, type “ip address dhcp” and press <Enter>.
• To obtain IP settings via BOOTP, type “ip address bootp” and press <Enter>.
3. Type “end” to return to the Privileged Exec mode. Press <Enter>.
4. Type “ip dhcp restart” to begin broadcasting service requests. Press <Enter>.
5. Wait a few minutes, and then check the IP configuration settings by typing the
“show ip interface” command. Press <Enter>.
6. Then save your configuration changes by typing “copy running-config
startup-config.” Enter the startup file name and press <Enter>.
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp
Console(config-if)#end
Console#ip dhcp restart
Console#show ip interface
IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,
and address mode: User specified.
Console#copy running-config startup-config
Startup configuration file name []: startup
Write to FLASH Programming.
Write to FLASH finish.
Success.

2-8
2
Enabling SNMP Management Access
The switch can be configured to accept management commands from Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) applications such as HP OpenView. You
can configure the switch to (1) respond to SNMP requests or (2) generate SNMP
traps.
When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch (either to return
information or to set a parameter), the switch provides the requested data or sets the
specified parameter. The switch can also be configured to send information to
SNMP managers (without being requested by the managers) through trap
messages, which inform the manager that certain events have occurred.
Community Strings
Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP stations, as
well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from the switch. You
therefore need to assign community strings to specified users or user groups, and
set the access level.
The default strings are:
• public - with read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to
retrieve MIB objects.
• private - with read-write access. Authorized management stations are able to both
retrieve and modify MIB objects.
Note: If you do not intend to utilize SNMP, we recommend that you delete both of the
default community strings. If there are no community strings, then SNMP
management access to the switch is disabled.
To prevent unauthorized access to the switch via SNMP, it is recommended that you
change the default community strings.
To configure a community string, complete the following steps:
“snmp-server community string mode,” where “string” is the community access
string and “mode” is rw (read/write) or ro (read only). Press <Enter>. (Note that
the default mode is read only.)
2. To remove an existing string, simply type “no snmp-server community string,”
where “string” is the community access string to remove. Press <Enter>.
Console(config)#snmp-server community admin rw
Console(config)#snmp-server community private
Console(config)#

Managing System Files
2-9
2
Trap Receivers
You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the switch. To
configure a trap receiver, complete the following steps:
“snmp-server host host-address community-string,” where “host-address” is the
IP address for the trap receiver and “community-string” is the string associated
with that host. Press <Enter>.
2. In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications, you must enter at
least one snmp-server enable traps command. Type “snmp-server enable traps
type,” where “type” is either authentication or link-up-down. Press <Enter>.
Saving Configuration Settings
Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not
saved when the switch is rebooted. To save all your configuration changes in
nonvolatile storage, you must copy the running configuration file to the start-up
configuration file using the “copy” command.
To save the current configuration settings, enter the following command:
1. From the Privileged Exec mode prompt, type “copy running-config
startup-config” and press <Enter>.
2. Enter the name of the start-up file. Press <Enter>.
Managing System Files
The switch’s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be managed
by the CLI program, web interface, or SNMP. The switch’s file system allows files to
be uploaded and downloaded, copied, deleted, and set as a start-up file.
The three types of files are:
• Configuration — This file stores system configuration information and is created
when configuration settings are saved. Saved configuration files can be selected
as a system start-up file or can be uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup. A file
named “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” contains all the system default settings and
Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps link-up-down
Console(config)#
Console#copy running-config startup-config
Startup configuration file name []: startup
Success.
Console#

2-10
2
cannot be deleted from the system. See “Saving or Restoring Configuration
Settings” on page 3-18 for more information.
• Operation Code — System software that is executed after boot-up, also known as
run-time code. This code runs the switch operations and provides the CLI and web
management interfaces. See “Managing Firmware” on page 3-15 for more
information.
• Diagnostic Code — Software that is run during system boot-up, also known as
POST (Power On Self-Test).
Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the switch supports only two operation
code files. However, you can have as many diagnostic code files and configuration
files as available flash memory space allows.
In the system flash memory, one file of each type must be set as the start-up file.
During a system boot, the diagnostic and operation code files set as the start-up file
are run, and then the start-up configuration file is loaded.
Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that reflects the
contents or usage of the file settings. If you download directly to the running-config,
the system will reboot, and the settings will have to be copied from the
running-config to a permanent file.

3-1
Chapter 3: Configuring the Switch
Using the Web Interface
This switch provides an embedded HTTP web agent. Using a web browser you can
configure the switch and view statistics to monitor network activity. The web agent
can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard web browser
(Internet Explorer 5.0 or above, or Netscape Navigator 6.2 or above).
Note: You can also use the Command Line Interface (CLI) to manage the switch over a
serial connection to the console port or via Telnet. For more information on using
the CLI, refer to Chapter 4: “Command Line Interface.”
Prior to accessing the switch from a web browser, be sure you have first performed
the following tasks:
1. Configure the switch with a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
using an out-of-band serial connection, BOOTP or DHCP protocol. (See
“Setting an IP Address” on page 2-6.)
2. Set user names and passwords using an out-of-band serial connection. Access
to the web agent is controlled by the same user names and passwords as the
onboard configuration program. (See “Setting Passwords” on page 2-5.)
3. After you enter a user name and password, you will have access to the system
configuration program.
Notes: 1. You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct password; on the third
failed attempt the current connection is terminated.
2. If you log into the web interface as guest (Normal Exec level), you can view
the configuration settings or change the guest password. If you log in as
“admin” (Privileged Exec level), you can change the settings on any page.
3. If the path between your management station and this switch does not pass
through any device that uses the Spanning Tree Algorithm, then you can set
the switch port attached to your management station to fast forwarding (i.e.,
enable Admin Edge Port) to improve the switch’s response time to
management commands issued through the web interface. See “Configuring
Interface Settings” on page 3-102.

Configuring the Switch
3-2
3
Navigating the Web Browser Interface
To access the web-browser interface you must first enter a user name and
password. The administrator has Read/Write access to all configuration parameters
and statistics. The default user name and password for the administrator is “admin.”
Home Page
When your web browser connects with the switch’s web agent, the home page is
displayed as shown below. The home page displays the Main Menu on the left side
of the screen and System Information on the right side. The Main Menu links are
used to navigate to other menus, and display configuration parameters and
statistics.
Figure 3-1 Home Page
Note: The examples in this chapter are based on the XB30330. Other than the number
of fixed ports, there are no major differences between the XB30330 and XB30350.
The panel graphics for both switch types are shown on the following page.

Panel Display
3-3
3
Configuration Options
Configurable parameters have a dialog box or a drop-down list. Once a configuration
change has been made on a page, be sure to click on the Apply button to confirm
the new setting. The following table summarizes the web page configuration
buttons.
Notes: 1. To ensure proper screen refresh, be sure that Internet Explorer 5.x is
configured as follows: Under the menu “Tools / Internet Options / General /
Temporary Internet Files / Settings,” the setting for item “Check for newer
versions of stored pages” should be “Every visit to the page.”
2. When using Internet Explorer 5.0, you may have to manually refresh the
screen after making configuration changes by pressing the browser’s refresh
button.
Panel Display
The web agent displays an image of the switch’s ports. The Mode can be set to
display different information for the ports, including Active (i.e., up or down), Duplex
(i.e., half or full duplex, or Flow Control (i.e., with or without flow control). Clicking on
the image of a port opens the Port Configuration page as described on page 3-66.
Figure 3-2 Panel Display
Table 3-1 Configuration Options
Button Action
Revert Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to pressing Apply.
Apply Sets specified values to the system.
Help Links directly to webhelp.
XB30330
XB30350

3-4
3
Main Menu
Using the onboard web agent, you can define system parameters, manage and
control the switch, and all its ports, or monitor network conditions. The following
table briefly describes the selections available from this program.
Table 3-2 Main Menu
Menu Description Page
System 3-8
System Information Provides basic system description, including contact information 3-8
Switch Information Shows the number of ports, hardware/firmware version
numbers, and power status
3-9
Bridge Extension Shows the bridge extension parameters 3-11
IP Configuration Sets the IP address for management access 3-12
File 3-15
Copy Allows the transfer and copying files 3-15
Delete Allows deletion of files from the flash memory 3-16
Set Startup Sets the startup file 3-16
Line 3-20
Console Sets console port connection parameters 3-20
Telnet Sets Telnet connection parameters. 3-22
Log 3-24
Logs Stores and displays error messages 3-24
System Logs Sends error messages to a logging process 3-24
Remote Logs Configures the logging of messages to a remote logging process 3-26
SMTP Logs Sends an SMTP client message to a participating server 3-28
Reset Restarts the switch 3-30
SNTP 3-31
Configuration Configures SNTP client settings, including broadcast mode or a
specified list of servers
3-31
Clock Time Zone Sets the local time zone for the system clock 3-32
SNMP 3-33
Configuration Configures community strings and related trap functions 3-33
Security 3-35
User Accounts Assigns a new password for the current user 3-35
Authentication Settings Configures authentication sequence, RADIUS and TACACS 3-37
HTTPS Settings Configures secure HTTP settings 3-40

Main Menu
3-5
3
SSH 3-42
Host-Key Settings Generates the host key pair (public and private) 3-44
Settings Configures Secure Shell server settings 3-46
Port Security Configures per port security, including status, response for
security breach, and maximum allowed MAC addresses
3-47
802.1X Port authentication 3-49
Information Displays global configuration settings 3-51
Configuration Configures the global configuration setting 3-51
Port Configuration Sets parameters for individual ports 3-51
Statistics Displays protocol statistics for the selected port 3-54
ACL 3-57
Configuration Configures packet filtering based on IP or MAC addresses 3-57
Port Binding Binds a port to the specified ACL 3-63
IP Filter Sets IP addresses of clients allowed management access via
the web, SNMP, and Telnet
3-55
Port 3-64
Port Information Displays port connection status 3-64
Trunk Information Displays trunk connection status 3-64
Port Configuration Configures port connection settings 3-66
Trunk Configuration Configures trunk connection settings 3-66
Trunk Membership Specifies ports to group into static trunks 3-69
LACP 3-68
Configuration Allows ports to dynamically join trunks 3-70
Aggregation Port Configures parameters for link aggregation group members 3-73
Port Counters Displays statistics for LACP protocol messages 3-75
Port Internal Information Displays settings and operational state for the local side 3-77
Port Neighbors Information Displays settings and operational state for the remote side 3-79
Port Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each port 3-80
Trunk Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each trunk 3-80
Mirror Port Configuration Sets the source and target ports for mirroring 3-82
Rate Limit 3-83
Granularity Enables or disables the rate limit feature 3-83
Input Port Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each port 3-84
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)

3-6
3
Input Trunk Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each trunk 3-84
Output Port Configuration Sets the output rate limit for each port 3-84
Output Trunk Configuration Sets the output rate limit for each trunk 3-84
Port Statistics Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics 3-85
Address Table 3-89
Static Addresses Displays entries for interface, address or VLAN 3-89
Dynamic Addresses Displays or edits static entries in the Address Table 3-90
Address Aging Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries 3-92
Spanning Tree 3-92
STA
Information Displays STA values used for the bridge 3-93
Configuration Configures global bridge settings for STA and RSTP 3-96
Port Information Displays individual port settings for STA 3-99
Trunk Information Displays individual trunk settings for STA 3-99
Port Configuration Configures individual port settings for STA 3-102
Trunk Configuration Configures individual trunk settings for STA 3-102
VLAN 3-104
802.1Q VLAN
GVRP Status Enables GVRP VLAN registration protocol 3-107
Basic Information Displays information on the VLAN type supported by this switch 3-107
Current Table Shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or
not the port is tagged or untagged
3-108
Static List Used to create or remove VLAN groups 3-110
Static Table Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN 3-111
Static Membership by Port Configures membership type for interfaces, including tagged,
untagged or forbidden
3-113
Port Configuration Specifies default PVID and VLAN attributes 3-114
Trunk Configuration Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN attributes 3-114
Private VLAN 3-116
Information Displays Private VLAN feature information 3-117
Configuration This page is used to create/remove primary or community
VLANs
3-118
Association Each community VLAN must be associated with a primary VLAN 3-118

Main Menu
3-7
3
Port Information Shows VLAN port type, and associated primary or secondary
VLANs
3-119
Port Configuration Sets the private VLAN interface type, and associates the
interfaces with a private VLAN
3-120
Trunk Information Shows VLAN port type, and associated primary or secondary
VLANs
3-119
Trunk Configuration Sets the private VLAN interface type, and associates the
interfaces with a private VLAN
3-120
Priority 3-122
Default Port Priority Sets the default priority for each port 3-122
Default Trunk Priority Sets the default priority for each trunk 3-122
Traffic Classes Maps IEEE 802.1p priority tags to output queues 3-124
Traffic Classes Status Enables/disables traffic class priorities (not implemented) NA
Queue Mode Sets queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round-Robin 3-125
Queue Scheduling Configures Weighted Round Robin queueing 3-126
IP Precedence/
DSCP Priority Status
Globally selects IP Precedence or DSCP Priority, or disables
both.
3-128
IP Precedence Priority Sets IP Type of Service priority, mapping the precedence tag to
a class-of-service value
3-128
IP DSCP Priority Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point priority, mapping a
DSCP tag to a class-of-service value
3-130
IP Port Priority Status Globally enables or disables IP Port Priority 3-128
IP Port Priority Sets TCP/UDP port priority, defining the socket number and
associated class-of-service value
3-131
ACL CoS Priority Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for packets
matching an ACL rule
3-132
IGMP Snooping 3-134
IGMP Configuration Enables multicast filtering; configures parameters for multicast
query
3-135
Multicast Router
Port Information
Displays the ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast
router for each VLAN ID
3-136
Static Multicast Router Port
Configuration
Assigns ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast router 3-137
IP Multicast Registration
Table
Displays all multicast groups active on this switch, including
multicast IP addresses and VLAN ID
3-139
IGMP Member Port Table Indicates multicast addresses associated with the selected
VLAN
3-140

3-8
3
Basic Configuration
Displaying System Information
You can easily identify the system by displaying the device name, location and
contact information.
Field Attributes
• System Name – Name assigned to the switch system.
• Object ID – MIB II object ID for switch’s network management subsystem.
(XB30330: 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.61; XB30350: 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.77)
• Location – Specifies the system location.
• Contact – Administrator responsible for the system.
• System Up Time – Length of time the management agent has been up.
These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI.
• MAC Address – The physical layer address for this switch.
• Web server – Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled.
• Web server port – Shows the TCP port number used by the web interface.
• Web secure server – Shows if management access via HTTPS is enabled.
• Web secure server port – Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS interface.
• Telnet server – Shows if management access via Telnet is enabled.
• Telnet port – Shows the TCP port used by the Telnet interface.
• Jumbo Frame – Shows if jumbo frames are enabled.
• POST result – Shows results of the power-on self-test.
Web – Click System, System Information. Specify the system name, location, and
contact information for the system administrator, then click Apply. (This page also
includes a Telnet button that allows access to the Command Line Interface via Telnet.)
Figure 3-3 System Information

Basic Configuration
3-9
3
CLI – Specify the hostname, location and contact information.
Displaying Switch Hardware/Software Versions
Use the Switch Information page to display hardware/firmware version numbers for
the main board and management software, as well as the power status of the system.
Field Attributes
Main Board
• Serial Number – The serial number of the switch.
• Number of Ports – Number of built-in RJ-45 ports.
• Hardware Version – Hardware version of the main board.
• Internal Power Status – Displays the status of the internal power supply.
Management Software
• Loader Version – Version number of loader code.
• Boot-ROM Version – Version of Power-On Self-Test (POST) and boot code.
• Operation Code Version – Version number of runtime code.
• Role – Shows that this switch is operating as Master or Slave.
Expansion Slot
• Expansion Slot 1/2 – Combination RJ-45/SFP ports.
Console(config)#hostname R&D 5 4-25
Console(config)#snmp-server location WC 9 4-104
Console(config)#snmp-server contact Ted 4-104
Console(config)#exit
Console#show system 4-62
System description: 24FE Stackable Intelligent Switch
System OID string: 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.61
System information
System Up time: 0 days, 2 hours, 4 minutes, and 7.13 seconds
System Name: R&D 5
System Location: WC 9
System Contact Ted
MAC address 00-30-F1-12-34-56
Web server: enabled
Web server port: 80
Web secure server: enabled
Web secure server port: 443
Telnet server: enabled
Telnet port: 23
Jumbo Frame: Disabled
POST result
DUMMY Test 1.................PASS
UART LOOP BACK Test..........PASS
DRAM Test....................PASS
Timer Test...................PASS
RTC Initialization...........PASS
Switch Int Loopback test.....PASS
Done All Pass.
Console#

3-10
3
These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI.
• Unit ID – Unit number in stack.
• Redundant Power Status – Displays the status of the redundant power supply.
Web – Click System, Switch Information.
Figure 3-4 Switch Information
CLI – Use the following command to display version information.
Console#show version 4-63
Unit 1
Serial number: S416000937
Service tag:
Hardware version: R01
Module A type: 1000BaseT
Module B type: 1000BaseT
Number of ports: 26
Main power status: up
Redundant power status :not present
Agent (master)
Unit ID: 1
Loader version: 2.2.1.1
Boot ROM version: 2.2.1.2
Operation code version: 2.2.6.0
Console#

Basic Configuration
3-11
3
Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities
The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support Multicast
Filtering, Traffic Classes, and Virtual LANs. You can access these extensions to
display default settings for the key variables.
Field Attributes
• Extended Multicast Filtering Services – This switch does not support the filtering
of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP (GARP Multicast Registration
Protocol).
• Traffic Classes – This switch provides mapping of user priorities to multiple traffic
classes. (Refer to “Class of Service Configuration” on page 3-122.)
• Static Entry Individual Port – This switch allows static filtering for unicast and
multicast addresses. (Refer to “Setting Static Addresses” on page 3-89.)
• VLAN Learning – This switch uses Independent VLAN Learning (IVL), where each
port maintains its own filtering database.
• Configurable PVID Tagging – This switch allows you to override the default Port
VLAN ID (PVID used in frame tags) and egress status (VLAN-Tagged or
Untagged) on each port. (Refer to “VLAN Configuration” on page 3-104.)
• Local VLAN Capable – This switch does not support multiple local bridges outside
of the scope of 802.1Q defined VLANs.
• GMRP – GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP) allows network devices to
register endstations with multicast groups. This switch does not support GMRP; it
uses the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) to provide automatic
multicast filtering.
Web – Click System, Bridge Extension Configuration.
Figure 3-5 Bridge Extension Configuration

3-12
3
CLI – Enter the following command.
Setting the Switch’s IP Address
This section describes how to configure an IP interface for management access
over the network. The IP address for the stack is obtained via DHCP by default. To
manually configure an address, you need to change the switch’s default settings
(IP address 0.0.0.0 and netmask 255.0.0.0) to values that are compatible with your
network. You may also need to a establish a default gateway between the stack and
management stations that exist on another network segment.
You can manually configure a specific IP address, or direct the device to obtain an
address from a BOOTP or DHCP server. Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal
numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything outside this format will not be
accepted by the CLI program.
Command Attributes
• Management VLAN – ID of the configured VLAN (1-4094, no leading zeroes). By
default, all ports on the switch are members of VLAN 1. However, the management
station can be attached to a port belonging to any VLAN, as long as that VLAN has
been assigned an IP address.
• IP Address Mode – Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual
configuration (Static), Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), or Boot
Protocol (BOOTP). If DHCP/BOOTP is enabled, IP will not function until a reply has
been received from the server. Requests will be broadcast periodically by the
switch for an IP address. (DHCP/BOOTP values can include the IP address,
subnet mask, and default gateway.)
• IP Address – Address of the VLAN interface that is allowed management access.
Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods.
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
• Subnet Mask – This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to
specific subnets. (Default: 255.0.0.0)
• Gateway IP address – IP address of the gateway router between this device and
management stations that exist on other network segments. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
• MAC Address – The physical layer address for this switch.
• Restart DHCP – Requests a new IP address from the DHCP server.
Console#show bridge-ext 4-165
Max support VLAN numbers: 255
Max support VLAN ID: 4094
Extended multicast filtering services: No
Static entry individual port: Yes
VLAN learning: IVL
Configurable PVID tagging: Yes
Local VLAN capable: No
Traffic classes: Enabled
Global GVRP status: Disabled
GMRP: Disabled
Console#

Basic Configuration
3-13
3
Manual Configuration
Web – Click System, IP Configuration. Select the VLAN through which the
management station is attached, set the IP Address Mode to “Static,” enter the IP
address, subnet mask and gateway, then click Apply.
Figure 3-6 Manual IP Configuration
CLI – Specify the management interface, IP address and default gateway.
Console#config
Console(config)#interface vlan 1 4-108
Console(config-if)#ip address 10.1.0.254 255.255.255.0 4-190
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 192.168.1.254 4-191
Console(config)#

3-14
3
Using DHCP/BOOTP
If your network provides DHCP/BOOTP services, you can configure the switch to be
dynamically configured by these services.
Web – Click System, IP Configuration. Specify the VLAN to which the management
station is attached, set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP. Click Apply to
save your changes. Then click Restart DHCP to immediately request a new
address. Note that the switch will also broadcast a request for IP configuration
settings on each power reset.
Figure 3-7 DHCP IP Configuration
Note: If you lose your management connection, use a console connection and enter
“show ip interface” to determine the new switch address.
CLI – Specify the management interface, and set the IP address mode to DHCP or
BOOTP, and then enter the “ip dhcp restart” command.
Renewing DCHP – DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a
specific period of time. If the address expires or the switch is moved to another
network segment, you will lose management access to the switch. In this case, you
can reboot the switch or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI.
Console#config
Console(config)#interface vlan 1 4-108
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp 4-190
Console#ip dhcp restart 4-192
Console#show ip interface 4-192
Console#

Basic Configuration
3-15
3
Web – If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning, you will not be
able to renew the IP settings via the web interface. You can only restart DHCP
service via the web interface if the current address is still available.
CLI – Enter the following command to restart DHCP service.
Managing Firmware
You can upload/download firmware to or from a TFTP server, or copy files to and
from switch units in a stack. By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server, that
file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation. You can also set the
switch to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version. You must
specify the method of file transfer, along with the file type and file names as required.
Command Attributes
• File Transfer Method – The firmware copy operation includes these options:
- file to file – Copies a file within the switch directory, assigning it a new name.
- file to tftp – Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server.
- tftp to file – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch.
- file to unit – Copies a file from this switch to another unit in the stack.
- unit to file – Copies a file from another unit in the stack to this switch.
• TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of a TFTP server.
• File Type – Specify opcode (operational code) to copy firmware.
• File Name – The file name should not contain slashes ( or /), the leading letter of
the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on
the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch.
(Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)
• Source/Destination Unit – Stack unit.
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Note: Up to two copies of the system software (i.e., the runtime firmware) can be stored
in the file directory on the switch. The currently designated startup version of this
file cannot be deleted.
Console#ip dhcp restart 4-192
Console#

3-16
3
Downloading System Software from a Server
When downloading runtime code, you can specify the destination file name to
replace the current image, or first download the file using a different name from the
current runtime code file, and then set the new file as the startup file.
Web –Click System, File Management, Copy Operation. Select “tftp to file” as the file
transfer method, enter the IP address of the TFTP server, set the file type to
“opcode,” enter the file name of the software to download, select a file on the switch
to overwrite or specify a new file name, then click Apply. If you replaced the current
firmware used for startup and want to start using the new operation code, reboot the
system via the System/Reset menu.
Figure 3-8 Copy Firmware
If you download to a new destination file, go to the System/File/Set Start-Up menu,
mark the operation code file used at startup, and click Apply. To start the new
firmware, reboot the system via the System/Reset menu.
Figure 3-9 Setting the Startup Code

Basic Configuration
3-17
3
To delete a file select System, File, Delete. Select the file name from the given list by
checking the tick box and click Apply. Note that the file currently designated as the
startup code cannot be deleted.
Figure 3-10 Deleting Files
CLI – To download new firmware form a TFTP server, enter the IP address of the
TFTP server, select “opcode” as the file type, then enter the source and destination
file names. When the file has finished downloading, set the new file to start up the
system, and then restart the switch.
To start the new firmware, enter the “reload” command or reboot the system.
Console#copy tftp file 4-65
TFTP server ip address: 192.168.1.23
Choose file type:
1. config: 2. opcode: <1-2>: 2
Source file name: V2.2.6.0.bix
Destination file name: V2.2.6.0.bix
-Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
Console#config
Console(config)#boot system opcode:V2.2.6.0.bix 4-70
Console#reload 4-22

3-18
3
Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings
You can upload/download configuration settings to/from a TFTP server or copy files
to and from switch units in a stack. The configuration files can be later downloaded
to restore the switch’s settings.
Command Attributes
• File Transfer Method – The configuration copy operation includes these options:
- file to file – Copies a file within the switch directory, assigning it a new name.
- file to running-config – Copies a file in the switch to the running configuration.
- file to startup-config – Copies a file in the switch to the startup configuration.
- file to tftp – Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server.
- running-config to file – Copies the running configuration to a file.
- running-config to startup-config – Copies the running config to the startup config.
- running-config to tftp – Copies the running configuration to a TFTP server.
- startup-config to file – Copies the startup configuration to a file on the switch.
- startup-config to running-config – Copies the startup config to the running config.
- startup-config to tftp – Copies the startup configuration to a TFTP server.
- tftp to file – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch.
- tftp to running-config – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the running config.
- tftp to startup-config – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the startup config.
- file to unit – Copies a file from this switch to another unit in the stack.
- unit to file – Copies a file from another unit in the stack to this switch.
• TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of a TFTP server.
• File Type – Specify config (configuration) to copy configuration settings.
• File Name — The file name should not contain slashes ( or /), the leading letter of
the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on
the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch. (Valid
characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)
• Source/Destination Unit – Stack unit.
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Note: The maximum number of user-defined configuration files is limited only by
available flash memory space.

Basic Configuration
3-19
3
Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server
You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the
startup file, or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination
file to directly replace it. Note that the file “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” can be
copied to the TFTP server, but cannot be used as the destination on the switch.
Web – Click System, File, Copy. Select “tftp to startup-config” or “tftp to file” and
enter the IP address of the TFTP server. Specify the name of the file to download
and select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name, then click
Apply.
Figure 3-11 Downloading Configuration Settings for Startup
If you download to a new file name using “tftp to startup-config” or “tftp to file,” the file
is automatically set as the start-up configuration file. To use the new settings, reboot
the system via the System/Reset menu.
Note that you can also select any configuration file as the start-up configuration by
using the System/File/Set Start-Up page.
Figure 3-12 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings

3-20
3
CLI – Enter the IP address of the TFTP server, specify the source file on the server,
set the startup file name on the switch, and then restart the switch.
To select another configuration file as the start-up configuration, use the boot
system command and then restart the switch.
Console Port Settings
You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100
compatible device to the switch’s serial console port. Management access through
the console port is controlled by various parameters, including a password, timeouts,
and basic communication settings. These parameters can be configured via the web
or CLI interface.
Command Attributes
• Login Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the
CLI. If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is
terminated for the session. (Range: 0-300 seconds; Default: 0 seconds)
• Exec Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected.
If user input is not detected within the timeout interval, the current session is
terminated. (Range: 0-65535 seconds; Default: 0 seconds)
• Password Threshold – Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the
number of failed logon attempts. When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the
system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time (set by the Silent
Time parameter) before allowing the next logon attempt.
(Range: 0-120; Default: 3 attempts)
• Silent Time – Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible
after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts has been exceeded.
(Range: 0-65535; Default: 0)
• Data Bits – Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and
generated by the console port. If parity is being generated, specify 7 data bits per
character. If no parity is required, specify 8 data bits per character. (Default: 8 bits)
• Parity – Defines the generation of a parity bit. Communication protocols provided
by some terminals can require a specific parity bit setting. Specify Even, Odd, or
None. (Default: None)
Console#copy tftp startup-config 4-65
Source configuration file name: config-1
Startup configuration file name [] : startup
-Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
Console#reload
Console#config
Console(config)#boot system config: startup-new 4-70
Console#reload 4-22

Basic Configuration
3-21
3
• Speed – Sets the terminal line’s baud rate for transmit (to terminal) and receive
(from terminal). Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to
the serial port. (Range: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 baud;
Default: 9600 bps)
• Stop Bits – Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte.
(Range: 1-2; Default: 1 stop bit)
• Password1 – Specifies a password for the line connection. When a connection is
started on a line with password protection, the system prompts for the password.
If you enter the correct password, the system shows a prompt.
(Default: No password)
• Login1 – Enables password checking at login. You can select authentication by a
single global password as configured for the Password parameter, or by
passwords set up for specific user-name accounts. (Default: Local)
Web – Click System, Line, Console. Specify the console port connection parameters
as required, then click Apply.
Figure 3-13 Console Port Settings
1. CLI only.

3-22
3
CLI – Enter Line Configuration mode for the console, then specify the connection
parameters as required. To display the current console port settings, use the show
line command from the Normal Exec level.
Telnet Settings
You can access the onboard configuration program over the network using Telnet
(i.e., a virtual terminal). Management access via Telnet can be enabled/disabled and
other various parameters set, including the TCP port number, timeouts, and a
password. These parameters can be configured via the web or CLI interface.
Command Attributes
• Telnet Status – Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch.
(Default: Enabled)
• Telnet Port Number – Sets the TCP port number for Telnet on the switch.
(Default: 23)
• Login Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the
CLI. If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is
terminated for the session. (Range: 0-300 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)
• Exec Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected.
If user input is not detected within the timeout interval, the current session is
terminated. (Range: 0-65535 seconds; Default: 600 seconds)
Console(config)#line console 4-10
Console(config-line)#login local 4-11
Console(config-line)#password 0 secret 4-12
Console(config-line)#timeout login response 0 4-13
Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 0 4-13
Console(config-line)#password-thresh 3 4-14
Console(config-line)#silent-time 60 4-15
Console(config-line)#databits 8 4-15
Console(config-line)#parity none 4-16
Console(config-line)#speed 115200 4-17
Console(config-line)#stopbits 1 4-17
Console(config-line)#end
Console#show line 4-18
Console configuration:
Password threshold: 3 times
Interactive timeout: Disabled
Login timeout: Disabled
Silent time: 60
Baudrate: 115200
Databits: 8
Parity: none
Stopbits: 1
VTY configuration:
Interactive timeout: 600 sec
Login timeout: 300 sec
Console#

Basic Configuration
3-23
3
• Password Threshold – Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the
number of failed logon attempts. When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the
system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time (set by the Silent
Time parameter) before allowing the next logon attempt.
(Range: 0-120; Default: 3 attempts)
• Password2 – Specifies a password for the line connection. When a connection is
started on a line with password protection, the system prompts for the password.
If you enter the correct password, the system shows a prompt. (Default: No
password)
• Login2 – Enables password checking at login. You can select authentication by a
single global password as configured for the Password parameter, or by
passwords set up for specific user-name accounts. (Default: Local)
Web – Click System, Line, Telnet. Specify the connection parameters for Telnet
access, then click Apply.
Figure 3-14 Enabling Telnet
2. CLI only.

3-24
3
CLI – Enter Line Configuration mode for a virtual terminal, then specify the
connection parameters as required. To display the current virtual terminal settings,
use the show line command from the Normal Exec level.
Configuring Event Logging
The switch allows you to control the logging of error messages, including the type of
events that are recorded in switch memory, logging to a remote System Log (syslog)
server, and displays a list of recent event messages.
System Log Configuration
The system allows you to enable or disable event logging, and specify which levels
are logged to RAM or flash memory.
Severe error messages that are logged to flash memory are permanently stored in
the switch to assist in troubleshooting network problems. Up to 4096 log entries can
be stored in the flash memory, with the oldest entries being overwritten first when the
available log memory (256 kilobytes) has been exceeded.
The System Logs page allows you to configure and limit system messages that are
logged to flash or RAM memory. The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to
flash and levels 0 to 6 to be logged to RAM.
Command Attributes
• System Log Status – Enables/disables the logging of debug or error messages to
the logging process. (Default: Enabled)
• Flash Level – Limits log messages saved to the switch’s permanent flash memory
for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 3 is specified, all
messages from level 0 to level 3 will be logged to flash. (Range: 0-7, Default: 3)
Console(config)#line vty 4-10
Console(config-line)#login local 4-11
Console(config-line)#password 0 secret 4-12
Console(config-line)#timeout login response 300 4-13
Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 600 4-13
Console(config-line)#password-thresh 3 4-14
Console(config-line)#end
Console#show line 4-18
Silent time: Disabled
Baudrate: 9600
Databits: 8
Parity: none
Stopbits: 1
VTY configuration:
Console#

Basic Configuration
3-25
3
• RAM Level – Limits log messages saved to the switch’s temporary RAM memory
for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 7 is specified, all
messages from level 0 to level 7 will be logged to RAM. (Range: 0-7, Default: 6)
Note: The Flash Level must be equal to or less than the RAM Level.
Web – Click System, Log, System Logs. Specify System Log Status, set the level of
event messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory, then click Apply.
Figure 3-15 System Logs
CLI – Enable system logging and then specify the level of messages to be logged to
RAM and flash memory. Use the show logging command to display the current
settings.
Table 3-3 Logging Levels
Level Severity Name Description
7 Debug Debugging messages
6 Informational Informational messages only
5 Notice Normal but significant condition, such as cold start
4 Warning Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)
3 Error Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)
2 Critical Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory
error - resource exhausted)
1 Alert Immediate action needed
0 Emergency System unusable
* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.
Console(config)#logging on 4-43
Console(config)#logging history ram 0 4-44
Console(config)#end
Console#show logging flash 4-47
Syslog logging: Enabled
History logging in FLASH: level emergencies
Console#

3-26
3
Remote Log Configuration
The Remote Logs page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are
sent to syslog servers or other management stations. You can also limit the error
messages sent to only those messages below a specified level.
Command Attributes
• Remote Log Status – Enables/disables the logging of debug or error messages
to the remote logging process. (Default: Enabled)
• Logging Facility – Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages.
There are eight facility types specified by values of 16 to 23. The facility type is
used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service.
The attribute specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See RFC
3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch.
However, it may be used by the syslog server to process messages, such as
sorting or storing messages in the corresponding database. (Range: 16-23,
Default: 23)
• Logging Trap – Limits log messages that are sent to the remote syslog server for
all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 3 is specified, all messages
from level 0 to level 3 will be sent to the remote server. (Range: 0-7, Default: 6)
• Host IP List – Displays the list of remote server IP addresses that receive the
syslog messages. The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five.
• Host IP Address – Specifies a new server IP address to add to the Host IP List.
Web – Click System, Log, Remote Logs. To add an IP address to the Host IP List,
type the new IP address in the Host IP Address box, and then click Add. To delete
an IP address, click the entry in the Host IP List, and then click Remove.
Figure 3-16 Remote Logs

Basic Configuration
3-27
3
CLI – Enter the syslog server host IP address, choose the facility type and set the
logging trap.
Displaying Log Messages
The Logs page allows you to scroll through the logged system and event messages.
The switch can store up to 2048 log entries in temporary random access memory
(RAM; i.e., memory flushed on power reset) and up to 4096 entries in permanent
flash memory.
Web – Click System, Log, Logs.
Figure 3-17 Displaying Logs
CLI – This example shows the event message stored in RAM.
Console(config)#logging host 192.168.1.15 4-45
Console(config)#logging facility 23 4-45
Console(config)#logging trap 4 4-46
Console(config)#end
Console#show logging trap 4-46
REMOTELOG status: Enabled
REMOTELOG facility type: local use 7
REMOTELOG level type: Warning conditions
REMOTELOG server ip address: 192.168.1.15
Console#
Console#show log ram 4-47
[1] 00:01:37 2001-01-01
"DHCP request failed - will retry later."
level: 4, module: 9, function: 0, and event no.: 10
[0] 00:00:35 2001-01-01
"System coldStart notification."
Console#

3-28
3
Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts
To alert system administrators of problems, the switch can use SMTP (Simple Mail
Transfer Protocol) to send email messages when triggered by logging events of a
specified level. The messages are sent to specified SMTP servers on the network
and can be retrieved using POP or IMAP clients.
Command Attributes
• Admin Status – Enables/disables the SMTP function. (Default: Enabled)
• Email Source Address – Sets the email address used for the “From” field in alert
messages. You may use a symbolic email address that identifies the switch, or the
address of an administrator responsible for the switch.
• Severity – Sets the syslog severity threshold level (see table on page 3-25) used
to trigger alert messages. All events at this level or higher will be sent to the
configured email recipients. For example, using Level 7 will report all events from
level 7 to level 0. (Default: Level 7)
• SMTP Server List – Specifies a list of up to three recipient SMTP servers. The
switch attempts to connect to the other listed servers if the first fails. Use the New
SMTP Server text field and the Add/Remove buttons to configure the list.
• Email Destination Address List – Specifies the email recipients of alert
messages. You can specify up to five recipients. Use the New Email Destination
Address text field and the Add/Remove buttons to configure the list.

Basic Configuration
3-29
3
Web – Click System, Log, SMTP. Enable SMTP, specify a source email address,
and select the minimum severity level. To add an IP address to the SMTP Server
List, type the new IP address in the SMTP Server field and click Add. To delete an IP
address, click the entry in the SMTP Server List and click Remove. Specify up to five
email addresses to receive the alert messages, and click Apply.
Figure 3-18 Enabling and Configuring SMTP Alerts

3-30
3
CLI – Enter the IP address of at least one SMTP server, set the syslog severity level
to trigger an email message, and specify the switch (source) and up to five recipient
(destination) email addresses. Enable SMTP with the logging sendmail command
to complete the configuration. Use the show logging sendmail command to display
the current SMTP configuration.
Resetting the System
Web – Click System, Reset to reboot the switch. When prompted, confirm that you
want reset the switch.
Figure 3-19 Resetting the System
CLI – Use the reload command to restart the switch. When prompted, confirm that
you want to reset the switch.
Note: When restarting the system, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test.
Console(config)#logging sendmail host 192.168.1.200 4-49
Console(config)#logging sendmail level 4 4-50
Console(config)#logging sendmail source-email john@acme.com 4-51
Console(config)##logging sendmail destination-email geoff@acme.com 4-51
Console(config)#logging sendmail 4-52
Console#show logging sendmail 4-52
SMTP servers
-----------------------------------------------
1. 192.168.1.200
SMTP minimum severity level: 4
SMTP destination email addresses
-----------------------------------------------
1. geoff@acme.com
SMTP source email address: john@acme.com
SMTP status: Enabled
Console#
Console#reload 4-22
System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y

Basic Configuration
3-31
3
Setting the System Clock
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) allows the switch to set its internal clock
based on periodic updates from a time server (SNTP or NTP). Maintaining an
accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and
times for event entries. You can also manually set the clock using the CLI. (See
“calendar set” on page 4-56.) If the clock is not set, the switch will only record the
time from the factory default set at the last bootup.
When the SNTP client is enabled, the switch periodically sends a request for a time
update to a configured time server. You can configure up to three time server IP
addresses. The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence.
Configuring SNTP
You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to time servers.
Command Attributes
• SNTP Client – Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client. This requires
at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field. (Default: Disabled)
• SNTP Poll Interval – Sets the interval between sending requests for a time update
from a time server. (Range: 16-16284 seconds; Default: 16 seconds)
• SNTP Server – Sets the IP address for up to three time servers. The switch
attempts to update the time from the first server, if this fails it attempts an update
from the next server in the sequence.
Web – Select SNTP, Configuration. Modify any of the required parameters, and click
Apply.
Figure 3-20 SNTP Configuration

3-32
3
CLI – This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP unicast client and
then displays the current time and settings.
Setting the Time Zone
SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time (or UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time,
or GMT) based on the time at the Earth’s prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To
display a time corresponding to your local time, you must indicate the number of
hours and minutes your time zone is east (before) or west (after) of UTC.
Command Attributes
• Current Time – Displays the current time.
• Name – Assigns a name to the time zone. (Range: 1-29 characters)
• Hours (0-12) – The number of hours before/after UTC.
• Minutes (0-59) – The number of minutes before/after UTC.
• Direction – Configures the time zone to be before (east) or after (west) UTC.
Web – Select SNTP, Clock Time Zone. Set the offset for your time zone relative to
the UTC, and click Apply.
Figure 3-21 Setting the System Clock
CLI - This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock.
Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19 137.82.140.80 128.250.36.2 4-54
Console(config)#sntp poll 60 4-55
Console(config)#sntp client 4-53
Console#show sntp
Current time: Jan 6 14:56:05 2004
Poll interval: 60
Current mode: unicast
SNTP status : Enabled
SNTP server 10.1.0.19 137.82.140.80 128.250.36.2
Current server: 128.250.36.2
Console#
Console(config)#clock timezone Taiwan hours 6 minute 0 after-UTC 4-56
Console(config)#

Simple Network Management Protocol
3-33
3
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a communication protocol
designed specifically for managing devices on a network. Equipment commonly
managed with SNMP includes switches, routers and host computers. SNMP is
typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network
environment, as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential
problems.
The switch includes an onboard SNMP agent that continuously monitors the status
of its hardware, as well as the traffic passing through its ports. A network
management station can access this information using software such as HP
OpenView. Access rights to the onboard agent are controlled by community strings.
To communicate with the switch, the management station must first submit a valid
community string for authentication. The options for configuring community strings,
trap functions, and restricting access to clients with specified IP addresses are
described in the following sections.
Setting Community Access Strings
You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access.
All community strings used for IP Trap Managers should be listed in this table. For
security reasons, you should consider removing the default strings.
Command Attributes
• SNMP Community Capability – Indicates that the switch supports up to five
community strings.
• Community String – A community string that acts like a password and permits
access to the SNMP protocol.
Default strings: “public” (read-only), “private” (read/write)
Range: 1-32 characters, case sensitive
• Access Mode
- Read-Only – Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations are
only able to retrieve MIB objects.
- Read/Write – Specifies read-write access. Authorized management stations are
able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.

3-34
3
Web – Click SNMP, Configuration. Add new community strings as required, select
the access rights from the Access Mode drop-down list, then click Add.
Figure 3-22 Configuring SNMP Community Strings
CLI – The following example adds the string “spiderman” with read/write access.
Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types
Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap managers.
You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to
your management station (using network management platforms such as HP
OpenView). You can specify up to five management stations that will receive
authentication failure messages and other trap messages from the switch.
Command Attributes
• Trap Manager Capability – This switch supports up to five trap managers.
• Current – Displays a list of the trap managers currently configured.
• Trap Manager IP Address – IP address of the host (the targeted recipient).
• Trap Manager Community String – Community string sent with the notification
operation. (Range: 1-32 characters, case sensitive)
• Trap Version – Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1 or v2c traps.
(The default is version 1.)
• Enable Authentication Traps – Issues a trap message whenever an invalid
community string is submitted during the SNMP access authentication process.
(Default: Enabled)
• Enable Link-up and Link-down Traps – Issues a trap message whenever a port
link is established or broken. (Default: Enabled)
Console(config)#snmp-server community spiderman rw 4-103
Console(config)#

User Authentication
3-35
3
Web – Click SNMP, Configuration. Fill in the IP address and community string for
each trap manager that will receive trap messages, and then click Add. Select the
trap types required using the check boxes for Authentication and Link-up/down
traps, and then click Apply.
Figure 3-23 Configuring IP Trap Managers
CLI – This example adds a trap manager and enables both authentication and
link-up, link-down traps.
User Authentication
You can restrict management access to this switch using the following options:
• User Accounts – Manually configure access rights on the switch for specified users.
• Authentication Settings – Use remote authentication to configure access rights.
• HTTPS Settings – Provide a secure web connection.
• SSH Settings – Provide a secure shell (for secure Telnet access).
• Port Security – Configure secure addresses for individual ports.
• 802.1X – Use IEEE 802.1X port authentication to control access to specific ports.
• IP Filter – Filters management access to the web, SNMP or Telnet interface.
Configuring User Accounts
The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters. However, the
administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent. You
should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible, and
store it in a safe place.
The default guest name is “guest” with the password “guest.” The default
administrator name is “admin” with the password “admin.”
Console(config)#snmp-server host 192.168.1.19 private version 2c 4-105
Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps 4-106

3-36
3
Command Attributes
• Account List – Displays the current list of user accounts and associated access
levels. (Defaults: admin, and guest)
• New Account – Displays configuration settings for a new account.
- User Name – The name of the user.
(Maximum length: 8 characters; maximum number of users: 16)
- Access Level – Specifies the user level.
(Options: Normal and Privileged)
- Password – Specifies the user password.
(Range: 0-8 characters plain text, case sensitive)
• Change Password – Sets a new password for the specified user name.
• Add/Remove – Adds or removes an account from the list.
Web – Click Security, User Accounts. To configure a new user account, specify a
user name, select the user’s access level, then enter a password and confirm it.
Click Add to save the new user account and add it to the Account List. To change the
password for a specific user, enter the user name and new password, confirm the
password by entering it again, then click Apply.
Figure 3-24 Access Levels
CLI – Assign a user name to access-level 15 (i.e., administrator), then specify the
password.
Console(config)#username bob access-level 15 4-26
Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith
Console(config)#

User Authentication
3-37
3
Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication
Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on
specified user names and passwords. You can manually configure access rights on
the switch, or you can use a remote access authentication server based on RADIUS
or TACACS+ protocols.
Remote Authentication Dial-in
User Service (RADIUS) and
Terminal Access Controller
Access Control System Plus
(TACACS+) are logon
authentication protocols that
use software running on a
central server to control
access to RADIUS-aware or
TACACS-aware devices on the
network. An authentication
server contains a database of
multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user
that requires management access to the switch.
RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort delivery,
while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that RADIUS encrypts
only the password in the access-request packet from the client to the server, while
TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.
Command Usage
• By default, management access is always checked against the authentication
database stored on the local switch. If a remote authentication server is used, you
must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for
the remote authentication protocol. Local and remote logon authentication control
management access via the console port, web browser, or Telnet.
• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for
each user name/password pair. The user name, password, and privilege level
must be configured on the authentication server.
• You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the
authentication sequence. For example, if you select (1) RADIUS, (2) TACACS and
(3) Local, the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first. If the
RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is attempted using the
TACACS+ server, and finally the local user name and password is checked.
Web
Telnet
RADIUS/
TACACS+
server
console
1. Client attempts management access.
2. Switch contacts authentication server.
3. Authentication server challenges client.
4. Client responds with proper password or key.
5. Authentication server approves access.
6. Switch grants management access.

3-38
3
Command Attributes
• Authentication – Select the authentication, or authentication sequence required:
- Local – User authentication is performed only locally by the switch.
- Radius – User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only.
- TACACS – User authentication is performed using a TACACS+ server only.
- [authentication sequence] – User authentication is performed by up to three
authentication methods in the indicated sequence.
• RADIUS Settings
- Global – Provides globally applicable RADIUS settings.
- ServerIndex – Specifies one of five RADIUS servers that may be configured.
The switch attempts authentication using the listed sequence of servers. The
process ends when a server either approves or denies access to a user.
- Server IP Address – Address of authentication server. (Default: 10.1.0.1)
- Server Port Number – Network (UDP) port of authentication server used for
authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 1812)
- Secret Text String – Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for
client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)
- Number of Server Transmits – Number of times the switch tries to authenticate
logon access via the authentication server. (Range: 1-30; Default: 2)
- Timeout for a reply – The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from
the RADIUS server before it resends the request. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 5)
• TACACS Settings
- Server IP Address – Address of the TACACS+ server. (Default: 10.11.12.13)
- Server Port Number – Network (TCP) port of TACACS+ server used for
authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 49)
- Secret Text String – Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for
client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)
Note: The local switch user database has to be set up by manually entering user names
and passwords using the CLI. (See “username” on page 4-26.)

User Authentication
3-39
3
Web – Click Security, Authentication Settings. To configure local or remote
authentication preferences, specify the authentication sequence (i.e., one to three
methods), fill in the parameters for RADIUS or TACACS+ authentication if selected,
and click Apply.
Figure 3-25 Authentication Settings
CLI – Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication.
Console(config)#authentication login radius 4-71
Console(config)#radius-server port 181 4-74
Console(config)#radius-server key green 4-74
Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5 4-75
Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10 4-75
Console(config)#radius-server 1 host 192.168.1.25 4-73
Console(config)#end
Console#show radius-server 4-76
Remote RADIUS server configuration:
Global settings:
Communication key with RADIUS server: *****
Server port number: 181
Retransmit times: 5
Request timeout: 10
Server 1:
Server IP address: 192.168.1.25
Retransmit times: 2
Request timeout: 5

3-40
3
Configuring HTTPS
You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol
(HTTPS) over the Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an
encrypted connection) to the switch’s web interface.
Command Usage
• Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch.
However, you cannot configure both services to use the same UDP port.
• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your
browser: https://device[:port_number]
• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:
- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.
- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the
connection.
- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data.
• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.
A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5.x or above
and Netscape Navigator 6.2 or above.
• The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS:
• To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default Secure-site
Certificate” on page 3-41.
Command Attributes
• HTTPS Status – Allows you to enable/disable the HTTPS server feature on the
switch. (Default: Enabled)
• Change HTTPS Port Number – Specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS
connection to the switch’s web interface. (Default: Port 443)
Console#configure
Console(config)#authentication login tacacs 4-71
Console(config)#tacacs-server host 10.20.30.40 4-77
Console(config)#tacacs-server port 200 4-77
Console(config)#tacacs-server key green 4-78
Console#show tacacs-server 4-78
Communication key with tacacs server: green
Console(config)#
Table 3-4 HTTPS System Support
Web Browser Operating System
Internet Explorer 5.0 or later Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),
Windows 2000, Windows XP
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Solaris 2.6

User Authentication
3-41
3
Web – Click Security, HTTPS Settings. Enable HTTPS and specify the port number,
then click Apply.
Figure 3-26 HTTPS Settings
CLI – This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number.
Replacing the Default Secure-site Certificate
When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS (for secure access), a Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate appears for the switch. By default, the certificate that
Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the
site is not recognized as a secure site. This is because the certificate has not been
signed by an approved certification authority. If you want this warning to be replaced
by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure, you must
obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a recognized
certification authority.
Caution: For maximum security, we recommend you obtain a unique Secure Sockets
Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity. This is because the default
certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased.
When you have obtained these, place them on your TFTP server, and use the
following command at the switch's command-line interface to replace the default
(unrecognized) certificate with an authorized one:
Note: The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated. To reset the
switch, type: Console#reload
Console(config)#ip http secure-server 4-31
Console(config)#ip http secure-port 443 4-32
Console(config)#
Console#copy tftp https-certificate 4-65
TFTP server ip address: <server ip-address>
Source certificate file name: <certificate file name>
Source private file name: <private key file name>
Private password: <password for private key>

3-42
3
Configuring the Secure Shell
The Berkley-standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix
systems. Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows
and other environments. These tools, including commands such as rlogin (remote
login), rsh (remote shell), and rcp (remote copy), are not secure from hostile attacks.
The Secure Shell (SSH) includes server/client applications intended as a secure
replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools. SSH can also provide
remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet.
When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol, the switch generates a
public-key that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access
authentication. SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and
SSH-enabled management station clients, and ensures that data traveling over the
network arrives unaltered.
Note that you need to install an SSH client on the management station to access the
switch for management via the SSH protocol.
Note: The switch supports both SSH Version 1.5 and 2.0 clients.
Command Usage
The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key
authentication. If password authentication is specified by the SSH client, then the
password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS+ remote
authentication server, as specified on the Authentication Settings page
(page 3-37). If public key authentication is specified by the client, then you must
configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the
following section. Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password
authentication, you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch (SSH
Host Key Settings) and enable the SSH server (Authentication Settings).
To use the SSH server, complete these steps:
1. Generate a Host Key Pair – On the SSH Host Key Settings page, create a host
public/private key pair.
2. Provide Host Public Key to Clients – Many SSH client programs automatically
import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch.
Otherwise, you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management
station and place the host public key in it. An entry for a public key in the known
hosts file would appear similar to the following example:
10.1.0.54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254
15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233
76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206
51941746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545
24083971752646358058176716709574804776117

User Authentication
3-43
3
3. Import Client’s Public Key to the Switch – Use the copy tftp public-key
command (page 4-65) to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH
client’s granted management access to the switch. (Note that these clients
must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as
described on page 3-35.) The clients are subsequently authenticated using
these keys. The current firmware only accepts public key files based on
standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1
key:
1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880
05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199
69631781366277414168985132049117204830339254324101637997592371449011938
00609025394840848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671
31629432532818915045306393916643 steve@192.168.1.19
4. Set the Optional Parameters – On the SSH Settings page, configure the
optional parameters, including the authentication timeout, the number of retries,
and the server key size.
5. Enable SSH Service – On the SSH Settings page, enable the SSH server on
the switch.
6. Challenge-Response Authentication – When an SSH client attempts to contact
the switch, the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key
and encryption method. Only clients that have a private key corresponding to
the public keys stored on the switch can access. The following exchanges take
place during this process:
a. The client sends its public key to the switch.
b. The switch compares the client's public key to those stored in memory.
c. If a match is found, the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random
sequence of bytes, and sends this string to the client.
d. The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes, and sends the
decrypted bytes back to the switch.
e. The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent. If the
two sets match, this means that the client's private key corresponds to an
authorized public key, and the client is authenticated.
Notes: 1. To use SSH with only password authentication, the host public key must still
be given to the client, either during initial connection or manually entered into
the known host file. However, you do not need to configure the client’s keys.
2. The SSH server supports up to four client sessions. The maximum number
of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions.

3-44
3
Generating the Host Key Pair
A host public/private key pair is used to provide secure communications between an
SSH client and the switch. After generating this key pair, you must provide the host
public key to SSH clients and import the client’s public key to the switch as
described in the proceeding section (Command Usage).
Field Attributes
• Public-Key of Host-Key – The public key for the host.
- RSA (Version 1): The first field indicates the size of the host key (e.g., 1024), the
second field is the encoded public exponent (e.g., 65537), and the last string is
the encoded modulus.
- DSA (Version 2): The first field indicates that the encryption method used by
SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard (DSS). The last string is the
encoded modulus.
• Host-Key Type – The key type used to generate the host key pair (i.e., public and
private keys). (Range: RSA (Version 1), DSA (Version 2), Both: Default: RSA)
The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client first
establishes a connection with the switch, and then negotiates with the client to
select either DES (56-bit) or 3DES (168-bit) for data encryption.
• Save Host-Key from Memory to Flash – Saves the host key from RAM (i.e.,
volatile memory to flash memory. Otherwise, the host key pair is stored to RAM by
default. Note that you must select this item prior to generating the host-key pair.
• Generate – This button is used to generate the host key pair. Note that you must
first generate the host key pair before you can enable the SSH server on the SSH
Server Settings page.
• Clear – This button clears the host key from both volatile memory (RAM) and
non-volatile memory (Flash).

User Authentication
3-45
3
Web – Click Security, SSH, Host-Key Settings. Select the host-key type from the
drop-down box, select the option to save the host key from memory to flash (if
required) prior to generating the key, and then click Generate.
Figure 3-27 SSH Host-Key Settings
CLI – This example generates a host-key pair using both the RSA and DSA
algorithms, stores the keys to flash memory, and then displays the host’s public keys.
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate 4-36
Console#ip ssh save host-key 4-36
Console#show public-key host 4-36
Host:
RSA:
1024 65537 127250922544926402131336514546131189679055192360076028653006761
82409690947448320102524878965977592168322225584652387791546479807396314033
86925793105105765212243052807865885485789272602937866089236841423275912127
60325919683697053439336438445223335188287173896894511729290510813919642025
190932104328579045764891
DSA:
ssh-dss AAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAN6zwIqCqDb3869jYVXlME1sHL0EcE/Re6hlasfEthIwmj
hLY4O0jqJZpcEQUgCfYlum0Y2uoLka+Py9ieGWQ8f2gobUZKIICuKg6vjO9XTs7XKc05xfzkBi
KviDa+2OrIz6UK+6vFOgvUDFedlnixYTVo+h5v8r0ea2rpnO6DkZAAAAFQCNZn/x17dwpW8RrV
DQnSWw4Qk+6QAAAIEAptkGeB6B5hwagH4gUOCY6i1TmrmSiJgfwO9OqRPUMbCAkCC+uzxatOo7
drnIZypMx+Sx5RUdMGgKS+9ywsa1cWqHeFY5ilc3lDCNBueeLykZzVS+RS+azTKIk/zrJh8GLG
Nq375R55yRxFvmcGIn/Q7IphPqyJ3o9MK8LFDfmJEAAACAL8A6tESiswP2OFqX7VGoEbzVDSOI
RTMFy3iUXtvGyQAOVSy67Mfc3lMtgqPRUOYXDiwIBp5NXgilCg5z7VqbmRm28mWc5a//f8TUAg
PNWKV6W0hqmshQdotVzDR1e+XKNTZj0uTwWfjO5Kytdn4MdoTHgrbl/DMdAfjnte8MZZs=
Console#

3-46
3
Configuring the SSH Server
The SSH server includes basic settings for authentication.
Field Attributes
• SSH Server Status – Allows you to enable/disable the SSH server on the switch.
(Default: Disabled)
• Version – The Secure Shell version number. Version 2.0 is displayed, but the
switch supports management access via either SSH Version 1.5 or 2.0 clients.
• SSH Authentication Timeout – Specifies the time interval in seconds that the
SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt.
(Range: 1-120 seconds; Default: 120 seconds)
• SSH Authentication Retries – Specifies the number of authentication attempts
that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the
authentication process. (Range: 1-5 times; Default: 3)
• SSH Server-Key Size – Specifies the SSH server key size.
(Range: 512-896 bits; Default:768)
- The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch.
- The host key is shared with the SSH client, and is fixed at 1024 bits.
Web – Click Security, SSH, Settings. Enable SSH and adjust the authentication
parameters as required, then click Apply. Note that you must first generate the host
key pair on the SSH Host-Key Settings page before you can enable the SSH server.
Figure 3-28 SSH Server Settings

User Authentication
3-47
3
CLI – This example enables SSH, sets the authentication parameters, and displays
the current configuration. It shows that the administrator has made a connection via
SHH, and then disables this connection.
Configuring Port Security
Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more
device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port.
When port security is enabled on a port, the switch stops learning new MAC
addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum
number. Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic
or static address table will be accepted as authorized to access the network through
that port. If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch
port, the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by
disabling the port and sending a trap message.
To use port security, specify a maximum number of addresses to allow on the port
and then let the switch dynamically learn the <source MAC address, VLAN> pair for
frames received on the port. Note that you can also manually add secure addresses
to the port using the Static Address Table (page 3-89). When the port has reached
the maximum number of MAC addresses the selected port will stop learning. The
MAC addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not age out.
Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the
switch.
Command Usage
• A secure port has the following restrictions:
- It cannot use port monitoring.
- It cannot be a multi-VLAN port.
- It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk.
- It should not be connected to a network interconnection device.
• The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure port is zero.
You must configure a maximum address count from 1 - 1024 for the port to allow
access.
Console(config)#ip ssh server 4-36
Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 100 4-37
Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retries 5 4-37
Console(config)#ip ssh server-key size 512 4-38
Console(config)#end
Console#show ip ssh 4-40
SSH Enabled - version 2.0
Negotiation timeout: 120 secs; Authentication retries: 5
Server key size: 512 bits
Console#show ssh 4-41
Connection Version State Username Encryption
0 2.0 Session-Started admin ctos aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
stoc aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
Console#disconnect 0 4-18
Console#

3-48
3
• If a port is disabled (shut down) due to a security violation, it must be manually
re-enabled from the Port/Port Configuration page (page 3-66).
Command Attributes
• Port – Port number.
• Name – Descriptive text (page 4-109).
• Action – Indicates the action to be taken when a port security violation is detected:
- None: No action should be taken. (This is the default.)
- Trap: Send an SNMP trap message.
- Shutdown: Disable the port.
- Trap and Shutdown: Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port.
• Security Status – Enables or disables port security on the port. (Default: Disabled)
• Max MAC Count – The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned
on a port. (Range: 0 - 1024, where 0 means disabled)
• Trunk – Trunk number if port is a member (page 3-69 and 3-70).
Web – Click Security, Port Security. Set the action to take when an invalid address is
detected on a port, mark the checkbox in the Status column to enable security for a
port, set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port, and click Apply.
Figure 3-29 Configuring Port Security
CLI – This example selects the target port, sets the port security action to send a
trap and disable the port and sets the maximum MAC addresses allowed on the
port, and then enables port security for the port.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#port security action trap-and-shutdown 4-79
Console(config-if)#port security max-mac-count 20 4-79
Console(config-if)#port security 4-79
Console(config-if)#

User Authentication
3-49
3
Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication
Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by
simply attaching a client PC. Although this automatic configuration and access is a
desirable feature, it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and
possibly gain access to sensitive network data.
The IEEE 802.1X (dot1X) standard defines a port-based access control procedure
that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit
credentials for authentication. Access to all switch ports in a network can be
centrally controlled from a server, which means that authorized users can use the
same credentials for authentication from any point within the network.
This switch uses the
Extensible Authentication
Protocol over LANs (EAPOL)
to exchange authentication
protocol messages with the
client, and a remote RADIUS
authentication server to verify
user identity and access
rights. When a client (i.e.,
Supplicant) connects to a
switch port, the switch (i.e.,
Authenticator) responds with an EAPOL identity request. The client provides its
identity (such as a user name) in an EAPOL response to the switch, which it
forwards to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and
sends an access challenge back to the client. The EAP packet from the RADIUS
server contains not only the challenge, but the authentication method to be used.
The client can reject the authentication method and request another, depending on
the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server. The authentication
method must be MD5. The client responds to the appropriate method with its
credentials, such as a password or certificate. The RADIUS server verifies the client
credentials and responds with an accept or reject packet. If authentication is
successful, the switch allows the client to access the network. Otherwise, network
access is denied and the port remains blocked.
The operation of 802.1X on the switch requires the following:
• The switch must have an IP address assigned.
• RADIUS authentication must be enabled on the switch and the IP address of the
RADIUS server specified.
• 802.1X must be enabled globally for the switch.
• Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1X “Auto” mode.
• Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1X client software
installed and properly configured.
• The RADIUS server and 802.1X client support EAP. (The switch only supports
EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client.)
802.1x
client
RADIUS
server
1. Client attempts to access a switch port.
2. Switch sends client an identity request.
3. Client sends back identity information.
4. Switch forwards this to authentication server.
5. Authentication server challenges client.
6. Client responds with proper credentials.
7. Authentication server approves access.
8. Switch grants client access to this port.

3-50
3
• The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP authentication
type – MD5. (Some clients have native support in Windows, otherwise the dot1x
client must support it.)
Displaying 802.1X Global Settings
The 802.1X protocol provides client authentication.
Command Attributes
• 802.1X System Authentication Control – The global setting for 802.1X.
Web – Click Security, 802.1X, Information.
Figure 3-30 802.1X Global Information
CLI – This example shows the default global setting for 802.1X.
Console#show dot1x 4-86
Global 802.1X Parameters
system-auth-control: enable
802.1X Port Summary
Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized
1/1 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a
1/2 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a...
802.1X Port Details
802.1X is disabled on port 1/1
..
.
Console#

User Authentication
3-51
3
Configuring 802.1X Global Settings
The 802.1X protocol provides port authentication. The 802.1X protocol must be
enabled globally for the switch system before port settings are active.
Command Attributes
• 802.1X System Authentication Control – Sets the global setting for 802.1X.
(Default: Disabled)
Web – Select Security, 802.1X, Configuration. Enable 802.1X globally for the switch,
and click Apply.
Figure 3-31 802.1X Global Configuration
CLI – This example enables 802.1X globally for the switch.
Configuring Port Settings for 802.1X
When 802.1X is enabled, you need to configure the parameters for the
authentication process that runs between the client and the switch (i.e.,
authenticator), as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the
switch and authentication server. These parameters are described in this section.
Command Attributes
• Port – Port number.
• Status – Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port.
(Default: Disabled)
• Operation Mode – Allows single or multiple hosts (clients) to connect to an
802.1X-authorized port. (Options: Single-Host, Multi-Host; Default: Single-Host)
• Max Count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when the
Multi-Host operation mode is selected. (Range: 1-1024; Default: 5)
• Mode – Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options:
- Auto – Requires a dot1x-aware client to be authorized by the authentication
server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied access.
- Force-Authorized – Forces the port to grant access to all clients, either
dot1x-aware or otherwise. (This is the default setting.)
- Force-Unauthorized – Forces the port to deny access to all clients, either
dot1x-aware or otherwise.
Console(config)#dot1x system-auth-control 4-81
Console(config)#

3-52
3
• Re-authen – Sets the client to be re-authenticated after the interval specified by
the Re-authentication Period. Re-authentication can be used to detect if a new
device is plugged into a switch port. (Default: Disabled)
• Max-Req – Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an
EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session.
(Range: 1-10; Default 2)
• Quiet Period – Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count
has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client.
• Re-authen Period – Sets the time period after which a connected client must be
re-authenticated. (Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 3600 seconds)
• Tx Period – Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch
waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 30 seconds)
• Authorized –
- Yes – Connected client is authorized.
- No – Connected client is not authorized.
- Blank – Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port.
• Supplicant – Indicates the MAC address of a connected client.
• Trunk – Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port.
Web – Click Security, 802.1X, Port Configuration. Modify the parameters required,
and click Apply.
Figure 3-32 802.1X Port Configuration

User Authentication
3-53
3
CLI – This example sets the 802.1X parameters on port 2. For a description of the
additional fields displayed in this example, see “show dot1x” on page 4-86.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2 4-108
Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto 4-82
Console(config-if)#dot1x re-authentication 4-84
Console(config-if)#dot1x max-req 5 4-82
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 30 4-84
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout re-authperiod 1800 4-85
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout tx-period 40 4-85
Console#show dot1x 4-86
802.1X Port Summary
1/2 enabled Single-Host auto yes...
802.1X Port Details
802.1X is enabled on port 1/2
reauth-enabled: Enable
reauth-period: 1800
quiet-period: 30
tx-period: 40
supplicant-timeout: 30
server-timeout: 10
reauth-max: 2
max-req: 5
Status Authorized
Operation mode Single-Host
Max count 5
Port-control Auto
Supplicant 00-00-e8-49-5e-dc
Current Identifier 3
Authenticator State Machine
State Authenticated
Reauth Count 0
Backend State Machine
State Idle
Request Count 0
Identifier(Server) 2
Reauthentication State Machine
State Initialize...802.1X is disabled on port 1/26
Console#

3-54
3
Displaying 802.1X Statistics
This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port.
Table 3-5 802.1X Statistics
Parameter Description
Rx EAPOL Start The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator.
Rx EAPOL Logoff The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator.
Rx EAPOL Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which
the frame type is not recognized.
Rx EAPOL Total The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this
Authenticator.
Rx EAP Resp/Id The number of EAP Resp/Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator.
Rx EAP Resp/Oth The number of valid EAP Response frames (other than Resp/Id frames) that have
been received by this Authenticator.
Rx EAP LenError The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which
the Packet Body Length field is invalid.
Rx Last EAPOLVer The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.
Rx Last EAPOLSrc The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.
Tx EAPOL Total The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this
Authenticator.
Tx EAP Req/Id The number of EAP Req/Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator.
Tx EAP Req/Oth The number of EAP Request frames (other than Rq/Id frames) that have been
transmitted by this Authenticator.

User Authentication
3-55
3
Web – Select Security, 802.1X, Statistics. Select the required port and then click
Query. Click Refresh to update the statistics.
Figure 3-33 Displaying 802.1X Port Statistics
CLI – This example displays the 802.1X statistics for port 4.
Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access
You create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that are allowed
management access to the switch through the web interface, SNMP, or Telnet.
Command Usage
• The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default. Once you add
an entry to a filter list, access to that interface is restricted to the specified
addresses.
• If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid
address, the switch will reject the connection, enter an event message in the
system log, and send a trap message to the trap manager.
Console#show dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1/4 4-86
Eth 1/4
Rx: EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAP EAP EAP
Start Logoff Invalid Total Resp/Id Resp/Oth LenError
2 0 0 1007 672 0 0
Last Last
EAPOLVer EAPOLSrc
1 00-00-E8-98-73-21
Tx: EAPOL EAP EAP
Total Req/Id Req/Oth
2017 1005 0
Console#

3-56
3
• IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access respectively. Each
of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses, either individual
addresses or address ranges.
• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or Telnet), the
switch will not accept overlapping address ranges. When entering addresses for
different groups, the switch will accept overlapping address ranges.
• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must delete
the entire range, and reenter the addresses.
• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by
specifying both the start address and end address.
Command Attributes
• Web IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the web group.
• SNMP IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the SNMP group.
• Telnet IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the Telnet group.
• IP Filter List – IP address which are allowed management access to this interface.
• Start IP Address – A single IP address, or the starting address of a range.
• End IP Address – The end address of a range.
• Add/Remove Filtering Entry – Adds/removes an IP address from the list.
Web – Click Security, IP Filter. Enter the IP addresses or range of addresses that
are allowed management access to an interface, and click Add IP Filtering Entry to
update the filter list.
Figure 3-34 Creating an IP Filter List

Access Control Lists
3-57
3
CLI – This example allows SNMP access for a specific client.
Access Control Lists (ACL) provide packet filtering for IP frames (based on address,
protocol, Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code) or any frames (based
on MAC address or Ethernet type). To filter incoming packets, first create an access
list, add the required rules and then bind the list to a specific port.
Configuring Access Control Lists
An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses,
MAC addresses, or other more specific criteria. This switch tests ingress or egress
packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one. A packet will be accepted as
soon as it matches a permit rule, or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule. If no
rules match for a list of all permit rules, the packet is dropped; and if no rules match
for a list of all deny rules, the packet is accepted.
Command Usage
The following restrictions apply to ACLs:
• Each ACL can have up to 32 rules.
• The maximum number of ACLs is 88.
• However, due to resource restrictions, the average number of rules bound to the
ports should not exceed 20.
• This switch supports ACLs for ingress filtering only. However, you can only bind
one IP ACL to any port and one MAC ACL globally for ingress filtering. In other
words, only two ACLs can be bound to an interface - Ingress IP ACL and Ingress
MAC ACL.
The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows:
1. User-defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.
2. User-defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.
Console(config)#management snmp-client 10.1.2.3 4-28
Console(config)#end
Console#show management all-client
Management IP Filter
HTTP-Client:
Start IP address End IP address
-----------------------------------------------
SNMP-Client:
-----------------------------------------------
1. 10.1.2.3 10.1.2.3
TELNET-Client:
-----------------------------------------------
Console#

3-58
3
3. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.
4. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.
5. If no explicit rule is matched, the implicit default is permit all.
Setting the ACL Name and Type
Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an ACL.
Command Attributes
• Name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
• Type – There are three filtering modes:
- Standard: IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source IP address.
- Extended: IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or destination IP
address, as well as protocol type and protocol port number. If the “TCP” protocol
is specified, then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code.
- MAC: MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source or destination
MAC address and the Ethernet frame type (RFC 1060).
Web – Click Security, ACL, Configuration. Enter an ACL name in the Name field,
select the list type (IP Standard, IP Extended, or MAC), and click Add to open the
configuration page for the new list.
Figure 3-35 Selecting ACL Type
CLI – This example creates a standard IP ACL named david.
Console(config)#access-list ip standard david 4-90
Console(config-std-acl)#

3-59
3
Configuring a Standard IP ACL
Command Attributes
• Action – An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules.
• Address Type – Specifies the source IP address. Use “Any” to include all possible
addresses, “Host” to specify a specific host address in the Address field, or “IP” to
specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields.
(Options: Any, Host, IP; Default: Any)
• IP Address – Source IP address.
• Subnet Mask – A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255, each
separated by a period. The mask uses 1 bits to indicate “match” and 0 bits to
indicate “ignore.” The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address,
and compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port(s) to which this
ACL has been assigned.
Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Select the address type (Any, Host,
or IP). If you select “Host,” enter a specific address. If you select “IP,” enter a subnet
address and the mask for an address range. Then click Add.
Figure 3-36 ACL Configuration - Standard IP
CLI – This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10.1.1.21
and another rule for the address range 168.92.16.x – 168.92.31.x using a bitmask.
Console(config-std-acl)#permit host 10.1.1.21 4-91
Console(config-std-acl)#permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0

3-60
3
Configuring an Extended IP ACL
Command Attributes
• Source/Destination Address Type – Specifies the source or destination IP
address. Use “Any” to include all possible addresses, “Host” to specify a specific
host address in the Address field, or “IP” to specify a range of addresses with the
Address and SubMask fields. (Options: Any, Host, IP; Default: Any)
• Source/Destination Address – Source or destination IP address.
• Source/Destination Subnet Mask – Subnet mask for source or destination
address. (See the description for Subnet Mask on page 3-59.)
• Service Type – Packet priority settings based on the following criteria:
- Precedence – IP precedence level. (Range: 0-7)
- TOS – Type of Service level. (Range: 0-15)
- DSCP – DSCP priority level. (Range: 0-63)
• Protocol – Specifies the protocol type to match as TCP, UDP or Others, where
others indicates a specific protocol number (0-255). (Options: TCP, UDP, Others;
Default: TCP)
• Source/Destination Port – Source/destination port number for the specified
protocol type. (Range: 0-65535)
• Control Code – Decimal number (representing a bit string) that specifies flag bits
in byte 14 of the TCP header. (Range: 0-63)
• Control Code Bitmask – Decimal number representing the code bits to match.
The control bitmask is a decimal number (for an equivalent binary bit mask) that is
applied to the control code. Enter a decimal number, where the equivalent binary
bit “1” means to match a bit and “0” means to ignore a bit. The following bits may
be specified:
- 1 (fin) – Finish
- 2 (syn) – Synchronize
- 4 (rst) – Reset
- 8 (psh) – Push
- 16 (ack) – Acknowledgement
- 32 (urg) – Urgent pointer
For example, use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the
following flags set:
- SYN flag valid, use control-code 2, control bitmask 2
- Both SYN and ACK valid, use control-code 18, control bitmask 18
- SYN valid and ACK invalid, use control-code 2, control bitmask 18

3-61
3
Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Specify the source and/or
destination addresses. Select the address type (Any, Host, or IP). If you select
“Host,” enter a specific address. If you select “IP,” enter a subnet address and the
mask for an address range. Set any other required criteria, such as service type,
protocol type, or TCP control code. Then click Add.
Figure 3-37 ACL Configuration - Extended IP
CLI – This example adds two rules:
(1) Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10.7.1.x. For
example, if the rule is matched; i.e., the rule (10.7.1.0 & 255.255.255.0) equals
the masked address (10.7.1.2 & 255.255.255.0), the packet passes through.
(2) Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 to any destination
address when set for destination TCP port 80 (i.e., HTTP).
(3) Permit all TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 with the TCP control
code set to “SYN.”
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any 4-92
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any
destination-port 80
control-flag 2 2

3-62
3
Configuring a MAC ACL
Command Attributes
• Source/Destination Address Type – Use “Any” to include all possible addresses,
“Host” to indicate a specific MAC address, or “MAC” to specify an address range
with the Address and Bitmask fields. (Options: Any, Host, MAC; Default: Any)
• Source/Destination MAC Address – Source or destination MAC address.
• Source/Destination Bitmask – Hexidecimal mask for source or destination MAC
address.
• VID – VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)
• Ethernet Type – This option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted
packets. (Range: 0-65535)
A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060. A few of the
more common types include 0800 (IP), 0806 (ARP), 8137 (IPX).
Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Specify the source and/or
destination addresses. Select the address type (Any, Host, or MAC). If you select
“Host,” enter a specific address (e.g., 11-22-33-44-55-66). If you select “MAC,” enter
a base address and a hexidecimal bitmask for an address range. Set any other
required criteria, such as VID or Ethernet type. Then click Add.
Figure 3-38 ACL Configuration - MAC
CLI – This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination
address 00-e0-29-94-34-de where the Ethernet type is 0800.
Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de
ethertype 0800 4-98
Console(config-mac-acl)#

3-63
3
Binding a Port to an Access Control List
After configuring Access Control Lists (ACL), you should bind them to the ports that
need to filter traffic. You can assign one IP access list to any port, but you can only
assign one MAC access list to all the ports on the switch.
Command Usage
This switch only supports ACLs for ingress filtering. You can only bind one IP ACL to
any port, and one MAC ACL globally, for ingress filtering.
Command Attributes
• Port – Fixed port or SFP module. (Range: 1-26/50)
• IP – Specifies the IP Access List to enable for a port.
• MAC – Specifies the MAC Access List to enable globally.
• IN – ACL for ingress packets.
• ACL Name – Name of the ACL.
Web – Click Security, ACL, Port Binding. Mark the Enabled field for the port you
want to bind to an ACL, select the required ACL from the drop-down list, then click
Apply.
Figure 3-39 Binding a Port to an ACL

3-64
3
CLI – This example assigns an IP and MAC access list to port 1, and an IP access
list to port 3.
Port Configuration
Displaying Connection Status
You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current
connection status, including link state, speed/duplex mode, flow control, and
auto-negotiation.
Field Attributes (Web)
• Name – Interface label.
• Type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T, or SFP)
• Admin Status – Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled.
• Oper Status – Indicates if the link is Up or Down.
• Speed Duplex Status – Shows the current speed and duplex mode.
(Auto, or fixed choice)
• Flow Control Status – Indicates the type of flow control currently in use.
(IEEE 802.3x, Back-Pressure or None)
• Autonegotiation – Shows if auto-negotiation is enabled or disabled.
• Trunk Member3 – Shows if port is a trunk member.
• Creation4 – Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP.
Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in 4-94
Console(config-if)#mac access-group jerry in 4-99
Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in
Console(config-if)#
3. Port information only.
4. Trunk information only.

Port Configuration
3-65
3
Web – Click Port, Port Information or Trunk Information.
Figure 3-40 Displaying Port/Trunk Information
Field Attributes (CLI)
Basic Information:
• Port type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T, or SFP)
• MAC address – The physical layer address for this port. (To access this item on
the web, see “Setting the Switch’s IP Address” on page 3-12.)
Configuration:
• Name – Interface label.
• Port admin – Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled (i.e., up or down).
• Speed-duplex – Shows the current speed and duplex mode. (Auto, or fixed choice)
• Capabilities – Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during
auto-negotiation. (To access this item on the web, see “Configuring Interface
Connections” on page 3-48.) The following capabilities are supported.
- 10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation
- 10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation
- Sym - Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control
- FC - Supports flow control
• Broadcast storm – Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled.
• Broadcast storm limit – Shows the broadcast storm threshold.
(64-95232000 octets per second)
• Flow control – Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled.
• LACP – Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled.
• Port Security – Shows if port security is enabled or disabled.

3-66
3
• Max MAC count – Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be
learned by a port. (0 - 1024 addresses)
• Port security action – Shows the response to take when a security violation is
detected. (shutdown, trap, trap-and-shutdown, or none)
Current Status:
• Link Status – Indicates if the link is up or down.
• Port Operation Status – Provides detailed information on port state.
(Displayed only when the link is up.)
• Operation speed-duplex – Shows the current speed and duplex mode.
• Flow control type – Indicates the type of flow control currently in use.
(IEEE 802.3x, Back-Pressure or none)
CLI – This example shows the connection status for Port 5.
Configuring Interface Connections
You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable/disable an
interface, set auto-negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise, or manually
fix the speed, duplex mode, and flow control.
Command Attributes
• Name – Allows you to label an interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)
• Admin – Allows you to manually disable an interface. You can disable an interface
due to abnormal behavior (e.g., excessive collisions), and then reenable it after the
problem has been resolved. You may also disable an interface for security
reasons.
• Speed/Duplex – Allows you to manually set the port speed and duplex mode.
(i.e., with auto-negotiation disabled)
Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/5 4-115
Information of Eth 1/5
Basic information:
Port type: 100TX
Mac address: 00-30-F1-12-34-61
Configuration:
Name:
Port admin: Up
Speed-duplex: Auto
Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full
Broadcast storm: Enabled
Broadcast storm limit: 32000 octets/second
Flow control: Disabled
Lacp: Disabled
Port security: Disabled
Max MAC count: 0
Port security action: None
Current status:
Link status: Down
Operation speed-duplex: 100full
Flow control type: None
Console#

Port Configuration
3-67
3
• Flow Control – Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control.
• Autonegotiation (Port Capabilities) – Allows auto-negotiation to be enabled/
disabled. When auto-negotiation is enabled, you need to specify the capabilities to
be advertised. When auto-negotiation is disabled, you can force the settings for
speed, mode, and flow control.The following capabilities are supported.
- Sym (Gigabit only) - Check this item to transmit and receive pause frames, or
clear it to auto-negotiate the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames.
(The current switch chip only supports symmetric pause frames.)
- FC - Supports flow control
Flow control can eliminate frame loss by “blocking” traffic from end stations or
segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill. When enabled,
back pressure is used for half-duplex operation and IEEE 802.3x for full-duplex
operation. (Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is
actually required to solve a problem. Otherwise back pressure jamming signals
may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub.)
(Default: Autonegotiation enabled; Advertised capabilities for 100BASE-TX –
10half, 10full, 100half, 100full; 1000BASE-T – 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full,
1000full; 1000BASE-SX/LX/LH – 1000full)
• Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To create trunks and select port
members, see “Creating Trunk Groups” on page 3-68.
Note: Auto-negotiation must be disabled before you can configure or force the interface
to use the Speed/Duplex Mode or Flow Control options.
Web – Click Port, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Modify the required
interface settings, and click Apply.
Figure 3-41 Port/Trunk Configuration

3-68
3
CLI – Select the interface, and then enter the required settings.
Creating Trunk Groups
You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual, aggregate
link. A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments
where bottlenecks exist, as well as providing a fault-tolerant link between two
devices. You can create up to four trunks at a time.
The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation Control
Protocol (LACP). Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the
link, and the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard. On the
other hand, LACP configured ports can automatically negotiate a trunked link with
LACP-configured ports on another device. You can configure any number of ports
on the switch as LACP, as long as they are not already configured as part of a static
trunk. If ports on another device are also configured as LACP, the switch and the
other device will negotiate a trunk link between them. If an LACP trunk consists of
more than eight ports, all other ports will be placed in a standby mode. Should one
link in the trunk fail, one of the standby ports will automatically be activated to
replace it.
Command Usage
Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk, the other ports provide
redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails. However, before
making any physical connections between devices, use the web interface or CLI to
specify the trunk on the devices at both ends. When using a port trunk, take note of
the following points:
• Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network
cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.
• You can create up to four trunks on a switch or stack, with up to eight ports per
trunk.
• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports.
• When configuring static trunks on switches of different types, they must be
compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard.
Console(config-if)#description RD SW#13 4-109
Console(config-if)#shutdown 4-113
.
Console(config-if)#no shutdown
Console(config-if)#no negotiation 4-110
Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half 4-109
Console(config-if)#flowcontrol 4-112
.
Console(config-if)#negotiation
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half 4-111
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full
Console(config-if)#capabilities flowcontrol

Port Configuration
3-69
3
• The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner,
including communication mode (i.e., speed, duplex mode and flow control), VLAN
assignments, and CoS settings.
• All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to, added
or deleted from a VLAN.
• STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk.
Statically Configuring a Trunk
Command Usage
• When configuring static trunks, you may not be
able to link switches of different types,
depending on the manufacturer’s
implementation. However, note that the static
trunks on this switch are Cisco EtherChannel
compatible.
• To avoid creating a loop in the network, be sure
you add a static trunk via the configuration
interface before connecting the ports, and also
disconnect the ports before removing a static
trunk via the configuration interface.
Command Attributes
• Member List (Current) – Shows configured trunks (Trunk ID, Unit, Port).
• New – Includes entry fields for creating new trunks.
- Trunk – Trunk identifier. (Range: 1-4)
- Unit – Stack unit. (Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
- Port – Port identifier. (Range: 1-26/50)
Web – Click Port, Trunk Membership. Enter a trunk ID of 1-4 in the Trunk field,
select any of the switch ports from the scroll-down port list, and click Add. After you
have completed adding ports to the member list, click Apply.
Figure 3-42 Configuring Static Trunks
active
links
}
statically
configured

3-70
3
CLI – This example creates trunk 2 with ports 1 and 2. Just connect these ports to
two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk.
Enabling LACP on Selected Ports
Command Usage
• To avoid creating a loop in the network, be sure
you enable LACP before connecting the ports,
and also disconnect the ports before disabling
LACP.
• If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the
connected ports, the trunk will be activated
automatically.
• A trunk formed with another switch using LACP
will automatically be assigned the next available
trunk ID.
• If more than eight ports attached to the same
target switch have LACP enabled, the additional ports will be placed in standby
mode, and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails.
• All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex, either
by forced mode or auto-negotiation.
• Trunks dynamically established through LACP will also be shown in the Member
List on the Trunk Membership menu (see page 3-69).
Console(config)#interface port-channel 2 4-108
Console(config-if)#channel-group 2 4-124
Console(config-if)#channel-group 2
Console#show interfaces status port-channel 2 4-115
Information of Trunk 2
Basic information:
Port type: 100TX
Mac address: 00-30-F1-12-34-84
Configuration:
Name:
Port admin: Up
Speed-duplex: Auto
Max MAC count: 0
Current status:
Created by: User
Link status: Up
Port operation status: Up
Member Ports: Eth1/1, Eth1/2,
Console#
active
links
}}
dynamically
enabled
configured
members
backup
link

Port Configuration
3-71
3
Command Attributes
• Member List (Current) – Shows configured trunks (Unit, Port).
• New – Includes entry fields for creating new trunks.
- Unit – Stack unit. (Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
- Port – Port identifier. (Range: 1-26/50)
Web – Click Port, LACP, Configuration. Select any of the switch ports from the
scroll-down port list and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the
member list, click Apply.
Figure 3-43 LACP Trunk Configuration

3-72
3
CLI – The following example enables LACP for ports 1 to 6. Just connect these ports
to LACP-enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk.
Console(config-if)#lacp 4-125
Console(config-if)#exit...
Console(config-if)#lacp
Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1 4-115
Basic information:
Port type: 100TX
Mac address: 00-30-F1-12-34-89
Configuration:
Name:
Port admin: Up
Speed-duplex: Auto
Flow control status: Disabled
Max MAC count: 0
Current status:
Created by: Lacp
Link status: Up
Member Ports: Eth1/1, Eth1/2, Eth1/3, Eth1/4, Eth1/5, Eth1/6,
Console#

Port Configuration
3-73
3
Configuring LACP Parameters
Dynamically Creating a Port Channel –
Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria:
• Ports must have the same LACP System Priority.
• Ports must have the same LACP port Admin Key.
• However, if the “port channel” Admin Key is set (page 4-142), then the port Admin
Key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group.
Note – If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key, page 4-128) is not set (through
the CLI) when a channel group is formed (i.e., it has a null value of 0), this key is set to
the same value as the port admin key used by the interfaces that joined the group (lacp
admin key, as described in this section and on page 4-127).
Command Attributes
Set Port Actor – This menu sets the local side of an aggregate link; i.e., the ports on
this switch.
• Port – Port number. (Range: 1-26/50)
• System Priority – LACP system priority is used to determine link aggregation
group (LAG) membership, and to identify this device to other switches during LAG
negotiations. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 32768)
- Ports must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG.
- System priority is combined with the switch’s MAC address to form the LAG
identifier. This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP
negotiations with other systems.
• Admin Key – The LACP administration key must be set to the same value for ports
that belong to the same LAG. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 1)
• Port Priority – If a link goes down, LACP port priority is used to select a backup
link. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 32768)
Set Port Partner – This menu sets the remote side of an aggregate link; i.e., the
ports on the attached device. The command attributes have the same meaning as
those used for the port actor. However, configuring LACP settings for the partner
only applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and will only take
effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner.

3-74
3
Web – Click Port, LACP, Aggregation Port. Set the System Priority, Admin Key, and
Port Priority for the Port Actor. You can optionally configure these settings for the
Port Partner. (Be aware that these settings only affect the administrative state of the
partner, and will not take effect until the next time an aggregate link is formed with
this device.) After you have completed setting the port LACP parameters, click Apply.
Figure 3-44 LACP Port Configuration

Port Configuration
3-75
3
CLI – The following example configures LACP parameters for ports 1-4. Ports 1-4
are used as active members of the LAG.
Displaying LACP Port Counters
You can display statistics for LACP protocol messages.
Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3 4-126
Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120 4-127
Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 128 4-129
Console(config-if)#exit...
Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3
Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120
Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 512
Console#show lacp sysid 4-129
Port Channel System Priority System MAC Address
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 3 00-00-E9-31-31-31
2 32768 00-00-E9-31-31-31
3 32768 00-00-E9-31-31-31
4 32768 00-00-E9-31-31-31
Console#show lacp 1 internal 4-129
Port channel : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oper Key : 120
Admin Key : 0
Eth 1/1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LACPDUs Internal: 30 sec
LACP System Priority: 3
LACP Port Priority: 128
Admin Key: 120
Oper Key: 120
Admin State : defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
Oper State: distributing, collecting, synchronization,
aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
.
.
.
Table 3-6 LACP Port Counters
Field Description
LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group.
LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group.
Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group.
Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group.

3-76
3
Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Counters Information. Select a member port to display
the corresponding information.
Figure 3-45 LACP - Port Counters Information
CLI – The following example displays LACP counters.
LACPDUs Unknown Pkts Number of frames received that either (1) Carry the Slow Protocols
Ethernet Type value, but contain an unknown PDU, or (2) are addressed
to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address, but do not carry the Slow
Protocols Ethernet Type.
LACPDUs Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value, but
contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype.
Console#show lacp counters 4-129
Port channel : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/ 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LACPDUs Sent: 91
LACPDUs Receive: 43
Marker Sent: 0
Marker Receive: 0
LACPDUs Unknown Pkts: 0
LACPDUs Illegal Pkts: 0
...
Table 3-6 LACP Port Counters (Continued)
Field Description

Port Configuration
3-77
3
Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side
You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the local side of
an link aggregation.
Table 3-7 LACP Internal Configuration Information
Field Description
Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port.
Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port.
LACPDUs Internal Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information.
LACP System Priority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel.
LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group.
Admin State,
Oper State
Administrative or operational values of the actor’s state parameters:
• Expired – The actor’s receive machine is in the expired state;
• Defaulted – The actor’s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner
information, administratively configured for the partner.
• Distributing – If false, distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled; i.e.,
distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence
of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.
• Collecting – Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled; i.e., collection
is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of
administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.
• Synchronization – The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC; i.e., it has
been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group, the group has been
associated with a compatible Aggregator, and the identity of the Link Aggregation
Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information
transmitted.
• Aggregation – The system considers this link to be aggregatable; i.e., a potential
candidate for aggregation.
• Long timeout – Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate.
• LACP-Activity – Activity control value with regard to this link.
(0: Passive; 1: Active)

3-78
3
Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Internal Information. Select a port channel to display
the corresponding information.
Figure 3-46 LACP - Port Internal Information
CLI – The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and
operational state for the local side of port channel 1.
Console#show lacp 1 internal 4-129
Port channel : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oper Key : 120
Admin Key : 0
Eth 1/1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LACPDUs Internal: 30 sec
LACP System Priority: 3
LACP Port Priority: 128
Admin Key: 120
Oper Key: 120
.
.
.

Port Configuration
3-79
3
Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side
You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the remote side
of an link aggregation.
Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Neighbors Information. Select a port channel to
display the corresponding information.
Figure 3-47 LACP - Port Neighbors Information
Table 3-8 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information
Field Description
Partner Admin System ID LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the user.
Partner Oper System ID LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol.
Partner Admin Port Number Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner.
Partner Oper Port Number Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port’s
protocol partner.
Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner.
Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner.
Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner.
Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner.
Admin State Administrative values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)
Oper State Operational values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)

3-80
3
CLI – The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and
operational state for the remote side of port channel 1.
Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds
Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning, or if
application programs are not well designed or properly configured. If there is too
much broadcast traffic on your network, performance can be severely degraded or
everything can come to complete halt.
You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for
broadcast traffic. Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified threshold will then
be dropped.
Command Usage
• Broadcast Storm Control is enabled by default.
• Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic.
• The specified threshold applies to all ports on the switch.
Command Attributes
• Port5 - Port number.
• Trunk6 - Trunk number
• Type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T, or SFP)
• Threshold – Threshold as percentage of port bandwidth. (Range: 64-95232000
octets per second; Default: 32000)
• Protect Status – Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has been enabled.
(Default: Enabled)
• Trunk5 – Shows if a port is a trunk member.
Console#show lacp 1 neighbors 4-129
Port channel 1 neighbors
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Partner Admin System ID: 32768, 00-00-00-00-00-00
Partner Oper System ID: 3, 00-30-F1-CE-2A-20
Partner Admin Port Number: 5
Partner Oper Port Number: 3
Port Admin Priority: 32768
Port Oper Priority: 128
Admin Key: 0
Oper Key: 120
Admin State: defaulted, distributing, collecting,
synchronization, long timeout,
...
5. Port broadcast control.
6. Trunk broadcast control.

Port Configuration
3-81
3
Web – Click Port, Port/Trunk Broadcast Control. Set the threshold, mark the
Enabled field for the desired interface and click Apply.
Figure 3-48 Port Broadcast Control
CLI – Specify any interface, and then enter the threshold. The following disables
broadcast storm control for port 1, and then sets broadcast suppression at 600
octets per second for port 2 (which applies to all ports).
Console(config-if)#no switchport broadcast 4-114
Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast octet-rate 600 4-114
Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/2 4-117
Broadcast threshold: Enabled, 600 octets/second
Lacp status: Enabled
Ingress rate limit: disable, Level: 30
Egress rate limit: disable, Level: 30
VLAN membership mode: Hybrid
Ingress rule: Disabled
Acceptable frame type: All frames
Native VLAN: 1
Priority for untagged traffic: 0
Gvrp status: Disabled
Allowed Vlan: 1(u),
Forbidden Vlan:
Private-VLAN mode: NONE
Private-VLAN host-association: NONE
Private-VLAN mapping: NONE
Console#

3-82
3
Configuring Port Mirroring
You can mirror traffic from any source port to a
target port for real-time analysis. You can then
attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the
target port and study the traffic crossing the
source port in a completely unobtrusive manner.
Command Usage
• Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed, otherwise traffic
may be dropped from the monitor port.
• You can only create a single mirror session from the source port to target port.
• When mirroring port traffic, the target port must be included in the same VLAN as
the source port.
Command Attributes
• Mirror Sessions – Displays a list of current mirror sessions.
• Source Unit – The unit whose port traffic will be monitored.
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
• Source Port – The port whose traffic will be monitored. (Range: 1-26/50)
• Type – Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port, Rx (receive),
or Tx (transmit). (Default: Rx)
• Target Unit – The unit whose port will “duplicate” or “mirror” the traffic on the
source port. (Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
• Target Port – The port that will mirror the traffic on the source port.
(Range: 1-26/50)
Web – Click Port, Mirror Port Configuration. Specify the source port/unit, the traffic
type to be mirrored, and the monitor port/unit, then click Add.
Figure 3-49 Mirror Port Configuration
Source
port(s)
Single
target
port

Port Configuration
3-83
3
CLI – Use the interface command to select the monitor port, then use the port
monitor command to specify the source port and traffic type.
Configuring Rate Limits
This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic
transmitted or received on a port. Rate limiting is configured on ports at the edge of
a network to limit traffic coming into or out of the network. Traffic that falls within the
rate limit is transmitted, while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic
are dropped.
Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks. When an interface is
configured with this feature, the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to
verify conformity. Non-conforming traffic is dropped, conforming traffic is forwarded
without any changes.
Rate Limit Granularity
Rate limit granularity is an additional feature enabling the network manager greater
control over traffic on the network. The “rate limit granularity” is multiplied by the
“rate limit level” (page 3-84) to set the actual rate limit for an interface. Granularity is
a global setting that applies to Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
Command Usage
• For Fast Ethernet interfaces, the rate limit granularity can be set to 8 Kbps, 64
Kbps, 512 Kbps, 1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, or 3.3 Mbps.
• For Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, the rate limit granularity can be set to 32 Kbps, 64
Kbps, 512 Kbps, 1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 3.3 Mbps, 10 Mbps, or 33.3 Mbps.
Web – Click Port, Rate Limit, Granularity. Select the required rate limit granularity for
Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet, and click apply.
Figure 3-50 Rate Limit Granularity Configuration
Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/13 tx 4-119
Console(config-if)#

3-84
3
CLI - This example sets and displays Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet granularity.
Rate Limit Configuration
Use the rate limit configuration pages to apply rate limiting.
Command Usage
• Input and output rate limit can be enabled or disabled for individual interfaces.
Command Attributes
• Port/Trunk – Displays the port number.
• Rate Limit Status – Enables or disables the rate limit. (Default: Disabled)
• Rate Limit Level – Sets the rate limit level.
(Fast Ethernet – Range: 1-255: Default: 255;
Gigabit Ethernet – Range: 1-30: Default: 30)
Note: Actual rate limit = Rate Limit Level * Granularity
Web – Click Port, Rate Limit, Input/Output Port/Trunk Configuration. Enable the
Rate Limit Status for the required interfaces, set the Rate Limit Level, and click
Apply.
Figure 3-51 Output Rate Limit Port Configuration
Console(config)#rate-limit fastethernet granularity 512 4-122
Console(config)#rate-limit gigabitethernet granularity 33300 4-122
console#show rate-limit 4-122
Fast ethernet granularity: 512
Gigabit ethernet granularity: 33300
Console#

Port Configuration
3-85
3
CLI - This example sets the rate limit level for input and output traffic passing
through port 3.
Showing Port Statistics
You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and
Ethernet-like MIBs, as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON
MIB. Interfaces and Ethernet-like statistics display errors on the traffic passing
through each port. This information can be used to identify potential problems with
the switch (such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loading). RMON statistics
provide access to a broad range of statistics, including a total count of different
frame types and sizes passing through each port. All values displayed have been
accumulated since the last system reboot, and are shown as counts per second.
Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default.
Note: RMON groups 2, 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management
software such as HP OpenView.
Console(config-if)#rate-limit input level 25 4-121
Console(config-if)#rate-limit output level 25 4-121
Console(config-if)#
Table 3-9 Port Statistics
Interface Statistics
Received Octets The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing
characters.
Received Unicast Packets The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer
protocol.
Received Multicast Packets The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer,
which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.
Received Broadcast Packets The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer,
which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
Received Discarded Packets The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even
though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a
higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet
could be to free up buffer space.
Received Unknown Packets The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded
because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.
Received Errors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them
from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
Transmit Octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including
framing characters.
Transmit Unicast Packets The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were
discarded or not sent.

3-86
3
Transmit Multicast Packets The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this
sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Transmit Broadcast Packets The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this
sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Transmit Discarded Packets The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even
though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted.
One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up
buffer space.
Transmit Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of
errors.
Etherlike Statistics
Alignment Errors The number of alignment errors (missynchronized data packets).
Late Collisions The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit-times
into the transmission of a packet.
FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral
number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check. This count does
not include frames received with frame-too-long or frame-too-short error.
Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due
to excessive collisions. This counter does not increment when the
interface is operating in full-duplex mode.
Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is
inhibited by exactly one collision.
Internal MAC Transmit Errors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due
to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error.
Multiple Collision Frames A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is
inhibited by more than one collision.
Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never
asserted when attempting to transmit a frame.
SQE Test Errors A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the
PLS sublayer for a particular interface.
Frames Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the
maximum permitted frame size.
Deferred Transmissions A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular
interface is delayed because the medium was busy.
Internal MAC Receive Errors A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to
an internal MAC sublayer receive error.
Table 3-9 Port Statistics (Continued)

Port Configuration
3-87
3
RMON Statistics
Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of
resources.
Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either an FCS
or alignment error.
Received Bytes Total number of bytes of data received on the network. This statistic can
be used as a reasonable indication of Ethernet utilization.
Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet
segment.
Received Frames The total number of frames (bad, broadcast and multicast) received.
Broadcast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to the
broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to this
multicast address.
CRC/Alignment Errors The number of CRC/alignment errors (FCS or alignment errors).
Undersize Frames The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well
formed.
Oversize Frames The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well
formed.
Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and had either an FCS
or alignment error.
64 Bytes Frames The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and
transmitted that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
65-127 Byte Frames
128-255 Byte Frames
256-511 Byte Frames
512-1023 Byte Frames
The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and
transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Table 3-9 Port Statistics (Continued)

3-88
3
Web – Click Port, Port Statistics. Select the required interface, and click Query. You
can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the screen.
Figure 3-52 Port Statistics

Address Table Settings
3-89
3
CLI – This example shows statistics for port 13.
Switches store the addresses for all known devices. This information is used to pass
traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports. All the addresses learned
by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table. You can also manually
configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port.
Setting Static Addresses
A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch. Static
addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved. When a static
address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored and will not be
written to the address table.
Command Attributes
• Static Address Counts7 – The number of manually configured addresses.
• Current Static Address Table – Lists all the static addresses.
• Interface – Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address.
• MAC Address – Physical address of a device mapped to this interface.
• VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).
Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/13 4-116
Ethernet 1/13
Iftable stats:
Octets input: 868453, Octets output: 3492122
Unicast input: 7315, Unitcast output: 6658
Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0
Error input: 0, Error output: 0
Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0
Extended iftable stats:
Multi-cast input: 0, Multi-cast output: 17027
Broadcast input: 231, Broadcast output: 7
Ether-like stats:
Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0
Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0
SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0
Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0
Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0
Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0
Symbol errors: 0
RMON stats:
Drop events: 0, Octets: 4422579, Packets: 31552
Broadcast pkts: 238, Multi-cast pkts: 17033
Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0
Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0
CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0
Packet size <= 64 octets: 25568, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 1616
Packet size 128 to 255 octets: 1249, Packet size 256 to 511 octets: 1449
Console#
7. Web only.

3-90
3
Web – Click Address Table, Static Addresses. Specify the interface, the MAC
address and VLAN, then click Add Static Address.
Figure 3-53 Configuring a Static Address Table
CLI – This example adds an address to the static address table, but sets it to be
deleted when the switch is reset.
Displaying the Address Table
The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the
source address for traffic entering the switch. When the destination address for
inbound traffic is found in the database, the packets intended for that address are
forwarded directly to the associated port. Otherwise, the traffic is flooded to all ports.
Command Attributes
• Interface – Indicates a port or trunk.
• MAC Address – Physical address associated with this interface.
• Address Table Sort Key – You can sort the information displayed based on MAC
address, VLAN or interface (port or trunk).
• Dynamic Address Counts – The number of addresses dynamically learned.
• Current Dynamic Address Table – Lists all the dynamic addresses.
Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-e0-29-94-34-de interface
ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset 4-134
Console(config)#

3-91
3
Web – Click Address Table, Dynamic Addresses. Specify the search type (i.e., mark
the Interface, MAC Address, or VLAN checkbox), select the method of sorting the
displayed addresses, and then click Query.
Figure 3-54 Configuring a Dynamic Address Table
CLI – This example also displays the address table entries for port 1.
Console#show mac-address-table interface ethernet 1/1 4-135
Interface Mac Address Vlan Type
--------- ----------------- ---- -----------------
Eth 1/ 1 00-E0-29-94-34-DE 1 Delete-on-reset
Eth 1/ 1 00-20-9C-23-CD-60 2 Learned
Console#

3-92
3
Changing the Aging Time
You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table.
Command Attributes
• Aging Status – Enables/disables the function.
• Aging Time – The time after which a learned entry is discarded.
Web – Click Address Table, Address Aging. Specify the new aging time, click Apply.
Figure 3-55 Setting the Address Aging Time
CLI – This example sets the aging time to 300 seconds.
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration
The Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA) can be used to detect and disable network
loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or routers. This allows
the switch to interact with other bridging devices (that is, an STA-compliant switch,
bridge or router) in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any
two stations on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over
when a primary link goes down.
The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions:
• STP – Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)
• RSTP – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)
STA uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device (STA-compliant switch,
bridge or router) that serves as the root of the spanning tree network. It selects a
root port on each bridging device (except for the root device) which incurs the lowest
path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device. Then it
selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path
cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device. All ports connected
to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports. After determining
the lowest cost spanning tree, it enables all root ports and designated ports, and
disables all other ports. Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root
ports and designated ports, eliminating any possible network loops.
Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 300 4-136
Console(config)#

3-93
3
Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello
BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the Root Bridge. If a bridge
does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval (Maximum Age), the bridge
assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down. This bridge will then initiate
negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid
network topology.
RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower, legacy STP. RSTP
achieves must faster reconfiguration (i.e., around 1 to 3 seconds, compared to 30
seconds or more for STP) by reducing the number of state changes before active
ports start learning, predefining an alternate route that can be used when a node or
port fails, and retaining the forwarding database for ports insensitive to changes in
the tree structure when reconfiguration occurs.
Displaying Global Settings
You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the
entire switch using the STA Information screen.
Field Attributes
• Spanning Tree State – Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an
STA-compliant network.
• Bridge ID – A unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of the bridge priority and
MAC address (where the address is taken from the switch system).
• Max Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without receiving a
configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device ports (except
for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular intervals.
Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last configuration
message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a
new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network.
(References to “ports” in this section mean “interfaces,” which includes both ports
and trunks.)
• Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a
configuration message.
• Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait before
changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required
because every device must receive information about topology changes before it
starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting
x
Designated
Root
Designated
PortDesignated
Bridge
x x
x
Root
Port
x

3-94
3
information that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary
data loops might result.
• Designated Root – The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning
Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device.
- Root Port – The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root. This
switch communicates with the root device through this port. If there is no root
port, then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree
network.
- Root Path Cost – The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root
device.
• Configuration Changes – The number of times the Spanning Tree has been
reconfigured.
• Last Topology Change – Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured.
These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI:
• Spanning tree mode – Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch:
- STP: Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)
- RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w)
• Priority – Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and
designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device.
However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC
address will then become the root device.
• Root Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which this device transmits a
• Root Maximum Age – The maximum time (in seconds) this device can wait
without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All
device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages
at regular intervals. If the root port ages out STA information (provided in the last
configuration message), a new root port is selected from among the device ports
attached to the network. (References to “ports” in this section means “interfaces,”
which includes both ports and trunks.)
• Root Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device will wait before
• Transmission limit – The minimum interval between the transmission of
consecutive RSTP BPDUs.
• Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path between
devices. The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can
be assigned to each interface.

3-95
3
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Information.
Figure 3-56 Displaying Spanning Tree Information
CLI – This command displays global STA settings, followed by settings for each port.
Note: The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not
connected to the network.
Console#show spanning-tree 4-147
Spanning-tree information
---------------------------------------------------------------
Spanning tree mode :RSTP
Spanning tree enable/disable :enabled
Priority :32768
Bridge Hello Time (sec.) :2
Bridge Max Age (sec.) :20
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.) :15
Root Hello Time (sec.) :2
Root Max Age (sec.) :20
Root Forward Delay (sec.) :15
Designated Root :32768.0.0000ABCD0000
Current root port :1
Current root cost :200000
Number of topology changes :1
Last topology changes time (sec.):13380
Transmission limit :3
Path Cost Method :long
.
.
.

3-96
3
Configuring Global Settings
Global settings apply to the entire switch.
Command Usage
• Spanning Tree Protocol*
Uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D BPDUs.
• Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol*8
RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the
incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol
messages the RSTP node transmits, as described below:
- STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU (i.e., STP BPDU) after a
port’s migration delay timer expires, the switch assumes it is connected to an
802.1D bridge and starts using only 802.1D BPDUs.
- RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP
BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP restarts the migration delay timer
and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port.
Command Attributes
Basic Configuration of Global Settings
• Spanning Tree State – Enables/disables STA on this switch. (Default: Enabled)
• Spanning Tree Type – Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch:
- STP: Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D); i.e., when this option is selected,
the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode).
- RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w); RSTP is the default.
• Priority – Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and
designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device.
address will then become the root device. (Note that lower numeric values indicate
higher priority.)
- Default: 32768
- Range: 0-61440, in steps of 4096
- Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864,
40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440
Root Device Configuration
• Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a
- Default: 2
- Minimum: 1
- Maximum: The lower of 10 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) -1]
8. STP and RSTP BPDUs are transmitted as untagged frames, and will cross any VLAN
boundaries.

3-97
3
• Maximum Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without
receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device
ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at
regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last
configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is
a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the
network. (References to “ports” in this section mean “interfaces,” which includes
both ports and trunks.)
- Default: 20
- Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)].
- Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay - 1)]
• Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device will wait before
- Default: 15
- Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]
- Maximum: 30
Configuration Settings for RSTP
• Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path between
devices. The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can
be assigned to each interface.
- Long: Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 1-200,000,000.
(This is the default.)
- Short: Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 1-65535.
• Transmission Limit – The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified by
setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol
messages. (Range: 1-10; Default: 3)

3-98
3
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Configuration. Modify the required attributes, and
click Apply.
Figure 3-57 Configuring Spanning Tree
CLI – This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol, sets the mode to RSTP, and
then configures the STA and RSTP parameters.
Console(config)#spanning-tree 4-137
Console(config)#spanning-tree mode rstp 4-138
Console(config)#spanning-tree priority 45056 4-141
Console(config)#spanning-tree hello-time 5 4-140
Console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 38 4-140
Console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 20 4-139
Console(config)#spanning-tree pathcost method long 4-141
Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4 4-142
Console(config)#

3-99
3
Displaying Interface Settings
The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current
status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree.
Field Attributes
• Spanning Tree – Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface.
• STA Status – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree:
• Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does not forward
packets.
• Learning - Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by
the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information. Port
address table is cleared, and the port begins learning addresses.
• Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.
The rules defining port status are:
- A port on a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is
always forwarding.
- If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other
STA device attached to this segment, the port with the smaller ID forwards
packets and the other is discarding.
- All ports are discarding when the switch is booted, then some of them change
state to learning, and then to forwarding.
• Forward Transitions – The number of times this port has transitioned from the
Learning state to the Forwarding state.
• Designated Cost – The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the
current Spanning Tree configuration. The slower the media, the higher the cost.
• Designated Bridge – The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through
which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree.
• Designated Port – The port priority and number of the port on the designated
bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the root of the
Spanning Tree.
• Oper Link Type – The operational point-to-point status of the LAN segment
attached to this interface. This parameter is determined by manual configuration or
by auto-detection, as described for Admin Link Type in STA Port Configuration on
page 3-102.
• Oper Edge Port – This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin Edge Port
in STA Port Configuration on page 3-102 (i.e., true or false), but will be set to false
if a BPDU is received, indicating that another bridge is attached to this port.
• Port Role – Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the active
topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge (i.e., root port), connecting a LAN
through the bridge to the root bridge (i.e., designated port), or is an alternate or
backup port that may provide connectivity if other bridges, bridge ports, or LANs
fail or are removed. The role is set to disabled (i.e., disabled port) if a port has no
role within the spanning tree.

3-100
3
• Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.
(STA Port Information only)
These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI:
• Admin status – Shows if this interface is enabled.
• Path cost – This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path
between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to
faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path cost
takes precedence over port priority.)
• Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm. If
the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same, the port with the highest priority
(i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree. This
makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree
Algorithm is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the
highest priority, the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.
• Designated root – The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning
Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device.
• Fast forwarding – This field provides the same information as Admin Edge port,
and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products.
Alternate port receives more
useful BPDUs from another
bridge and is therefore not
selected as the designated
port.
x
R: Root Port
A: Alternate Port
D: Designated Port
B: Backup Port
R R
A D B
Backup port receives more
useful BPDUs from the same
bridge and is therefore not
selected as the designated
port.
x
R R
A D B

3-101
3
• Admin Edge Port – You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN
segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes
cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree
forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices
such as workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding database to reduce
the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during
reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to reconfigure when the
interface changes state, and also overcomes other STA-related timeout problems.
However, remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to
an end-node device.
• Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface.
- Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge.
- Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.
- Auto – The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a
point-to-point link or to shared media.
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Port Information or STA Trunk Information.
Figure 3-58 Displaying Spanning Tree Port Information
CLI – This example shows the STA attributes for port 5.
Console#show spanning-tree ethernet 1/5 4-147
Eth 1/ 5 information
--------------------------------------------------------------
Admin status : enabled
Role : designate
State : discarding
Path cost : 10000
Priority : 128
Designated cost : 0
Designated port : 128.5
Designated root : 61440.0.0000E9313131
Designated bridge : 61440.0.0000E9313131
Fast forwarding : disabled
Forward transitions : 0
Admin edge port : disabled
Oper edge port : disabled
Admin Link type : auto
Oper Link type : point-to-point
Spanning Tree Status : enabled
Console#

3-102
3
Configuring Interface Settings
You can configure RSTP attributes for specific interfaces, including port priority, path
cost, link type, and edge port. You may use a different priority or path cost for ports
of the same media type to indicate the preferred path, link type to indicate a
point-to-point connection or shared-media connection, and edge port to indicate if
the attached device can support fast forwarding. (References to “ports” in this
section means “interfaces,” which includes both ports and trunks.)
Command Attributes
The following attributes are read-only and cannot be changed:
• STA State – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree.
(See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3-99 for additional information.)
- Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does not forward
packets.
- Learning - Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by
the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information. Port
address table is cleared, and the port begins learning addresses.
- Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.
• Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. (STA Port Configuration only)
The following interface attributes can be configured:
• Spanning Tree – Enables/disables STA on this interface. (Default: Enabled).
• Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol. If
the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with the highest priority
(i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree. This
makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree
Protocol is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the
highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.
• Default: 128
• Range: 0-240, in steps of 16
• Path Cost – This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best path
between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to
faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path cost
takes precedence over port priority.) Note that when the Path Cost Method is set
to short (page 3-63), the maximum path cost is 65,535.
• Range –
- Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000
- Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000
- Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000
• Default –
- Ethernet – Half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000
- Fast Ethernet – Half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000
- Gigabit Ethernet – Full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000

3-103
3
• Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface.
- Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge.
- Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.
- Auto – The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a
point-to-point link or to shared media. (This is the default setting.)
• Admin Edge Port (Fast Forwarding) – You can enable this option if an interface is
attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node.
Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to
the spanning tree forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker
convergence for devices such as workstations or servers, retains the current
forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild
address tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to
initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state, and also overcomes
other STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge Port should
only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node device. (Default: Disabled)
• Migration – If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including Configuration
or Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected
interface to forced STP-compatible mode. However, you can also use the Protocol
Migration button to manually re-check the appropriate BPDU format (RSTP or
STP-compatible) to send on the selected interfaces. (Default: Disabled)
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Modify
the required attributes, then click Apply.
Figure 3-59 Configuring Spanning Tree per Port
CLI – This example sets STA attributes for port 7.
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 0 4-144
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 50 4-143
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type auto 4-146
Console(config-if)#no spanning-tree edge-port 4-144
Console(config-if)#

3-104
3
VLAN Configuration
IEEE 802.1Q VLANs
In large networks, routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into
separate domains. This switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs
to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains. VLANs
confine broadcast traffic to the originating group, and can eliminate broadcast
storms in large networks. This also provides a more secure and cleaner network
environment.
An IEEE 802.1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the
network, but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment.
VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a
new VLAN without having to change any physical connections. VLANs can be easily
organized to reflect departmental groups (such as Marketing or R&D), usage groups
(such as e-mail), or multicast groups (used for multimedia applications such as
videoconferencing).
VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic, and allow
you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets.
VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass
through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN.
This switch supports the following VLAN features:
• Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard
• Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging
and GVRP protocol
• Port overlapping, allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs
• End stations can belong to multiple VLANs
• Passing traffic between VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices
• Priority tagging
Assigning Ports to VLANs
Before enabling VLANs for the switch, you must first assign each port to the VLAN
group(s) in which it will participate. By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as
untagged ports. Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or
more VLANs, and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of
the connection supports VLANs. Then assign ports on the other VLAN-aware
network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN(s), either
manually or dynamically using GVRP. However, if you want a port on this switch to
participate in one or more VLANs, but none of the intermediate network devices nor
the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs, then you should add
this port to the VLAN as an untagged port.

VLAN Configuration
3-105
3
Note: VLAN-tagged frames can pass through VLAN-aware or VLAN-unaware network
interconnection devices, but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it
on to any end-node host that does not support VLAN tagging.
VLAN Classification – When the switch receives a frame, it classifies the frame in
one of two ways. If the frame is untagged, the switch assigns the frame to an
associated VLAN (based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port). But if the
frame is tagged, the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast
domain of the frame.
Port Overlapping – Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly
shared network resources among different VLAN groups, such as file servers or
printers. Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap, but still need to
communicate, you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch.
Untagged VLANs – Untagged (or static) VLANs are typically used to reduce
broadcast traffic and to increase security. A group of network users assigned to a
VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the
switch. Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same
VLAN. Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets.
However, you should use IEEE 802.3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible
to fully automate VLAN registration.
Automatic VLAN Registration – GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol)
defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the VLANs to which
each end station should be assigned. If an end station (or its network adapter)
supports the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN protocol, it can be configured to broadcast a
message to your network indicating the VLAN groups it wants to join. When this
switch receives these messages, it will automatically place the receiving port in the
specified VLANs, and then forward the message to all other ports. When the
message arrives at another switch that supports GVRP, it will also place the
receiving port in the specified VLANs, and pass the message on to all other ports.
VLAN requirements are propagated in this way throughout the network. This allows
GVRP-compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN groups based
solely on endstation requests.
To implement GVRP in a network, first add the host devices to the required VLANs
(using the operating system or other application software), so that these VLANs can
be propagated onto the network. For both the edge switches attached directly to
VA
VA: VLAN Aware
VU: VLAN Unaware
VA
tagged frames
VA VUVA
tagged
frames
untagged
frames

3-106
3
these hosts, and core switches in the network, enable GVRP on the links between
these devices. You should also determine security boundaries in the network and
disable GVRP on the boundary ports to prevent advertisements from being
propagated, or forbid those ports from joining restricted VLANs.
Note: If you have host devices that do not support GVRP, you should configure static or
untagged VLANs for the switch ports connected to these devices (as described in
“Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)” on page 3-111). But you can still
enable GVRP on these edge switches, as well as on the core switches in the
network.
Forwarding Tagged/Untagged Frames
If you want to create a small port-based VLAN for devices attached directly to a
single switch, you can assign ports to the same untagged VLAN. However, to
participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches, you should create a
VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports.
Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged or untagged VLANs. Each port on the
switch is therefore capable of passing tagged or untagged frames. When forwarding
a frame from this switch along a path that contains any VLAN-aware devices, the
switch should include VLAN tags. When forwarding a frame from this switch along a
path that does not contain any VLAN-aware devices (including the destination host),
the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame. When the
switch receives a tagged frame, it will pass this frame onto the VLAN(s) indicated by
the frame tag. However, when this switch receives an untagged frame from a
VLAN-unaware device, it first decides where to forward the frame, and then inserts a
VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port’s default VID.
Port-based VLAN
1
2
9 3 4
10 11
12
13
14
5 6 7 8
15 16
18
19

VLAN Configuration
3-107
3
Enabling or Disabling GVRP (Global Setting)
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) defines a way for switches to exchange
VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network.
VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices
and propagated throughout the network. GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic
VLAN registration, and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch.
(Default: Disabled)
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, GVRP Status. Enable or disable GVRP, and click
Apply.
Figure 3-60 Enabling GVRP
CLI – This example enables GVRP for the switch.
Displaying Basic VLAN Information
The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type
supported by the switch.
Field Attributes
• VLAN Version Number9 – The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in
the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
• Maximum VLAN ID – Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch.
• Maximum Number of Supported VLANs – Maximum number of VLANs that can
be configured on this switch.
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Basic Information.
Figure 3-61 Displaying Basic VLAN Information
Console(config)#bridge-ext gvrp 4-164
Console(config)#
9. Web Only.

3-108
3
CLI – Enter the following command.
Displaying Current VLANs
The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each VLAN and
whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging. Ports assigned to a large VLAN
group that crosses several switches should use VLAN tagging. However, if you just
want to create a small port-based VLAN for one or two switches, you can disable
tagging.
Command Attributes (Web)
• VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).
• Up Time at Creation – Time this VLAN was created (i.e., System Up Time).
• Status – Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch.
- Dynamic GVRP: Automatically learned via GVRP.
- Permanent: Added as a static entry.
• Egress Ports – Shows all the VLAN port members.
• Untagged Ports – Shows the untagged VLAN port members.
Console#show bridge-ext 4-165
Max support vlan numbers: 255
Max support vlan ID: 4094
VLAN learning: IVL
Global GVRP status: Enabled
GMRP: Disabled
Console#

VLAN Configuration
3-109
3
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Current Table. Select any ID from the scroll-down
list.
Figure 3-62 Displaying Current VLANs
Command Attributes (CLI)
• VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094, no leading zeroes).
• Type – Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch.
- Dynamic: Automatically learned via GVRP.
- Static: Added as a static entry.
• Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).
• Status – Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled.
- Active: VLAN is operational.
- Suspend: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.
• Ports / Channel groups – Shows the VLAN interface members.
CLI – Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command.
Console#show vlan id 1 4-157
Vlan ID: 1
Type: Static
Name: DefaultVlan
Status: Active
Ports/Port Channel: Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 5(S)
Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S) Eth1/ 8(S) Eth1/ 9(S) Eth1/10(S)
Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S) Eth1/13(S) Eth1/14(S) Eth1/15(S)
Eth1/26(S)
Console#

3-110
3
Creating VLANs
Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups. To propagate
information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices, you
must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups.
Command Attributes
• Current – Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system. Up to 255
VLAN groups can be defined. VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN.
• New – Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN
group. (The VLAN name is only used for management on this system; it is not
added to the VLAN tag.)
• VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094, no leading zeroes).
• VLAN Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).
• Status (Web) – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.
- Enabled: VLAN is operational.
- Disabled: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.
• State (CLI) – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.
- Active: VLAN is operational.
- Suspend: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.
• Add – Adds a new VLAN group to the current list.
• Remove – Removes a VLAN group from the current list. If any port is assigned to
this group as untagged, it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged.
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static List. To create a new VLAN, enter the
VLAN ID and VLAN name, mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN, and
then click Add.
Figure 3-63 Configuring a VLAN Static List

VLAN Configuration
3-111
3
CLI – This example creates a new VLAN.
Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)
Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index.
Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802.1Q VLAN compliant devices, or
untagged they are not connected to any VLAN-aware devices. Or configure a port
as forbidden to prevent the switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the
GVRP protocol.
Notes: 1. You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page to configure
VLAN groups based on the port index (page 3-113). However, note that this
configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members.
2. VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch, and
can only be modified by first reassigning the default port VLAN ID as
described under “Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces” on page 3-114.
Command Attributes
• Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).
• Status – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.
- Enable: VLAN is operational.
- Disable: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.
• Port – Port identifier.
Console(config)#vlan database 4-149
Console(config-vlan)#vlan 2 name R&D media ethernet state active 4-150
Console(config-vlan)#end
Console#show vlan 4-157
Vlan ID: 1
Type: Static
Name: DefaultVlan
Status: Active
Ports/Port Channel: Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 5(S)
Eth1/26(S)
Vlan ID: 2
Type: Static
Name: R&D
Status: Active
Ports/Port Channel:
Console#

3-112
3
• Membership Type – Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the
appropriate radio button for a port or trunk:
- Tagged: Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the port
will be tagged, that is, carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information.
- Untagged: Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the
port will be untagged, that is, not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or
CoS information. Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group
as an untagged port.
- Forbidden: Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via
GVRP. For more information, see “Automatic VLAN Registration” on page
3-105.
- None: Interface is not a member of the VLAN. Packets associated with this
VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface.
• Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To add a trunk to the
selected VLAN, use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page.
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static Table. Select a VLAN ID from the
scroll-down list. Modify the VLAN name and status if required. Select the
membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or
trunks. Click Apply.
Figure 3-64 Configuring a VLAN Static Table
CLI – The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to VLAN 2.
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged 4-155
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged

VLAN Configuration
3-113
3
Adding Static Members to VLANs (Port Index)
Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the
selected interface as a tagged member.
Command Attributes
• Interface – Port or trunk identifier.
• Member – VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member.
• Non-Member – VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member.
Web – Open VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static Membership by Port. Select an interface
from the scroll-down box (Port or Trunk). Click Query to display membership
information for the interface. Select a VLAN ID, and then click Add to add the
interface as a tagged member, or click Remove to remove the interface. After
configuring VLAN membership for each interface, click Apply.
Figure 3-65 VLAN Static Membership by Port
CLI – This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port, and removes Port 3
from VLAN 2.
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged 4-155
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan remove 2

3-114
3
Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces
You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces, including the default VLAN
identifier (PVID), accepted frame types, ingress filtering, GVRP status, and GARP
timers.
Command Usage
• GVRP – GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to
exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on
interfaces across the network.
• GARP – Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to register or
deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN. The default
values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data
rate. These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties
with GVRP registration/deregistration.
Command Attributes
• PVID – VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface. (Default: 1)
- If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN,
the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member. For
all other VLANs, an interface must first be configured as an untagged member
before you can assign its PVID to that group.
• Acceptable Frame Type – Sets the interface to accept all frame types, including
tagged or untagged frames, or only tagged frames. When set to receive all frame
types, any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN.
(Options: All, Tagged; Default: All)
• Ingress Filtering – Determines how to process frames tagged for VLANs for which
the ingress port is not a member. (Default: Disabled)
- Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.
- If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for
which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded to all other ports (except
for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port).
- If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for
which it is not a member, these frames will be discarded.
- Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such as GVRP
or STP. However, they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames, such as GMRP.
• GVRP Status – Enables/disables GVRP for the interface. GVRP must be globally
enabled for the switch before this setting can take effect. (See “Displaying Bridge
Extension Capabilities” on page 3-11.) When disabled, any GVRP packets
received on this port will be discarded and no GVRP registrations will be
propagated from other ports. (Default: Disabled)
• GARP Join Timer10 – The interval between transmitting requests/queries to
participate in a VLAN group. (Range: 20-1000 centiseconds; Default: 20)
10. Timer settings must follow this rule: 2 x (join timer) < leave timer < leaveAll timer

VLAN Configuration
3-115
3
• GARP Leave Timer11 – The interval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group.
This time should be set to more than twice the join time. This ensures that after a
Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued, the applicants can rejoin before the
port actually leaves the group. (Range: 60-3000 centiseconds; Default: 60)
• GARP LeaveAll Timer12 – The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query
message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group. This interval
should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic
generated by nodes rejoining the group.
(Range: 500-18000 centiseconds; Default: 1000)
• Mode – Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface. (Default: Hybrid)
- 1Q Trunk – Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A trunk is a direct
link between two switches, so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the
source VLAN. Note that frames belonging to the port’s default VLAN (i.e.,
associated with the PVID) are also transmitted as tagged frames.
- Hybrid – Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit tagged or
untagged frames.
• Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To add a trunk to the
selected VLAN, use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page.
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Port Configuration or VLAN Trunk Configuration.
Fill in the required settings for each interface, click Apply.
Figure 3-66 Configuring VLANs per Port

3-116
3
CLI – This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames, assigns PVID 3 as the
native VLAN ID, enables GVRP, sets the GARP timers, and then sets the switchport
mode to hybrid.
Private VLANs
Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within
the assigned VLAN. This switch supports two types of private VLANs: primary/
secondary associated groups, and stand-alone isolated VLANs. A primary VLAN
contains promiscuous ports that can communicate with all other ports in the private
VLAN group, while a secondary (or community) VLAN contains community ports
that can only communicate with other hosts within the secondary VLAN and with any
of the promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN. Isolated VLANs, on the
other hand, consist a single stand-alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port
and one or more isolated (or host) ports. In all cases, the promiscuous ports are
designed to provide open access to an external network such as the Internet, while
the community or isolated ports provide restricted access to local users.
Multiple primary VLANs can be configured on this switch, and multiple community
VLANs can be associated with each primary VLAN. One or more isolated VLANs
can also be configured. (Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist
simultaneously within the same switch.)
To configure primary/secondary associated groups, follow these steps:
1. Use the Private VLAN Configuration menu (page 3-118) to designate one or
more community VLANs, and the primary VLAN that will channel traffic outside
of the VLAN groups.
2. Use the Private VLAN Association menu (page 3-118) to map the secondary
(i.e., community) VLAN(s) to the primary VLAN.
3. Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration menu (page 3-120) to set the port
type to promiscuous (i.e., having access to all ports in the primary VLAN), or
host (i.e., having access restricted to community VLAN members, and
channeling all other traffic through promiscuous ports). Then assign any
promiscuous ports to a primary VLAN and any host ports a community VLAN.
To configure an isolated VLAN, follow these steps:
1. Use the Private VLAN Configuration menu (page 3-118) to designate an
isolated VLAN that will channel all traffic through a single promiscuous port.
Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged 4-152
Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering 4-153
Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3 4-154
Console(config-if)#switchport gvrp 4-165
Console(config-if)#garp timer join 20 4-166
Console(config-if)#garp timer leave 90 4-166
Console(config-if)#garp timer leaveall 2000 4-166
Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid 4-152
Console(config-if)#

VLAN Configuration
3-117
3
2. Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration menu (page 3-120) to set the port
type to promiscuous (i.e., the single channel to the external network), or
isolated (i.e., having access only to the promiscuous port in its own VLAN).
Then assign the promiscuous port and all host ports to an isolated VLAN.
Displaying Current Private VLANs
The Private VLAN Information page displays information on the private VLANs
configured on the switch, including primary, community, and isolated VLANs, and
their assigned interfaces.
Command Attributes
• VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094), and VLAN type.
• Primary VLAN – The VLAN with which the selected VLAN ID is associated. A
primary VLAN displays its own ID, a community VLAN displays the associated
primary VLAN, and an isolated VLAN displays the stand-alone VLAN.
• Ports List – The list of ports (and assigned port type) in the selected private VLAN.
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Information. Select the desired port from the
VLAN ID drop-down menu.
Figure 3-67 Private VLAN Information
CLI – This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and
secondary VLAN 6. Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped
to VLAN 5, while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a host ports and are
associated with VLAN 6. This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass
through port 3.
Console#show vlan private-vlan 4-153
Primary Secondary Type Interfaces
-------- ----------- ---------- --------------------------------------
5 primary Eth1/ 3
5 6 community Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5

3-118
3
Configuring Private VLANs
The Private VLAN Configuration page is used to create/remove primary, community,
or isolated VLANs.
Command Attributes
• Type – There are three types of private VLANs:
- Primary VLANs – Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports, and to
community ports within secondary (or community) VLANs.
- Community VLANs - Conveys traffic between community ports, and to their
promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN.
- Isolated VLANs – Conveys traffic only between the VLAN’s isolated ports and
the promiscuous port. Traffic between isolated ports within the VLAN is blocked.
• Current – Displays a list of the currently configured VLANs.
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Configuration. Enter the VLAN ID number, select
Primary, Isolated or Community type, then click Add. To remove a private VLAN from
the switch, highlight an entry in the Current list box and then click Remove. Note that
all member ports must be removed from the VLAN before it can be deleted.
Figure 3-68 Private VLAN Configuration
CLI – This example configures VLAN 5 as a primary VLAN, and VLAN 6 as a
community VLAN and VLAN 7 as an isolated VLAN.
Associating VLANs
Each community VLAN must be associated with a primary VLAN.
Command Attributes
• Primary VLAN ID – ID of primary VLAN (1-4094).
• Association – Community VLANs associated with the selected primary VLAN.
• Non-Association – Community VLANs not associated with the selected VLAN.
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 5 primary 4-159
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 6 community
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 7 isolated
Console(config-vlan)#

VLAN Configuration
3-119
3
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Association. Select the required primary VLAN
from the scroll-down box, highlight one or more community VLANs in the
Non-Association list box, and click Add to associate these entries with the selected
primary VLAN. (A community VLAN can only be associated with one primary VLAN.)
Figure 3-69 Private VLAN Association
CLI – This example associates community VLANs 6 and 7 with primary VLAN 5.
Displaying Private VLAN Interface Information
Use the Private VLAN Port Information and Private VLAN Trunk Information menus
to display the interfaces associated with private VLANs.
Command Attributes
• Port/Trunk – The switch interface.
• PVLAN Port Type – Displays private VLAN port types.
- Normal – The port is not configured in a private VLAN.
- Host – The port is a community port and can only communicate with other ports
in its own community VLAN, and with the designated promiscuous port(s). Or the
port is an isolated port that can only communicate with the lone promiscuous
port within its own isolated VLAN.
- Promiscuous – A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces
within a private VLAN.
• Primary VLAN – Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports, and between
promiscuous ports and community ports within the associated secondary VLANs.
• Community VLAN – A community VLAN conveys traffic between community
ports, and from community ports to their designated promiscuous ports.
• Isolated VLAN – Conveys traffic only between the VLAN’s isolated ports and the
promiscuous port. Traffic between isolated ports within the VLAN is blocked.
• Trunk – The trunk identifier. (Port Information only)
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 5 association 6 4-160
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 5 association 7 4-160
Console(config)#

3-120
3
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Port Information or Trunk Information.
Figure 3-70 Private VLAN Port Information
community VLAN 6. Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped
to VLAN 5, while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as host ports and associated
with VLAN 6. This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3.
Configuring Private VLAN Interfaces
Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration and Private VLAN Trunk Configuration
menus to set the private VLAN interface type, and assign the interfaces to a private
VLAN.
Command Attributes
• Port/Trunk – The switch interface.
• PVLAN Port Type – Sets the private VLAN port types.
- Normal – The port is not assigned to a private VLAN.
- Host – The port is a community port or an isolated port. A community port can
communicate with other ports in its own community VLAN and with designated
promiscuous port(s). An isolated port can only communicate with the single
designated promiscuous port in the isolated VLAN; it cannot communicate with
any other host ports.
- Promiscuous – A promiscuous port can communicate with all interfaces within
a private VLAN.
• Primary VLAN – Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports, and between
promiscuous ports and community ports within the associated secondary VLANs.
If PVLAN type is “Promiscuous,” then specify the associated primary VLAN.
Console#show vlan private-vlan 4-163
-------- ----------- ---------- ------------------------------
5 primary Eth1/ 3
Console#

VLAN Configuration
3-121
3
• Community VLAN – A community VLAN conveys traffic between community
ports, and from community ports to their designated promiscuous ports. Set
PVLAN Port Type to “Host,” and then specify the associated Community VLAN.
• Isolated VLAN – Conveys traffic only between the VLAN’s isolated ports and the
promiscuous port. Traffic between isolated ports within the VLAN is blocked. Set
the PVLAN Port Type to “Host,” then specify an isolated VLAN by marking the
check box for an “Isolated VLAN,” and selecting the required VLAN from the
drop-down box.
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Set the
PVLAN Port Type for each port that will join a private VLAN. Assign promiscuous
ports to a primary or isolated VLAN. Assign host ports to a community or isolated
VLAN. After all the ports have been configured, click Apply.
Figure 3-71 Private VLAN Port Configuration
secondary VLAN 6. Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped
to VLAN 5, while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a host ports and associated
with VLAN 6. This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3.
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous 4-161
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan mapping 5 4-163
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan host 4-161
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 6 4-161
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan host
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 6
Console(config-if)#

3-122
3
Class of Service Configuration
Class of Service (CoS) allows you to specify which data packets have greater
precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion. This switch
supports CoS with four priority queues for each port. Data packets in a port’s
high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority queues. You
can set the default priority for each interface, and configure the mapping of frame
priority tags to the switch’s priority queues.
Layer 2 Queue Settings
Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces
You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch. All untagged
packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority, and
then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port.
Command Usage
• This switch provides four priority queues for each port. It uses Weighted Round
Robin to prevent head-of-queue blockage.
• The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept
all frame types (i.e, receives both untagged and tagged frames). This priority does
not apply to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frames. If the incoming frame is an IEEE
802.1Q VLAN tagged frame, the IEEE 802.1p User Priority bits will be used.
• If the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN, these frames are
stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission.
Command Attributes
• Default Priority13 – The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on
the specified interface. (Range: 0-7; Default: 0)
• Number of Egress Traffic Classes – The number of queue buffers provided for
each port.
13. CLI displays this information as “Priority for untagged traffic.”

3-123
3
Web – Click Priority, Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority. Modify the default
priority for any interface, then click Apply.
Figure 3-72 Port Priority Configuration
CLI – This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3.
Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5 4-169
Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/3 4-117
Broadcast threshold: Disabled
LACP status: Disabled
Ingress rule: Enabled
Acceptable frame type: Tagged frames only
Native VLAN: 1
GVRP status: Disabled
Allowed VLAN: 1(u),
Forbidden VLAN:
Console#

3-124
3
Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues
This switch processes Class of Service (CoS) priority tagged traffic by using four
priority queues for each port, with service schedules based on strict or Weighted
Round Robin (WRR). Up to eight separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE
802.1p. The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in
the IEEE 802.1p standard as shown in the following table.
The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802.1p standard for various network
applications are shown in the following table. However, you can map the priority
levels to the switch’s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for
your own network.
Command Attributes
• Priority – CoS value. (Range: 0-7, where 7 is the highest priority)
• Traffic Class14 – Output queue buffer. (Range: 0-3, where 3 is the highest CoS
priority queue)
Table 3-10 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues
Queue 0 1 2 3
Priority 1,2 0,3 4,5 6,7
Table 3-11 CoS Priority Levels
Priority Level Traffic Type
1 Background
2 (Spare)
0 (default) Best Effort
3 Excellent Effort
4 Controlled Load
5 Video, less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter
6 Voice, less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter
7 Network Control
14. CLI shows Queue ID.
Q0
Serviced
by weighted
round robin
Q1
Q2
Q3
1,2
0,3
4,5
6,7

3-125
3
Web – Click Priority, Traffic Classes. The current mapping of CoS values to output
queues is displayed. Assign priorities to the traffic classes (i.e., output queues),
then click Apply.
Figure 3-73 Traffic Classes
CLI – The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments.
* Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration
command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.
Selecting the Queue Mode
You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all
traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are
serviced, or use Weighted Round-Robin (WRR) queuing that specifies a relative
weight of each queue. WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that
determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before
moving on to the next queue. This prevents the head-of-line blocking that can occur
with strict priority queuing.
Command Attributes
• WRR - Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using
scheduling weights 1, 2, 4, 6 for queues 0 through 3 respectively. (This is the
default selection.)
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 0 0 4-171
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 1 1
Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1 4-173
CoS Value : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Priority Queue: 0 1 2 1 2 2 3 3
Console#

3-126
3
• Strict - Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting all traffic in the
higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues.
Web – Click Priority, Queue Mode. Select Strict or WRR, then click Apply.
Figure 3-74 Queue Mode
CLI – The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode.
Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes
This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) algorithm to determine the
frequency at which it services each priority queue. As described in “Mapping CoS
Values to Egress Queues” on page 3-124, the traffic classes are mapped to one of
the four egress queues provided for each port. You can assign a weight to each of
these queues (and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities). This weight sets
the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service, and subsequently
affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value.
Command Attributes
• WRR Setting Table15 – Displays a list of weights for each traffic class (i.e., queue).
• Weight Value – Set a new weight for the selected traffic class. However, note that
Queue 0 is fixed at a weight of 1, and cannot be configured. (Range: 1-31)
Console(config)#queue mode wrr 4-169
Console#show queue mode 4-172
Queue mode: wrr
Console#
15. CLI shows Queue ID.

3-127
3
Web – Click Priority, Queue Scheduling. Highlight a traffic class (i.e., output queue),
enter a weight, then click Apply.
Figure 3-75 Configuring Queue Scheduling
CLI – The following example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the
priority queues.
Layer 3/4 Priority Settings
Mapping Layer 3/4 Priorities to CoS Values
This switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3/4 traffic to meet
application requirements. Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a
frame, using the priority bits in the Type of Service (ToS) octet or the number of the
TCP port. If priority bits are used, the ToS octet may contain three bits for IP
Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) service. When
these services are enabled, the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by
the switch, and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue.
Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic, this switch
maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner:
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port Priority, IP Precedence or DSCP
Priority, and then Default Port Priority.
• IP Precedence and DSCP Priority cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of these
priority types will automatically disable the other.
Console(config)#queue bandwidth 6 9 12 4-170
Console#show queue bandwidth 4-172
Queue ID Weight
-------- ------
0 1
1 6
2 9
3 12
Console

3-128
3
Selecting IP Precedence/DSCP Priority
The switch allows you to choose between using IP Precedence or DSCP priority.
Select one of the methods or disable this feature.
Command Attributes
• Disabled – Disables both priority services. (This is the default setting.)
• IP Precedence – Maps layer 3/4 priorities using IP Precedence.
• IP DSCP – Maps layer 3/4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code Point
Mapping.
Web – Click Priority, IP Precedence/DSCP Priority Status. Select Disabled,
IP Precedence or IP DSCP from the scroll-down menu, then click Apply.
Figure 3-76 IP Precedence/DSCP Priority Status
CLI – The following example enables IP Precedence service on the switch.
Mapping IP Precedence
The Type of Service (ToS) octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits
defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control
packets to lowest priority for routine traffic. The default IP Precedence values are
mapped one-to-one to Class of Service values (i.e., Precedence value 0 maps to
CoS value 0, and so forth). Bits 6 and 7 are used for network control, and the other
bits for various application types. ToS bits are defined in the following table.
Command Attributes
• IP Precedence Priority Table – Shows the IP Precedence to CoS map.
• Class of Service Value – Maps a CoS value to the selected IP Precedence value.
Note that “0” represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.
Console(config)#map ip precedence 4-174
Console(config)#
Table 3-12 Mapping IP Precedence
Priority Level Traffic Type Priority Level Traffic Type
7 Network Control 3 Flash
6 Internetwork Control 2 Immediate
5 Critical 1 Priority
4 Flash Override 0 Routine

3-129
3
Web – Click Priority, IP Precedence Priority. Select an entry from the IP Precedence
Priority Table, enter a value in the Class of Service Value field, and then click Apply.
Figure 3-77 Mapping IP Precedence Priority Values
CLI – The following example globally enables IP Precedence service on the switch,
maps IP Precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 (on port 1), and then displays the IP
Precedence settings.
* Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an interface configuration
Console(config)#map ip precedence 4-174
Console(config-if)#map ip precedence 1 cos 0 4-176
Console#show map ip precedence ethernet 1/1 4-179
Precedence mapping status: enabled
Port Precedence COS
--------- ---------- ---
Eth 1/ 1 0 0
Eth 1/ 1 1 0
Eth 1/ 1 2 2
Eth 1/ 1 3 3
Eth 1/ 1 4 4
Eth 1/ 1 5 5
Eth 1/ 1 6 6
Eth 1/ 1 7 7
Console#

3-130
3
Mapping DSCP Priority
The DSCP is six bits wide, allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding
behaviors. The DSCP replaces the ToS bits, but it retains backward compatibility
with the three precedence bits so that non-DSCP compliant, ToS-enabled devices,
will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. Based on network policies, different kinds of
traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. The DSCP default values are
defined in the following table. Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified
are mapped to CoS value 0.
Command Attributes
• DSCP Priority Table – Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map.
• Class of Service Value – Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP Priority value.
Note that “0” represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.
Note: IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces.
Web – Click Priority, IP DSCP Priority. Select an entry from the DSCP table, enter a
value in the Class of Service Value field, then click Apply.
Figure 3-78 Mapping IP DSCP Priority Values
Table 3-13 Mapping DSCP Priority Values
IP DSCP Value CoS Value
0 0
8 1
10, 12, 14, 16 2
18, 20, 22, 24 3
26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36 4
38, 40, 42 5
48 6
46, 56 7

3-131
3
CLI – The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch,
maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 (on port 1), and then displays the DSCP Priority
settings.
* Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration
Mapping IP Port Priority
You can also map network applications to Class of Service values based on the IP
port number (i.e., TCP/UDP port number) in the frame header. Some of the more
common TCP service ports include: HTTP: 80, FTP: 21, Telnet: 23 and POP3: 110.
Command Attributes
• IP Port Priority Status – Enables or disables the IP port priority.
• IP Port Priority Table – Shows the IP port to CoS map.
• IP Port Number (TCP/UDP) – Set a new IP port number.
• Class of Service Value – Sets a CoS value for a new IP port. Note that “0”
represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.
Note: IP Port Priority settings apply to all interfaces.
Web – Click Priority, IP Port Priority Status. Set IP Port Priority Status to Enabled.
Figure 3-79 IP Port Priority Status
Console(config)#map ip dscp 4-177
Console(config-if)#map ip dscp 1 cos 0 4-177
Console#show map ip dscp ethernet 1/1 4-180
DSCP mapping status: disabled
Port DSCP COS
--------- ---- ---
Eth 1/ 1 0 0
Eth 1/ 1 1 0
Eth 1/ 1 2 0
Eth 1/ 1 3 0...
Eth 1/ 1 61 0
Eth 1/ 1 62 0
Eth 1/ 1 63 0
Console#

3-132
3
Click Priority, IP Port Priority. Enter the port number for a network application in the
IP Port Number box and the new CoS value in the Class of Service box, and then
click Apply.
Figure 3-80 IP Port Priority
CLI – The following example globally enables IP Port Priority service on the switch,
maps HTTP traffic on port 5 to CoS value 0, and then displays all the IP Port Priority
settings for that port.
* Mapping specific values for IP Port Priority is implemented as an interface configuration
Mapping CoS Values to ACLs
Use the ACL CoS Mapping page to set the output queue for packets matching an
ACL rule as shown in the following table. Note that the specified CoS value is only
used to map the matching packet to an output queue; it is not written to the packet
itself. For information on mapping the CoS values to output queues, see page 3-124.
Console(config)#map ip port 4-174
Console(config-if)#map ip port 80 cos 0 4-175
Console#show map ip port ethernet 1/5 4-175
TCP port mapping status: disabled
Port Port no. COS
--------- -------- ---
Eth 1/ 5 80 0
Console#
Table 3-14 Egress Queue Priority Mapping
Queue 0 1 2 3
Priority 1,2 0,3 4,5 6,7

3-133
3
Command Attributes
• Port – Port identifier.
• Name16 – Name of ACL.
• Type – Type of ACL (IP or MAC).
• CoS Priority – CoS value used for packets matching an IP ACL rule. (Range: 0-7)
• ACL CoS Priority Mapping – Displays the configured information.
Web – Click Priority, ACL CoS Priority. Enable mapping for any port, select an ACL
from the scroll-down list, then click Add.
Figure 3-81 ACL CoS Priority
CLI – This example assigns a CoS value of zero to packets matching rules within
the specified ACL on port 24.
16. For information on configuring ACLs, see page 3-57.
Console(config-if)#map access-list ip bill cos 0 4-95
Console(config-if)#

3-134
3
Multicast Filtering
Multicasting is used to support real-time
applications such as videoconferencing or
streaming audio. A multicast server does not have
to establish a separate connection with each
client. It merely broadcasts its service to the
network, and any hosts that want to receive the
multicast register with their local multicast switch/
router. Although this approach reduces the
network overhead required by a multicast server,
the broadcast traffic must be carefully pruned at
every multicast switch/router it passes through to
ensure that traffic is only passed on to the hosts
which subscribed to this service.
This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group
Management Protocol) to query for any attached
hosts that want to receive a specific multicast
service. It identifies the ports containing hosts
requesting to join the service and sends data out
to those ports only. It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring
multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.
This procedure is called multicast filtering.
The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network’s
performance, so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing
multicast group hosts or multicast routers/switches, instead of flooding traffic to all
ports in the subnet (VLAN).
Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query)
IGMP Snooping and Query – If multicast routing is not supported on other switches
in your network, you can use IGMP Snooping and Query (page 3-135) to monitor
IGMP service requests passing between multicast clients and servers, and
dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic.
Static IGMP Router Interface – If IGMP snooping cannot locate the IGMP querier,
you can manually designate a known IGMP querier (i.e., a multicast router/switch)
connected over the network to an interface on your switch (page 3-137). This
interface will then join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached
router/switch to ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces
within the switch.
Static IGMP Host Interface – For multicast applications that you need to control
more carefully, you can manually assign a multicast service to specific interfaces on
the switch (page 3-140).
Unicast
Flow
Multicast
Flow

Multicast Filtering
3-135
3
Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters
You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently. Based on the
IGMP query and report messages, the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that
request multicast traffic. This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all
ports and possibly disrupting network performance.
Command Usage
• IGMP Snooping – This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report
packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP multicast host
groups to identify the IP multicast group members. It simply monitors the IGMP
packets passing through it, picks out the group registration information, and
configures the multicast filters accordingly.
• IGMP Querier – A router, or multicast-enabled switch, can periodically ask their
hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. If there is more than one router/switch
on the LAN performing IP multicasting, one of these devices is elected “querier”
and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members. It then propagates
the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch/router to ensure that it will
continue to receive the multicast service.
Note: Multicast routers use this information, along with a multicast routing protocol such
as DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet.
Command Attributes
• IGMP Status — When enabled, the switch will monitor network traffic to determine
which hosts want to receive multicast traffic. This is also referred to as IGMP
Snooping. (Default: Enabled)
• Act as IGMP Querier — When enabled, the switch can serve as the Querier,
which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic.
(Default: Enabled)
• IGMP Query Count — Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which
there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the
multicast group. (Range: 2-10; Default: 2)
• IGMP Query Interval — Sets the frequency at which the switch sends IGMP
host-query messages. (Range: 60-125 seconds; Default: 125)
• IGMP Report Delay — Sets the time between receiving an IGMP Report for an IP
multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of that port
and removes the entry from its list. (Range: 5-25 seconds; Default: 10)
• IGMP Query Timeout — The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops
before it considers the router port (i.e., the interface which had been receiving
query packets) to have expired. (Range: 300-500 seconds; Default: 300)
• IGMP Version — Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices on
the network. (Range: 1-2; Default: 2)
Notes: 1. All systems on the subnet must support the same version.
2. Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2, including IGMP Report Delay
and IGMP Query Timeout.

3-136
3
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Configuration. Adjust the IGMP settings as
required, and then click Apply. (The default settings are shown below.)
Figure 3-82 IGMP Configuration
CLI – This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering, and then displays the
current status.
Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router
Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained
from IGMP, along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM, to
support IP multicasting across the Internet. These routers may be dynamically
discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interface on the switch.
You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this
switch attached to a neighboring multicast router/switch for each VLAN ID.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping 4-182
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier 4-185
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-count 10 4-185
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 100 4-186
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 20 4-187
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 300 4-187
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version 2 4-183
Console#show ip igmp snooping 4-183
Service status: Enabled
Querier status: Enabled
Query count: 10
Query interval: 100 sec
Query max response time: 20 sec
Router port expire time: 300 sec
IGMP snooping version: Version 2
Console#

Multicast Filtering
3-137
3
Command Attributes
• Multicast Router List – Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or
those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch.
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, Multicast Router Port Information. Select the required
VLAN ID from the scroll-down list to display the associated multicast routers.
Figure 3-83 Displaying Multicast Router Port Information
CLI – This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port
attached to a multicast router.
Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router
Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be able to
locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router/
switch connected over the network to an interface (port or trunk) on your switch, you
can manually configure the interface (and a specified VLAN) to join all the current
multicast groups supported by the attached router. This can ensure that multicast
traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch.
Command Attributes
• Interface – Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list.
• VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the
attached multicast router.
• Unit – Stack unit. (Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
• Port or Trunk – Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router.
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4-189
VLAN M'cast Router Port Type
---- ------------------ -------
1 Eth 1/11 Static
Console#

3-138
3
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, Static Multicast Router Port Configuration. Specify the
interfaces attached to a multicast router, indicate the VLAN which will forward all the
corresponding multicast traffic, and then click Add. After you have finished adding
interfaces to the list, click Apply.
Figure 3-84 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration
CLI – This example configures port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/11 4-188
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4-189
VLAN M'cast Router Port Type
---- ------------------ -------
1 Eth 1/11 Static
Console#

Multicast Filtering
3-139
3
Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services
You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast
service.
Command Attributes
• VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN for which to display port members.
• Multicast IP Address – The IP address for a specific multicast service.
• Multicast Group Port List – Shows the interfaces that have already been
assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast service.
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IP Multicast Registration Table. Select a VLAN ID and
the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll-down lists. The switch will
display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service.
Figure 3-85 IP Multicast Registration Table
CLI – This example displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1,
along with the ports propagating the corresponding services. The Type field shows if
this entry was learned dynamically or was statically configured.
Console#show bridge 1 multicast vlan 1 4-184
VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type
---- --------------- ------------ -------
1 224.1.1.12 Eth1/12 USER
1 224.1.2.3 Eth1/12 IGMP
Console#

3-140
3
Assigning Ports to Multicast Services
Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP
Query messages as described in “Configuring IGMP snooping and Query
Parameters” on page 3-133. For certain applications that require tighter control, you
may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch. First add all the
ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN, and then assign the
multicast service to that VLAN group.
Command Usage
• Static multicast addresses are never aged out.
• When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN, the
corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN.
Command Attributes
• Interface – Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list.
• VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the
attached multicast router/switch.
• Multicast IP – The IP address for a specific multicast service
• Unit – Stack unit. (Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
• Port or Trunk – Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router/switch.
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Member Port Table. Specify the interface
attached to a multicast service (via an IGMP-enabled switch or multicast router),
indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service, specify the multicast IP
address, and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the member list,
click Apply.
Figure 3-86 IGMP Member Port Table

Multicast Filtering
3-141
3
CLI – This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1, and then displays all the
known multicast services supported on VLAN 1.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224.1.1.12
ethernet 1/12 4-182
Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1 4-184
---- --------------- ------------ -------
1 224.1.1.12 Eth1/12 USER
1 224.1.2.3 Eth1/12 IGMP
Console#

3-142
3

4-1
Chapter 4: Command Line Interface
This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI).
Note: You can only access the console interface through the Master unit in the stack.
Using the Command Line Interface
Accessing the CLI
When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection
to the server’s console port, or via a Telnet connection, the switch can be managed
by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt. Using the switch's
command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX
system.
Console Connection
To access the switch through the console port, perform these steps:
1. At the console prompt, enter the user name and password. (The default user
names are “admin” and “guest” with corresponding passwords of “admin” and
“guest.”) When the administrator user name and password is entered, the CLI
displays the “Console#” prompt and enters privileged access mode
(i.e., Privileged Exec). But when the guest user name and password is entered,
the CLI displays the “Console>” prompt and enters normal access mode
(i.e., Normal Exec).
2. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.
3. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.
After connecting to the system through the console port, the login screen displays:
Telnet Connection
Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol. In this environment, your
management station and any network device you want to manage over the network
must have a valid IP address. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255,
separated by periods. Each address consists of a network portion and host portion.
For example, the IP address assigned to this switch, 10.1.0.1, with subnet mask
255.255.255.0, consists of a network portion (10.1.0) and a host portion (1).
User Access Verification
Username: admin
Password:
Console#

Command Line Interface
4-2
4
Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default.
To access the switch through a Telnet session, you must first set the IP address for
the Master unit, and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a
different IP subnet. For example,
If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to
the Internet, you need to apply for a registered IP address. However, if you are
attached to an isolated network, then you can use any IP address that matches the
network segment to which you are attached.
After you configure the switch with an IP address, you can open a Telnet session by
performing these steps:
1. From the remote host, enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the
device you want to access.
2. At the prompt, enter the user name and system password. The CLI will display
the “Vty-n#” prompt for the administrator to show that you are using privileged
access mode (i.e., Privileged Exec), or “Vty-n>” for the guest to show that you
are using normal access mode (i.e., Normal Exec), where n indicates the
number of the current Telnet session.
3. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.
4. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.
After entering the Telnet command, the login screen displays:
Note: You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet.
Username: admin
Password:
Vty-0#

Entering Commands
4-3
4
Entering Commands
This section describes how to enter CLI commands.
Keywords and Arguments
A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments. Keywords identify a
command, and arguments specify configuration parameters. For example, in the
command “show interfaces status ethernet 1/5,” show interfaces and status are
keywords, ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type, and 1/5
specifies the unit/port.
You can enter commands as follows:
• To enter a simple command, enter the command keyword.
• To enter multiple commands, enter each command in the required order. For
example, to enable Privileged Exec command mode, and display the startup
configuration, enter:
Console>enable
Console#show startup-config
• To enter commands that require parameters, enter the required parameters after
the command keyword. For example, to set a password for the administrator,
enter:
Console(config)#username admin password 0 smith
Minimum Abbreviation
The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a
command. For example, the command “configure” can be entered as con. If an
entry is ambiguous, the system will prompt for further input.
Command Completion
If you terminate input with a Tab key, the CLI will print the remaining characters of a
partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity. In the “logging history” example, typing
log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to “logging.”
Getting Help on Commands
You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help
command. You can also display command syntax by using the “?” character to list
keywords or parameters.

4-4
4
Showing Commands
If you enter a “?” at the command prompt, the system will display the first level of
keywords for the current command class (Normal Exec or Privileged Exec) or
configuration class (Global, ACL, Interface, Line or VLAN Database). You can also
display a list of valid keywords for a specific command. For example, the command
“show ?” displays a list of possible show commands:
The command “show interfaces ?” will display the following information:
Console#show ?
access-group Access groups
access-list Access lists
bridge-ext Bridge extension information
calendar Date and time information
dot1x Show 802.1X content
garp GARP properties
gvrp GVRP interface information
history History information
interfaces Interface information
ip IP information
lacp LACP statistics
line TTY line information
log Login records
logging Login setting
mac MAC access lists
mac-address-table Configuration of the address table
management Management IP filter
map Maps priority
port Port Characteristics
public-key Public Key information
queue Priority queue information
radius-server RADIUS server information
rate-limit Configures rate-limits
running-config Information on the running configuration
snmp Simple Network Management Protocol statistics
sntp Simple Network Time Protocol configuration
spanning-tree Spanning-tree configuration
ssh Secure shell server connections
startup-config Startup system configuration
system System Information
tacacs-server TACACS server settings
users Information about terminal lines
version System hardware and software versions
vlan Virtual LAN settings
Console#show
Console#show interfaces ?
counters Interface counters information
status Interface status information
switchport Interface switchport information
Console#show interfaces

Entering Commands
4-5
4
Partial Keyword Lookup
If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark, alternatives that match the
initial letters are provided. (Remember not to leave a space between the command
and question mark.) For example “s?” shows all the keywords starting with “s.”
Negating the Effect of Commands
For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword “no” to cancel
the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value. For example,
the logging command will log system messages to a host server. To disable
logging, specify the no logging command. This guide describes the negation effect
for all applicable commands.
Using Command History
The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered. You can scroll
back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key. Any command
displayed in the history list can be executed again, or first modified and then
executed.
Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed
commands.
Understanding Command Modes
The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes. Exec commands
generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters.
Configuration commands, on the other hand, modify interface parameters or enable
certain switching functions. These classes are further divided into different modes.
Available commands depend on the selected mode. You can always enter a
question mark “?” at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the
current mode. The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the
following table:
Console#show s?
snmp sntp spanning-tree ssh startup-config
system
Console#show s
Table 4-1 Command Modes
Class Mode
Exec Normal
Privileged
Configuration Global* Access Control List
Interface
Line
VLAN Database
* You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode.
You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes.

4-6
4
Exec Commands
When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and
password “guest,” the system enters the Normal Exec command mode (or guest
mode), displaying the “Console>” command prompt. Only a limited number of the
commands are available in this mode. You can access all commands only from the
Privileged Exec command mode (or administrator mode). To access Privilege Exec
mode, open a new console session with the user name and password “admin.” The
system will now display the “Console#” command prompt. You can also enter
Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode, by entering the enable
command, followed by the privileged level password “super” (page 4-27).
To enter Privileged Exec mode, enter the following user names and passwords:
Configuration Commands
Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify switch
settings. These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved
when the switch is rebooted. To store the running configuration in non-volatile
storage, use the copy running-config startup-config command.
The configuration commands are organized into different modes:
• Global Configuration - These commands modify the system level configuration,
and include commands such as hostname and snmp-server community.
• Access Control List Configuration - These commands are used for packet filtering.
• Interface Configuration - These commands modify the port configuration such as
speed-duplex and negotiation.
• Line Configuration - These commands modify the console port and Telnet
configuration, and include command such as parity and databits.
• VLAN Configuration - Includes the command to create VLAN groups.
Username: admin
Password: [admin login password]
Console#
Username: guest
Password: [guest login password]
Console>enable
Password: [privileged level password]
Console#

Entering Commands
4-7
4
To enter the Global Configuration mode, enter the command configure in Privileged
Exec mode. The system prompt will change to “Console(config)#” which gives you
access privilege to all Global Configuration commands.
To enter the other modes, at the configuration prompt type one of the following
commands. Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode.
For example, you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration
mode, and then return to Privileged Exec mode
Console#configure
Console(config)#
Table 4-2 Configuration Modes
Mode Command Prompt Page
Line line {console | vty} Console(config-line)# 4-10
Access
Control List
access-list ip standard
access-list ip extended
access-list mac
Console(config-ext-acl)#
4-89
Interface interface {ethernet port | port-channel id| vlan id} Console(config-if)# 4-108
VLAN vlan database Console(config-vlan)# 4-149
.
.
.
Console(config)#

4-8
4
Command Line Processing
Commands are not case sensitive. You can abbreviate commands and parameters
as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently
available commands or parameters. You can use the Tab key to complete partial
commands, or enter a partial command followed by the “?” character to display a list
of possible matches. You can also use the following editing keystrokes for
command-line processing:
Table 4-3 Command Line Processing
Keystroke Function
Ctrl-A Shifts cursor to start of command line.
Ctrl-B Shifts cursor to the left one character.
Ctrl-C Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt.
Ctrl-E Shifts cursor to end of command line.
Ctrl-F Shifts cursor to the right one character.
Ctrl-K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line.
Ctrl-L Repeats current command line on a new line.
Ctrl-N Enters the next command line in the history buffer.
Ctrl-P Enters the last command.
Ctrl-R Repeats current command line on a new line.
Ctrl-U Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line.
Ctrl-W Deletes the last word typed.
Esc-B Moves the cursor back one word.
Esc-D Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word.
Esc-F Moves the cursor forward one word.
Delete key or backspace key Erases a mistake when entering a command.

Command Groups
4-9
4
Command Groups
The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below.
The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations:
NE (Normal Exec) IC (Interface Configuration)
PE (Privileged Exec) LC (Line Configuration)
GC (Global Configuration) VC (VLAN Database Configuration)
ACL (Access Control List Configuration)
Table 4-4 Command Groups
Command Group Description Page
Line Sets communication parameters for the serial port and Telnet,
including baud rate and console time-out
4-10
General Basic commands for entering privileged access mode, restarting the
system, or quitting the CLI
4-19
System Management Controls system logs, system passwords, user name, browser
management options, and a variety of other system information
4-24
Flash/File Manages code image or switch configuration files 4-65
Authentication Configures logon access using local or remote authentication;
also configures port security and IEEE 802.1X port access control
4-71
Access Control List Provides filtering for IP frames (based on address, protocol, TCP/UDP
port number or TCP control code) or non-IP frames (based on MAC
address or Ethernet type)
4-89
SNMP Activates authentication failure traps; configures community access
strings, and trap managers; also configures IP address filtering
4-103
Interface Configures the connection parameters for all Ethernet ports,
aggregated links, and VLANs
4-108
Mirror Port Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data
passing through or the performance of the monitored port
4-119
Rate Limiting Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on a port 4-121
Link Aggregation Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk; configures
Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks
4-122
Address Table Configures the address table for filtering specified addresses, displays
current entries, clears the table, or sets the aging time
4-133
Spanning Tree Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch 4-137
VLANs Configures VLAN settings, and defines port membership for VLAN
groups; also enables or configures private VLANs
4-149
GVRP and
Bridge Extension
Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic VLAN learning;
shows the configuration for the bridge extension MIB
4-164
Priority Sets port priority for untagged frames, selects strict priority or weighted
round robin, relative weight for each priority queue, also sets priority for
TCP/UDP traffic types, IP precedence, and DSCP
4-168
Multicast Filtering Configures IGMP multicast filtering, query parameters, and specifies
ports attached to a multicast router
4-181
IP Interface Configures IP address for the switch 4-190

4-10
4
Line Commands
You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100
compatible device to the server’s serial port. These commands are used to set
communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet (i.e., a virtual terminal).
line
This command identifies a specific line for configuration, and to process subsequent
line configuration commands.
Syntax
line {console | vty}
• console - Console terminal line.
• vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).
Default Setting
There is no default line.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Table 4-5 Line Commands
Command Function Mode Page
line Identifies a specific line for configuration and starts the line
configuration mode
GC 4-10
login Enables password checking at login LC 4-11
password Specifies a password on a line LC 4-12
timeout login
response
Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the
CLI
LC 4-13
exec-timeout Sets the interval that the command interpreter waits until user
input is detected
LC 4-13
password-thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the number
of failed logon attempts
LC 4-14
silent-time* Sets the amount of time the management console is
inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts
exceeds the threshold set by the password-thresh command
LC 4-15
databits* Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted
and generated by hardware
LC 4-15
parity* Defines the generation of a parity bit LC 4-16
speed* Sets the terminal baud rate LC 4-17
stopbits* Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte LC 4-17
disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4-18
show line Displays a terminal line's parameters NE, PE 4-18
* These commands only apply to the serial port.

Line Commands
4-11
4
Command Usage
Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as “Vty” in
screen displays such as show users. However, the serial communication
parameters (e.g., databits) do not affect Telnet connections.
Example
To enter console line mode, enter the following command:
Related Commands
show line (4-18)
show users (4-62)
login
This command enables password checking at login. Use the no form to disable
password checking and allow connections without a password.
Syntax
login [local]
no login
local - Selects local password checking. Authentication is based on the
user name specified with the username command.
Default Setting
login local
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
• There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login:
- login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the
password line configuration command. When using this method, the
management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.
- login local selects authentication via the user name and password
specified by the username command (i.e., default setting). When using this
method, the management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) or Privileged
Exec (PE) mode, depending on the user’s privilege level (0 or 15
respectively).
- no login selects no authentication. When using this method, the
management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.
• This command controls login authentication via the switch itself. To configure
user names and passwords for remote authentication servers, you must use
the RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers.
Console(config)#line console
Console(config-line)#

4-12
4
Example
Related Commands
username (4-26)
password (4-12)
password
This command specifies the password for a line. Use the no form to remove the
password.
Syntax
password {0 | 7} password
no password
• {0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password
• password - Character string that specifies the line password.
(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)
Default Setting
No password is specified.
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
• When a connection is started on a line with password protection, the system
prompts for the password. If you enter the correct password, the system
shows a prompt. You can use the password-thresh command to set the
number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system
terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state.
• The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password
settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file
during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP
server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.
Example
Related Commands
login (4-11)
password-thresh (4-14)
Console(config-line)#login local
Console(config-line)#password 0 secret

Line Commands
4-13
4
timeout login response
This command sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI.
Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
timeout login response [seconds]
no timeout login response
seconds - Integer that specifies the timeout interval.
(Range: 0 - 300 seconds; 0: disabled)
Default Setting
• CLI: Disabled (0 seconds)
• Telnet: 600 seconds
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
• If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is
terminated for the session.
• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.
• The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.
• Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting.
Example
To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:
Related Commands
silent-time (4-15)
exec-timeout (4-14)
exec-timeout
This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected.
Syntax
exec-timeout [seconds]
no exec-timeout
seconds - Integer that specifies the number of seconds.
(Range: 0-65535 seconds; 0: no timeout)
Default Setting
CLI: No timeout
Telnet: 10 minutes
Console(config-line)#timeout login response 120

4-14
4
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
• If user input is detected within the timeout interval, the session is kept open;
otherwise the session is terminated.
• The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.
• Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting.
Example
To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:
Related Commands
silent-time (4-15)
timeout login response (4-13)
password-thresh
This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of
failed logon attempts. Use the no form to remove the threshold value.
Syntax
password-thresh [threshold]
no password-thresh
threshold - The number of allowed password attempts.
(Range: 1-120; 0: no threshold)
Default Setting
The default value is three attempts.
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
• When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the system interface becomes
silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt.
(Use the silent-time command to set this interval.) When this threshold is
reached for Telnet, the Telnet logon interface shuts down.
Example
To set the password threshold to five attempts, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 120
Console(config-line)#password-thresh 5

Line Commands
4-15
4
Related Commands
silent-time (4-15)
timeout login response (4-13)
silent-time
This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible
after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the
password-thresh command. Use the no form to remove the silent time value.
Syntax
silent-time [seconds]
no silent-time
seconds - The number of seconds to disable console response.
(Range: 0-65535; 0: no silent-time)
Default Setting
The default value is no silent-time.
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Example
To set the silent time to 60 seconds, enter this command:
Related Commands
password-thresh (4-14)
databits
This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and
generated by the console port. Use the no form to restore the default value.
Syntax
databits {7 | 8}
no databits
• 7 - Seven data bits per character.
• 8 - Eight data bits per character.
Default Setting
8 data bits per character
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Console(config-line)#silent-time 60

4-16
4
Command Usage
The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from
devices that generate 7 data bits with parity. If parity is being generated,
specify 7 data bits per character. If no parity is required, specify 8 data bits per
character.
Example
To specify 7 data bits, enter this command:
Related Commands
parity (4-16)
parity
This command defines the generation of a parity bit. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
parity {none | even | odd}
no parity
• none - No parity
• even - Even parity
• odd - Odd parity
Default Setting
No parity
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems
often require a specific parity bit setting.
Example
To specify no parity, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#databits 7
Console(config-line)#parity none

Line Commands
4-17
4
speed
This command sets the terminal line’s baud rate. This command sets both the
transmit (to terminal) and receive (from terminal) speeds. Use the no form to restore
the default setting.
Syntax
speed bps
no speed
bps - Baud rate in bits per second.
(Options: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps)
Default Setting
9600
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial
port. Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be
supported. The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported.
Example
To specify 57600 bps, enter this command:
stopbits
This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte. Use the no
form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
stopbits {1 | 2}
• 1 - One stop bit
• 2 - Two stop bits
Default Setting
1 stop bit
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Example
To specify 2 stop bits, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#speed 57600
Console(config-line)#stopbits 2

4-18
4
disconnect
This command terminates an SSH, Telnet, or console connection.
Syntax
disconnect session-id
session-id – The session identifier for an SSH, Telnet or console
connection. (Range: 0-4)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Specifying session identifier “0” will disconnect the console connection.
Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or
Telnet connection.
Example
Related Commands
show ssh (4-41)
show users (4-62)
show line
This command displays the terminal line’s parameters.
Syntax
show line [console | vty]
• console - Console terminal line.
• vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).
Default Setting
Shows all lines
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Console#disconnect 1
Console#

General Commands
4-19
4
Example
To show all lines, enter this command:
General Commands
enable
This command activates Privileged Exec mode. In privileged mode, additional
commands are available, and certain commands display additional information. See
“Understanding Command Modes” on page 4-5.
Syntax
enable [level]
level - Privilege level to log into the device.
The device has two predefined privilege levels: 0: Normal Exec,
15: Privileged Exec. Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode.
Console#show line
Silent time: Disabled
Baudrate: 9600
Databits: 8
Parity: none
Stopbits: 1
VTY configuration:
console#
Table 4-6 General Commands
enable Activates privileged mode NE 4-19
disable Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE 4-20
configure Activates global configuration mode PE 4-21
show history Shows the command history buffer NE, PE 4-21
reload Restarts the system PE 4-22
end Returns to Privileged Exec mode any
config.
mode
4-22
exit Returns to the previous configuration mode, or exits the CLI any 4-23
quit Exits a CLI session NE, PE 4-23
help Shows how to use help any NA
? Shows options for command completion (context sensitive) any NA

4-20
4
Default Setting
Level 15
Command Mode
Normal Exec
Command Usage
• “super” is the default password required to change the command mode from
Normal Exec to Privileged Exec. (To set this password, see the enable
password command on page 4-27.)
• The “#” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the
system is in privileged access mode.
Example
Related Commands
disable (4-20)
enable password (4-27)
disable
This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode. In normal
access mode, you can only display basic information on the switch's configuration or
Ethernet statistics. To gain access to all commands, you must use the privileged
mode. See “Understanding Command Modes” on page 4-5.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
The “>” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the
system is in normal access mode.
Example
Related Commands
enable (4-19)
Console>enable
Password: [privileged level password]
Console#
Console#disable
Console>

General Commands
4-21
4
configure
This command activates Global Configuration mode. You must enter this mode to
modify any settings on the switch. You must also enter Global Configuration mode
prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes, including Interface
Configuration, Line Configuration, and VLAN Database Configuration. See
“Understanding Command Modes” on page 4-5.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
end (4-22)
show history
This command shows the contents of the command history buffer.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and
10 Configuration commands.
Example
In this example, the show history command lists the contents of the command
history buffer:
Console#configure
Console(config)#
Console#show history
Execution command history:
2 config
1 show history
Configuration command history:
4 interface vlan 1
3 exit
2 interface vlan 1
1 end
Console#

4-22
4
The ! command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer
when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode, and commands from the
Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration
modes. In this example, the !2 command repeats the second command in the
Execution history buffer (config).
reload
This command restarts the system.
Note: When the system is restarted, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test. It will also
retain all configuration information stored in non-volatile memory by the copy
running-config startup-config command.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command resets the entire system.
Example
This example shows how to reset the switch:
end
This command returns to Privileged Exec mode.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration, Interface Configuration, Line Configuration, and VLAN
Database Configuration.
Example
This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface
Configuration mode:
Console#!2
Console#config
Console(config)#
Console#reload
Console#

General Commands
4-23
4
exit
This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exit the configuration
program.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Any
Example
This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global
Configuration mode, and then quit the CLI session:
quit
This command exits the configuration program.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program.
Example
This example shows how to quit a CLI session:
Console#exit
Press ENTER to start session
Username:
Console#quit
Press ENTER to start session
Username:

4-24
4
System Management Commands
These commands are used to control system logs, passwords, user names, browser
configuration options, and display or configure a variety of other system information.
Device Designation Commands
prompt
This command customizes the CLI prompt. Use the no form to restore the default
prompt.
Syntax
prompt string
no prompt
string - Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt. (Maximum
length: 255 characters)
Default Setting
Console
Command Mode
Table 4-7 System Management Commands
Command Group Function Page
Device Designation Configures information that uniquely identifies this switch 4-24
User Access Configures the basic user names and passwords for management access 4-25
IP Filter Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access 4-28
Web Server Enables management access via a web browser 4-30
Telnet Server Enables management access via Telnet 4-33
Secure Shell Provides secure replacement for Telnet 4-34
Event Logging Controls logging of error messages 4-43
Time (System Clock) Sets the system clock automatically via NTP/SNTP server or manually 4-53
System Status Displays system configuration, active managers, and version information 4-57
Frame Size Enables support for jumbo frames 4-64
Table 4-8 Device Designation Commands
prompt Customizes the prompt used in PE and NE mode GC 4-24
hostname Specifies the host name for the switch GC 4-25
snmp-server contact Sets the system contact string GC 4-104
snmp-server location Sets the system location string GC 4-104

4-25
4
Example
hostname
This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device. Use the no form
to restore the default host name.
Syntax
hostname name
no hostname
name - The name of this host. (Maximum length: 255 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Example
User Access Commands
The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section.
This switch also includes other options for password checking via the console or a
Telnet connection (page 4-10), user authentication via a remote authentication
server (page 4-71), and host access authentication for specific ports (page 4-81).
Console(config)#prompt RD2
RD2(config)#
Console(config)#hostname RD#1
Console(config)#
Table 4-9 User Access Commands
username Establishes a user name-based authentication system at login GC 4-26
enable password Sets a password to control access to the Privileged Exec level GC 4-27

4-26
4
username
This command adds named users, requires authentication at login, specifies or
changes a user's password (or specify that no password is required), or specifies or
changes a user's access level. Use the no form to remove a user name.
Syntax
username name {access-level level | nopassword |
password {0 | 7} password}
no username name
• name - The name of the user.
(Maximum length: 8 characters, case sensitive. Maximum users: 16)
• access-level level - Specifies the user level.
The device has two predefined privilege levels:
0: Normal Exec, 15: Privileged Exec.
• nopassword - No password is required for this user to log in.
• {0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.
• password password - The authentication password for the user.
Default Setting
• The default access level is Normal Exec.
• The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are:
Command Mode
Command Usage
The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password
settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file during
system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server.
There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.
Example
This example shows how to set the access level and password for a user.
Table 4-10 Default Login Settings
username access-level password
guest
admin
0
15
guest
admin
Console(config)#username bob access-level 15
Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith
Console(config)#

4-27
4
enable password
After initially logging onto the system, you should set the Privileged Exec password.
Remember to record it in a safe place. This command controls access to the
Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level. Use the no form to reset the
default password.
Syntax
enable password [level level] {0 | 7} password
no enable password [level level]
• level level - Level 15 for Privileged Exec. (Levels 0-14 are not used.)
• {0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.
• password - password for this privilege level.
Default Setting
• The default is level 15.
• The default password is “super”
Command Mode
Command Usage
• You cannot set a null password. You will have to enter a password to change
the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable
command (page 4-19).
• The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password
settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file
during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP
server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.
Example
Related Commands
enable (4-19)
authentication enable (4-72)
Console(config)#enable password level 15 0 admin
Console(config)#

4-28
4
IP Filter Commands
management
This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management
access to the switch through various protocols. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
[no] management {all-client | http-client | snmp-client | telnet-client}
start-address [end-address]
• all-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.
• http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the web group.
• snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.
• telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.
• start-address - A single IP address, or the starting address of a range.
• end-address - The end address of a range.
Default Setting
All addresses
Command Mode
Command Usage
• If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid
address, the switch will reject the connection, enter an event message in the
system log, and send a trap message to the trap manager.
• IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access respectively.
Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses, either
individual addresses or address ranges.
• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or Telnet), the
switch will not accept overlapping address ranges. When entering addresses
for different groups, the switch will accept overlapping address ranges.
• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must
delete the entire range, and reenter the addresses.
• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by
specifying both the start address and end address.
Table 4-11 IP Filter Commands
management Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access GC 4-28
show management Displays the switch to be monitored or configured from a
browser
PE 4-29

4-29
4
Example
This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses.
show management
This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management
access to the switch through various protocols.
Syntax
show management {all-client | http-client | snmp-client | telnet-client}
• all-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.
• http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the web group.
• snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.
• telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.19
Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30
Console(config)#
Console#show management all-client
Management IP Filter
HTTP-Client:
-----------------------------------------------
1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19
2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30
SNMP-Client:
-----------------------------------------------
1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19
2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30
TELNET-Client:
-----------------------------------------------
1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19
2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30
Console#

4-30
4
Web Server Commands
ip http port
This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface.
Use the no form to use the default port.
Syntax
ip http port port-number
no ip http port
port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface.
(Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
80
Command Mode
Example
Related Commands
ip http server (4-30)
ip http server
This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser. Use
the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] ip http server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Table 4-12 Web Server Commands
ip http port Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface GC 4-30
ip http server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser GC 4-30
ip http secure-server Enables HTTPS for encrypted communications GC 4-31
ip http secure-port Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS GC 4-32
Console(config)#ip http port 769
Console(config)#

4-31
4
Example
Related Commands
ip http port (4-30)
ip http secure-server
This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTPS) over the
Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an encrypted connection)
to the switch’s web interface. Use the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] ip http secure-server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
• Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch.
However, you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the
same UDP port.
• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in
your browser: https://device[:port_number]
• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:
- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.
- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the
connection.
- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting
data.
• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.
A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5.x and
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later versions.
• The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS:
• To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default Secure-site
Certificate” on page 3-41. Also refer to the copy command on page 4-65.
Console(config)#ip http server
Console(config)#
Table 4-13 HTTPS System Support
Web Browser Operating System
Internet Explorer 5.0 or later Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),
Windows 2000, Windows XP
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Solaris 2.6

4-32
4
Example
Related Commands
ip http secure-port (4-32)
copy tftp https-certificate (4-65)
ip http secure-port
This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS connection to the
switch’s web interface. Use the no form to restore the default port.
Syntax
ip http secure-port port_number
no ip http secure-port
port_number – The UDP port used for HTTPS.
(Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
443
Command Mode
Command Usage
• You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port.
• If you change the HTTPS port number, clients attempting to connect to the
HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL, in this format:
https://device:port_number
Example
Related Commands
ip http secure-server (4-31)
Console(config)#ip http secure-server
Console(config)#
Console(config)#ip http secure-port 1000
Console(config)#

4-33
4
Telnet Server Commands
ip telnet port
This command specifies the TCP port number used by the Telnet interface. Use the
no form to use the default port.
Syntax
ip telnet port port-number
no ip telnet port
port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface.
(Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
23
Command Mode
Example
Related Commands
ip telnet server (4-33)
ip telnet server
This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from Telnet. Use the
no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] ip telnet server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Example
Table 4-14 Telnet Server Commands
ip telnet port Specifies the port to be used by the Telnet interface GC 4-30
ip telnet server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from Telnet GC 4-30
Console(config)#ip telnet port 123
Console(config)#
Console(config)#ip telnet server
Console(config)#

4-34
4
Related Commands
ip telnet port (4-33)
Secure Shell Commands
The Berkley-standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix
systems. Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows
and other environments. These tools, including commands such as rlogin (remote
login), rsh (remote shell), and rcp (remote copy), are not secure from hostile attacks.
The Secure Shell (SSH) includes server/client applications intended as a secure
replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools. SSH can also provide
remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet.
When a client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol, the switch uses a public-key
that the client must match along with a local user name and password for access
authentication. SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and
SSH-enabled management station clients, and ensures that data traveling over the
network arrives unaltered.
This section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server. However,
note that you also need to install a SSH client on the management station when
using this protocol to configure the switch.
Note: The switch supports both SSH Version 1.5 and 2.0.
Table 4-15 SSH Commands
ip ssh server Enables the SSH server on the switch GC 4-36
ip ssh timeout Specifies the authentication timeout for the SSH server GC 4-37
ip ssh
authentication-retries
Specifies the number of retries allowed by a client GC 4-37
ip ssh server-key size Sets the SSH server key size GC 4-38
copy tftp public-key Copies the user’s public key from a TFTP server to the switch PE 4-65
delete public-key Deletes the public key for the specified user PE 4-38
ip ssh crypto host-key
generate
Generates the host key PE 4-39
ip ssh crypto zeroize Clear the host key from RAM PE 4-39
ip ssh save host-key Saves the host key from RAM to flash memory PE 4-40
disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4-18
show ip ssh Displays the status of the SSH server and the configured values
for authentication timeout and retries
PE 4-40
show ssh Displays the status of current SSH sessions PE 4-41
show public-key Shows the public key for the specified user or for the host PE 4-42
show users Shows SSH users, including privilege level and public key type PE 4-62

4-35
4
The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key
authentication. If password authentication is specified by the SSH client, then the
password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS+ remote
authentication server, as specified by the authentication login command on
page 4-71. If public key authentication is specified by the client, then you must
configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the
following section. Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password
authentication, you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and
enable the SSH server.
To use the SSH server, complete these steps:
1. Generate a Host Key Pair – Use the ip ssh crypto host-key generate
command to create a host public/private key pair.
2. Provide Host Public Key to Clients – Many SSH client programs automatically
import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch.
Otherwise, you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management
station and place the host public key in it. An entry for a public key in the known
hosts file would appear similar to the following example:
10.1.0.54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254
15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233
76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206
51941746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545
24083971752646358058176716709574804776117
3. Import Client’s Public Key to the Switch – Use the copy tftp public-key
command to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client’s granted
management access to the switch. (Note that these clients must be configured
locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as described on page 3-35.)
The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys. The current
firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown
in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key:
1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880
05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199
69631781366277414168985132049117204830339254324101637997592371449011938
00609025394840848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671
31629432532818915045306393916643 steve@192.168.1.19
4. Set the Optional Parameters – Set other optional parameters, including the
authentication timeout, the number of retries, and the server key size.
5. Enable SSH Service – Use the ip ssh server command to enable the SSH
server on the switch.
6. Configure Challenge-Response Authentication – When an SSH client attempts
to contact the switch, the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a
session key and encryption method. Only clients that have a private key

4-36
4
corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can gain access. The
following exchanges take place during this process:
a. The client sends its public key to the switch.
b. The switch compares the client's public key to those stored in memory.
c. If a match is found, the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random
sequence of bytes, and sends this string to the client.
d. The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes, and sends the
decrypted bytes back to the switch.
e. The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent. If the
two sets match, this means that the client's private key corresponds to an
authorized public key, and the client is authenticated.
Note: To use SSH with only password authentication, the host public key must still be
given to the client, either during initial connection or manually entered into the
known host file. However, you do not need to configure the client’s keys.
ip ssh server
This command enables the Secure Shell (SSH) server on this switch. Use the no
form to disable this service.
Syntax
[no] ip ssh server
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
• The SSH server supports up to four client sessions. The maximum number of
client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions.
• The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first
establishes a connection with the switch, and then negotiates with the client
to select either DES (56-bit) or 3DES (168-bit) for data encryption.
• You must generate the host key before enabling the SSH server.
Example
Related Commands
ip ssh crypto host-key generate (4-39)
show ssh (4-41)
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa
Console#configure
Console(config)#ip ssh server
Console(config)#

4-37
4
ip ssh timeout
This command configures the timeout for the SSH server. Use the no form to restore
Syntax
ip ssh timeout seconds
no ip ssh timeout
seconds – The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation.
(Range: 1-120)
Default Setting
10 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the
client during the SSH negotiation phase. Once an SSH session has been
established, the timeout for user input is controlled by the exec-timeout
command for vty sessions.
Example
Related Commands
exec-timeout (4-13)
show ip ssh (4-40)
ip ssh authentication-retries
This command configures the number of times the SSH server attempts to
reauthenticate a user. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ip ssh authentication-retries count
no ip ssh authentication-retries
count – The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the
interface is reset. (Range: 1-5)
Default Setting
3
Command Mode
Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 60
Console(config)#

4-38
4
Example
Related Commands
show ip ssh (4-40)
ip ssh server-key size
This command sets the SSH server key size. Use the no form to restore the default
setting.
Syntax
ip ssh server-key size key-size
no ip ssh server-key size
key-size – The size of server key. (Range: 512-896 bits)
Default Setting
768 bits
Command Mode
Command Usage
• The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch.
• The host key is shared with the SSH client, and is fixed at 1024 bits.
Example
delete public-key
This command deletes the specified user’s public key.
Syntax
delete public-key username [dsa | rsa]
• username – Name of an SSH user. (Range: 1-8 characters)
• dsa – DSA public key type.
• rsa – RSA public key type.
Default Setting
Deletes both the DSA and RSA key.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retires 2
Console(config)#
Console(config)#ip ssh server-key size 512
Console(config)#

4-39
4
Example
ip ssh crypto host-key generate
This command generates the host key pair (i.e., public and private).
Syntax
ip ssh crypto host-key generate [dsa | rsa]
• dsa – DSA (Version 2) key type.
• rsa – RSA (Version 1) key type.
Default Setting
Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• This command stores the host key pair in memory (i.e., RAM). Use the ip ssh
save host-key command to save the host key pair to flash memory.
• Some SSH client programs automatically add the public key to the known
hosts file as part of the configuration process. Otherwise, you must manually
create a known hosts file and place the host public key in it.
• The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and encryption
method with the client trying to connect to it.
Example
Related Commands
ip ssh crypto zeroize (4-39)
ip ssh save host-key (4-40)
ip ssh crypto zeroize
This command clears the host key from memory (i.e. RAM).
Syntax
ip ssh crypto zeroize [dsa | rsa]
• dsa – DSA key type.
• rsa – RSA key type.
Default Setting
Clears both the DSA and RSA key.
Console#delete public-key admin dsa
Console#
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa
Console#

4-40
4
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• This command clears the host key from volatile memory (RAM). Use the no
ip ssh save host-key command to clear the host key from flash memory.
• The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this command.
Example
Related Commands
ip ssh save host-key (4-40)
no ip ssh server (4-36)
ip ssh save host-key
This command saves host key from RAM to flash memory.
Syntax
ip ssh save host-key [dsa | rsa]
• dsa – DSA key type.
• rsa – RSA key type.
Default Setting
Saves both the DSA and RSA key.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
show ip ssh
This command displays the connection settings used when authenticating client
access to the SSH server.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console#ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa
Console#
Console#ip ssh save host-key dsa
Console#

4-41
4
Example
show ssh
This command displays the current SSH server connections.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip ssh
SSH Enabled - version 1.99
Negotiation timeout: 120 secs; Authentication retries: 3
Server key size: 768 bits
Console#
Console#show ssh
Connection Version State Username Encryption
0 2.0 Session-Started admin ctos aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
stoc aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
Console#
Table 4-16 show ssh - display description
Field Description
Session The session number. (Range: 0-3)
Version The Secure Shell version number.
State The authentication negotiation state.
(Values: Negotiation-Started, Authentication-Started, Session-Started)
Username The user name of the client.
Encryption The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server.
Options for SSHv1.5 include: DES, 3DES
Options for SSHv2.0 can include different algorithms for the client-to-server (ctos)
and server-to-client (stoc):
aes128-cbc-hmac-sha1
3des-cbc-hmac-sha1
blowfish-cbc-hmac-sha1
aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
aes192-cbc-hmac-md5
aes256-cbc-hmac-md5
3des-cbc-hmac-md5
blowfish-cbc-hmac-md5
Terminology:
DES – Data Encryption Standard (56-bit key)
3DES – Triple-DES (Uses three iterations of DES, 112-bit key)
aes – Advanced Encryption Standard (160 or 224-bit key)
blowfish – Blowfish (32-448 bit key)
cbc – cypher-block chaining
sha1 – Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (160-bit hashes)
md5 – Message Digest algorithm number 5 (128-bit hashes)

4-42
4
show public-key
This command shows the public key for the specified user or for the host.
Syntax
show public-key [user [username]| host]
username – Name of an SSH user. (Range: 1-8 characters)
Default Setting
Shows all public keys.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• If no parameters are entered, all keys are displayed. If the user keyword is
entered, but no user name is specified, then the public keys for all users are
displayed.
• When an RSA key is displayed, the first field indicates the size of the host key
(e.g., 1024), the second field is the encoded public exponent (e.g., 35), and
the last string is the encoded modulus. When a DSA key is displayed, the first
field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital
Signature Standard (DSS), and the last string is the encoded modulus.
Example
Console#show public-key host
Host:
RSA:
1024 35
1568499540186766925933394677505461732531367489083654725415020245593199868
5443583616519999233297817660658309586108259132128902337654680172627257141
3428762941301196195566782595664104869574278881462065194174677298486546861
5717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545240839717526463580581767
16709574804776117
DSA:
ssh-dss AAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAPWKZTPbsRIB8ydEXcxM3dyV/yrDbKStIlnzD/Dg0h2Hxc
YV44sXZ2JXhamLK6P8bvuiyacWbUW/a4PAtp1KMSdqsKeh3hKoA3vRRSy1N2XFfAKxl5fwFfv
JlPdOkFgzLGMinvSNYQwiQXbKTBH0Z4mUZpE85PWxDZMaCNBPjBrRAAAAFQChb4vsdfQGNIjw
bvwrNLaQ77isiwAAAIEAsy5YWDC99ebYHNRj5kh47wY4i8cZvH+/p9cnrfwFTMU01VFDly3IR
2G395NLy5Qd7ZDxfA9mCOfT/yyEfbobMJZi8oGCstSNOxrZZVnMqWrTYfdrKX7YKBw/Kjw6Bm
iFq7O+jAhf1Dg45loAc27s6TLdtny1wRq/ow2eTCD5nekAAACBAJ8rMccXTxHLFAczWS7EjOy
DbsloBfPuSAb4oAsyjKXKVYNLQkTLZfcFRu41bS2KV5LAwecsigF/+DjKGWtPNIQqabKgYCw2
o/dVzX4Gg+yqdTlYmGA7fHGm8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6DmYPXFum1Yg0fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7
w0W
Console#

4-43
4
Event Logging Commands
logging on
This command controls logging of error messages, sending debug or error
messages to switch memory. The no form disables the logging process.
Syntax
[no] logging on
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory. You
can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages
that are stored.
Example
Related Commands
logging history (4-44)
clear logging (4-46)
Table 4-17 Event Logging Commands
logging on Controls logging of error messages GC 4-43
logging history Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on
severity
GC 4-44
logging host Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging
messages
GC 4-45
logging facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages GC 4-45
logging trap Limits syslog messages saved to a remote server based on
severity
GC 4-46
clear logging Clears messages from the logging buffer PE 4-46
show logging Displays the state of logging PE 4-47
show log Displays log messages PE 4-48
Console(config)#logging on
Console(config)#

4-44
4
logging history
This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity.
The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level.
Syntax
logging history {flash | ram} level
no logging history {flash | ram}
• flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).
• ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on
power reset).
• level - One of the levels listed below. Messages sent include the selected
level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
Flash: errors (level 3 - 0)
RAM: warnings (level 6 - 0)
Command Mode
Command Usage
The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority (i.e.,
numerically lower) than that specified for RAM.
Example
Table 4-18 Logging Levels
Level Severity Name Description
7 debugging Debugging messages
6 informational Informational messages only
5 notifications Normal but significant condition, such as cold start
4 warnings Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)
3 errors Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)
2 critical Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free
memory error - resource exhausted)
1 alerts Immediate action needed
0 emergencies System unusable
* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.
Console(config)#logging history ram 0
Console(config)#

4-45
4
logging host
This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging
messages. Use the no form to remove a syslog server host.
Syntax
[no] logging host host_ip_address
host_ip_address - The IP address of a syslog server.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
• By using this command more than once you can build up a list of host IP
addresses.
• The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five.
Example
logging facility
This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages. Use the
no form to return the type to the default.
Syntax
[no] logging facility type
type - A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to
dispatch log messages to an appropriate service. (Range: 16-23)
Default Setting
23
Command Mode
Command Usage
The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See
RFC 3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the
switch. However, it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to
store messages in the corresponding database.
Example
Console(config)#logging host 10.1.0.3
Console(config)#
Console(config)#logging facility 19
Console(config)#

4-46
4
logging trap
This command enables the logging of system messages to a remote server, or
limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity. Use this
command without a specified level to enable remote logging. Use the no form to
disable remote logging.
Syntax
logging trap [level]
no logging trap
level - One of the level arguments listed below. Messages sent include the
selected level up through level 0. (Refer to the table on page 4-44.)
Default Setting
• Enabled
• Level 6 - 0
Command Mode
Command Usage
• Using this command with a specified level enables remote logging and sets
the minimum severity level to be saved.
• Using this command without a specified level also enables remote logging, but
restores the minimum severity level to the default.
Example
clear logging
This command clears messages from the log buffer.
Syntax
clear logging [flash | ram]
power reset).
Default Setting
Flash and RAM
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config)#logging trap 4
Console(config)#
Console#clear logging
Console#

4-47
4
Related Commands
show logging (4-47)
show logging
This command displays the configuration settings for logging messages to local
switch memory, to an SMTP event handler, or to a remote syslog server.
Syntax
show logging {flash | ram | sendmail | trap}
• flash - Displays settings for storing event messages in flash memory
(i.e., permanent memory).
• ram - Displays settings for storing event messages in temporary RAM
(i.e., memory flushed on power reset).
• sendmail - Displays settings for the SMTP event handler (page 4-52).
• trap - Displays settings for the trap function.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following example shows that system logging is enabled, the message level for
flash memory is “errors” (i.e., default level 3 - 0), the message level for RAM is
“informational” (i.e., default level 6 - 0).
Console#show logging flash
History logging in FLASH: level errors
Console#show logging ram
History logging in RAM: level informational
Console#
Table 4-19 show logging flash/ram - display description
Field Description
Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command.
History logging in FLASH The message level(s) reported based on the logging history command.
History logging in RAM The message level(s) reported based on the logging history command.

4-48
4
The following example displays settings for the trap function.
Related Commands
show logging sendmail (4-52)
show log
This command displays the system and event messages stored in memory.
Syntax
show log {flash | ram} [login] [tail]
power reset).
• tail - Shows event history starting from the most recent entry.
• login - Shows the login record only.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command shows the system and event messages stored in memory,
including the time stamp, message level (page 4-44), program module,
function, and event number.
Console#show logging trap
Syslog logging: Enable
REMOTELOG status: disable
REMOTELOG facility type: local use 7
REMOTELOG level type: Debugging messages
REMOTELOG server IP address: 1.2.3.4
Console#
Table 4-20 show logging trap - display description
Field Description
Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command.
REMOTELOG status Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging trap command.
REMOTELOG
facility type
The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as specified in the logging
facility command.
REMOTELOG level type The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote server as specified in
the logging trap command.
REMOTELOG
server IP address
The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host command.

4-49
4
Example
The following example shows sample messages stored in RAM.
SMTP Alert Commands
These commands configure SMTP event handling, and forwarding of alert
messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients.
logging sendmail host
This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages. Use the no
form to remove an SMTP server.
Syntax
[no] logging sendmail host ip_address
ip_address - IP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert
messages for event handling.
Default Setting
None
Console#show log ram
[5] 00:01:06 2001-01-01
"STA root change notification."
[4] 00:01:00 2001-01-01
[3] 00:00:54 2001-01-01
[2] 00:00:50 2001-01-01
"STA topology change notification."
[1] 00:00:48 2001-01-01
"VLAN 1 link-up notification."
Console#
Table 4-21 SMTP Alert Commands
logging sendmail host SMTP servers to receive alert messages GC 4-49
logging sendmail level Severity threshold used to trigger alert messages GC 4-50
logging sendmail
source-email
Email address used for “From” field of alert messages GC 4-51
logging sendmail
destination-email
Email recipients of alert messages GC 4-51
logging sendmail Enables SMTP event handling GC 4-52
show logging sendmail Displays SMTP event handler settings NE, PE 4-52

4-50
4
Command Mode
Command Usage
• You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing. However, you
must enter a separate command to specify each server.
• To send email alerts, the switch first opens a connection, sends all the email
alerts waiting in the queue one by one, and finally closes the connection.
• To open a connection, the switch first selects the server that successfully sent
mail during the last connection, or the first server configured by this command.
If it fails to send mail, the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to
send mail again. If it still fails, the system will repeat the process at a periodic
interval. (A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a
connection.)
Example
logging sendmail level
This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages.
Syntax
logging sendmail level level
level - One of the system message levels (page 4-44). Messages sent
include the selected level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7; Default: 7)
Default Setting
Level 7
Command Mode
Command Usage
The specified level indicates an event threshold. All events at this level or
higher will be sent to the configured email recipients. (For example, using
Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0.)
Example
This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 4 through 0.
Console(config)#logging sendmail host 192.168.1.200
Console(config)#
Console(config)#logging sendmail level 4
Console(config)#

4-51
4
logging sendmail source-email
This command sets the email address used for the “From” field in alert messages.
Use the no form to delete the source email address.
Syntax
[no] logging sendmail source-email email-address
email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.
(Range: 0-41 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch, or the
address of an administrator responsible for the switch.
Example
This example will set the source email john@acme.com.
logging sendmail destination-email
This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages. Use the no form to
remove a recipient.
Syntax
[no] logging sendmail destination-email email-address
email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.
(Range: 1-41 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages. However, you must
enter a separate command to specify each recipient.
Example
Console(config)#logging sendmail source-email john@acme.com
Console(config)#
Console(config)#logging sendmail destination-email ted@this-company.com
Console(config)#

4-52
4
logging sendmail
This command enables SMTP event handling. Use the no form to disable this
function.
Syntax
[no] logging sendmail
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Example
show logging sendmail
This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler.
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#logging sendmail
Console(config)#
Console#show logging sendmail
SMTP servers
-----------------------------------------------
1. 192.168.1.200
SMTP minimum severity level: 4
SMTP destination email addresses
-----------------------------------------------
1. geoff@acme.com
SMTP source email address: john@acme.com
SMTP status: Enabled
Console#

4-53
4
Time Commands
The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers
(NTP or SNTP). Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log
to record meaningful dates and times for event entries. If the clock is not set, the
switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup.
sntp client
This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or
SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command. Use the no form to
disable SNTP client requests.
Syntax
[no] sntp client
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
• The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and
times for log events. Without SNTP, the switch only records the time starting
from the factory default set at the last bootup (i.e., 00:00:00, Jan. 1, 2001).
• This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the
sntp servers command. It issues time synchronization requests based on the
interval set via the sntp poll command.
Table 4-22 Time Commands
sntp client Accepts time from specified time servers GC 4-53
sntp server Specifies one or more time servers GC 4-54
sntp poll Sets the interval at which the client polls for time GC 4-55
show sntp Shows current SNTP configuration settings NE, PE 4-55
clock timezone Sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock GC 4-56
calendar set Sets the system date and time PE 4-56
show calendar Displays the current date and time setting NE, PE 4-57

4-54
4
Example
Related Commands
sntp server (4-54)
sntp poll (4-55)
show sntp (4-55)
sntp server
This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are
issued. Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the
current list.
Syntax
sntp server [ip1 [ip2 [ip3]]]
ip - IP address of a time server (NTP or SNTP).
(Range: 1-3 addresses)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time
updates when set to SNTP client mode. The client will poll the time servers in
the order specified until a response is received. It issues time synchronization
requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command.
Example
Related Commands
sntp client (4-53)
sntp poll (4-55)
show sntp (4-55)
Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19
Console(config)#sntp poll 60
Console(config)#sntp client
Console(config)#end
Console#show sntp
Current time: Dec 23 02:52:44 2002
Poll interval: 60
SNTP status: Enabled
SNTP server: 10.1.0.19 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Console#
Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19

4-55
4
sntp poll
This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is
set to SNTP client mode. Use the no form to restore to the default.
Syntax
sntp poll seconds
no sntp poll
seconds - Interval between time requests. (Range: 16-16384 seconds)
Default Setting
16 seconds
Command Mode
Example
Related Commands
sntp client (4-53)
show sntp
This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP
client, and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated.
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command displays the current time, the poll interval used for sending
time synchronization requests, and the current SNTP mode (i.e., unicast).
Example
Console(config)#sntp poll 60
Console(config)#
Console#show sntp
Current time: Dec 23 05:13:28 2002
Poll interval: 16
SNTP status : Enabled
SNTP server 137.92.140.80 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Console#

4-56
4
clock timezone
This command sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock.
Syntax
clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes {before-utc | after-utc}
• name - Name of timezone, usually an acronym. (Range: 1-29 characters)
• hours - Number of hours before/after UTC. (Range: 0-12 hours)
• minutes - Number of minutes before/after UTC. (Range: 0-59 minutes)
• before-utc - Sets the local time zone before (east) of UTC.
• after-utc - Sets the local time zone after (west) of UTC.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal
Time (UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT), based on the earth’s
prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to
your local time, you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time
zone is east (before) or west (after) of UTC.
Example
Related Commands
show sntp (4-55)
calendar set
This command sets the system clock. It may be used if there is no time server on
your network, or if you have not configured the switch to receive signals from a time
server.
Syntax
calendar set hour min sec {day month year | month day year}
• hour - Hour in 24-hour format. (Range: 0-23)
• min - Minute. (Range: 0-59)
• sec - Second. (Range: 0-59)
• day - Day of month. (Range: 1-31)
• month - january | february | march | april | may | june | july | august |
september | october | november | december
• year - Year (4-digit). (Range: 2001-2100)
Console(config)#clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after-UTC
Console(config)#

4-57
4
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example shows how to set the system clock to 15:12:34, April 1st, 2004.
show calendar
This command displays the system clock.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Example
System Status Commands
light unit
This command displays the unit ID of a switch using its front-panel LED indicators.
Syntax
light unit [unit]
unit - specifies a unit in a switch stack to light the panel LEDs
Console#calendar set 15 12 34 1 April 2004
Console#
Console#show calendar
15:12:43 April 1 2004
Console#
Table 4-23 System Status Commands
light unit Displays the unit ID of a switch using its front-panel LED
indicators
NE, PE 4-57
show startup-config Displays the contents of the configuration file (stored in flash
memory) that is used to start up the system
PE 4-58
show running-config Displays the configuration data currently in use PE 4-60
show system Displays system information NE, PE 4-62
show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user
name, idle time, and IP address of Telnet clients
NE, PE 4-62
show version Displays version information for the system NE, PE 4-63

4-58
4
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
The unit ID is displayed using the port status LED indicators for ports 1 to 8.
When the light unit command is entered, the LED corresponding to the
switch’s ID will flash for about 15 seconds.
Example
show startup-config
This command displays the configuration file stored in non-volatile memory that is
used to start up the system.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• Use this command in conjunction with the show running-config command to
compare the information in running memory to the information stored in
non-volatile memory.
• This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode group
is separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration mode command,
and corresponding commands. This command displays the following
information:
- SNMP community strings
- Users (names and access levels)
- VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)
- VLAN configuration settings for each interface
- IP address configured for the switch
- Spanning tree settings
- Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet
Console#light unit 1
Console#

4-59
4
Example
Related Commands
show running-config (4-60)
Console#show startup-config
building startup-config, please wait.....
!
!
username admin access-level 15
username admin password 0 admin
!
username guest access-level 0
username guest password 0 guest
!
enable password level 15 0 super
!
snmp-server community public ro
snmp-server community private rw
!
logging history ram 6
logging history flash 3
!
vlan database
vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active
!
interface ethernet 1/1
switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged
switchport native vlan 1
.
.
.
interface vlan 1
ip address dhcp
!
line console
!
line vty
!
end
Console#

4-60
4
show running-config
This command displays the configuration information currently in use.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• Use this command in conjunction with the show startup-config command to
compare the information in running memory to the information stored in
non-volatile memory.
• This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode group
is separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration mode command,
and corresponding commands. This command displays the following
information:
- MAC address for each switch in the stack
- SNTP server settings
- Local time zone
- SNMP community strings
- Users (names, access levels, and encrypted passwords)
- Event log settings
- VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)
- VLAN configuration settings for each interface
- IP address configured for the switch
- Layer 4 precedence settings
- Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet

4-61
4
Example
Related Commands
show startup-config (4-58)
Console#show running-config
building startup-config, please wait.....
!
phymap 00-30-f1-ce-2a-20 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00
00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00
00-00-00-00-00-00
!
SNTP server 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
!
clock timezone hours 0 minute 0 after-UTC
!
!
SNMP-server community private rw
SNMP-server community public ro
!
!
username admin access-level 15
username admin password 7 21232f297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3
username guest access-level 0
username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4
enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1f783eddf27d254ca
!
!
logging history ram 6
logging history flash 3
!
!
vlan database
vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active
!
!
interface ethernet 1/1
switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged
switchport native vlan 1
.
.
.
interface VLAN 1
IP address DHCP
!
no map IP precedence
no map IP DSCP
!
!
line console
!
line vty
!
end
Console#

4-62
4
show system
This command displays system information.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
• For a description of the items shown by this command, refer to “Displaying
System Information” on page 3-8.
• The POST results should all display “PASS.” If any POST test indicates
“FAIL,” contact your distributor for assistance.
Example
show users
Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user name, idle time, and IP
address of Telnet client.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Console#show system
System description: 24FE Stackable Intelligent Switch
System OID string: 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.61
System information
System Up time: 0 days, 0 hours, 0 minutes, and 7.18 seconds
System Name: [NONE]
System Location: [NONE]
System Contact: [NONE]
MAC address: 5A-A5-AA-55-44-32
Web server: enabled
Web server port: 80
Web secure server: enabled
Web secure server port: 443
Telnet server : enable
Telnet port : 23
Jumbo Frame : Disabled
POST result
POST result
UART LOOP BACK Test..........PASS
DRAM Test....................PASS
Timer Test...................PASS
PCI Device 1 Test............PASS
PCI Device 2 Test............PASS
Switch Int Loopback test.....PASS
Done All Pass.
Console#

4-63
4
Command Usage
The session used to execute this command is indicated by a “*” symbol next to
the Line (i.e., session) index number.
Example
show version
This command displays hardware and software version information for the system.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
See “Displaying Switch Hardware/Software Versions” on page 3-9 for detailed
information on the items displayed by this command.
Console#show users
Username accounts:
Username Privilege Public-Key
-------- --------- ----------
admin 15 None
guest 0 None
steve 15 RSA
Online users:
Line Username Idle time (h:m:s) Remote IP addr.
----------- -------- ----------------- ---------------
0 console admin 0:14:14
* 1 VTY 0 admin 0:00:00 192.168.1.19
2 SSH 1 steve 0:00:06 192.168.1.19
Web online users:
Line Remote IP addr Username Idle time (h:m:s).
----------- -------------- -------- ------------------
1 HTTP 192.168.1.19 admin 0:00:00
Console#

4-64
4
Example
Frame Size Commands
jumbo frame
This command enables support for jumbo frames. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] jumbo frame
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
• This switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data
transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes. Compared to
standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1.5 KB, using jumbo frames
significantly reduces the per-packet overhead required to process protocol
encapsulation fields.
• To use jumbo frames, both the source and destination end nodes (such as a
computer or server) must support this feature. Also, when the connection is
operating at full duplex, all switches in the network between the two end nodes
must be able to accept the extended frame size. And for half-duplex
connections, all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo
frames.
• Enabling jumbo frames will limit the maximum threshold for broadcast storm
control to 64 packets per second. (See the switchport broadcast command
on page 4-114.)
Console#show version
Unit1
Serial number :A322043872
Hardware version :R0A
Module A type :Combo 1000BaseT SFP
Module B type :Combo 1000BaseT SFP
Number of ports :26
Main power status :up
Redundant power status :not present
Agent(master)
Loader version: 2.2.1.1
Boot ROM version: 2.2.1.2
Operation code version: 2.2.5.3
Console#
Table 4-24 Frame Size Commands
jumbo frame Enables support for jumbo frames GC 4-64

Flash/File Commands
4-65
4
• The current setting for jumbo frames can be displayed with the show system
command (page 4-62).
Example
Flash/File Commands
These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files.
copy
This command moves (upload/download) a code image or configuration file
between the switch’s flash memory and a TFTP server. When you save the system
code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server, that file can later be
downloaded to the switch to restore system operation. The success of the file
transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the
network connection.
Syntax
copy file {file | running-config | startup-config | tftp | unit}
copy running-config {file | startup-config | tftp}
copy startup-config {file | running-config | tftp}
copy tftp {file | running-config | startup-config | https-certificate |
public-key}
copy unit file
• file - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a file.
• running-config - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from the current
running configuration.
• startup-config - The configuration used for system initialization.
• tftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a TFTP server.
• https-certificate - Copies an HTTPS certificate from an TFTP server to the
switch.
Console(config)#jumbo frame
Console(config)#
Table 4-25 Flash/File Commands
copy Copies a code image or a switch configuration to or from flash
memory or a TFTP server
PE 4-65
delete Deletes a file or code image PE 4-68
dir Displays a list of files in flash memory PE 4-68
whichboot Displays the files booted PE 4-69
boot system Specifies the file or image used to start up the system GC 4-70

4-66
4
• public-key - Keyword that allows you to copy a SSH key from a TFTP
server. (“Secure Shell Commands” on page 4-34)
• unit - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a unit.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command.
• The destination file name should not contain slashes ( or /), the leading letter
of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file
names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the
switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)
• Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the switch supports only two
operation code files.
• The maximum number of user-defined configuration files depends on
available memory.
• You can use “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” as the source to copy from the
factory default configuration file, but you cannot use it as the destination.
• To replace the startup configuration, you must use startup-config as the
destination.
• Use the copy file unit command to copy a local file to another switch in the
stack. Use the copy unit file command to copy a file from another switch in
the stack.
• The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP
server. You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new firmware,
or contact your distributor for help.
• For information on specifying an https-certificate, see “Replacing the Default
Secure-site Certificate” on page 3-41. For information on configuring the
switch to use HTTPS for a secure connection, see “ip http secure-server” on
page 4-31.
Example
The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on
the TFTP server:
Console#copy file tftp
Choose file type:
1. config: 2. opcode: <1-2>: 1
Source file name: startup
Destination file name: startup.01
TFTP completed.
Success.
Console#

Flash/File Commands
4-67
4
The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file.
The following example shows how to download a configuration file:
This example shows how to copy a secure-site certificate from an TFTP server. It
then reboots the switch to activate the certificate:
This example shows how to copy a public-key used by SSH from a TFTP server.
Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for users configured
locally on the switch:
Console#copy running-config file
destination file name: startup
Success.
Console#
Console#copy tftp startup-config
Source configuration file name: startup.01
Startup configuration file name [startup]:
Success.
Console#
Console#copy tftp https-certificate
Source certificate file name: SS-certificate
Source private file name: SS-private
Private password: ********
Success.
Console#reload
Console#copy tftp public-key
TFTP server IP address: 192.168.1.19
Choose public key type:
1. RSA: 2. DSA: <1-2>: 1
Source file name: steve.pub
Username: steve
TFTP Download
Success.
Success.
Console#

4-68
4
delete
This command deletes a file or image.
Syntax
delete [unit:] filename
filename - Name of the configuration file or image name.
unit - Stack unit. (Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• If the file type is used for system startup, then this file cannot be deleted.
• “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” cannot be deleted.
• A colon (:) is required after the specified unit number.
Example
This example shows how to delete the test2.cfg configuration file from flash memory
for unit 1.
Related Commands
dir (4-68)
delete public-key (4-38)
dir
This command displays a list of files in flash memory.
Syntax
dir [unit:] {{boot-rom: | config: | opcode:} [:filename]}
The type of file or image to display includes:
• boot-rom - Boot ROM (or diagnostic) image file.
• config - Switch configuration file.
• opcode - Run-time operation code image file.
• filename - Name of the configuration file or code image.
• unit - Stack unit. (Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console#delete 1:test2.cfg
Console#

Flash/File Commands
4-69
4
Command Usage
• If you enter the command dir without any parameters, the system displays all
files.
• A colon (:) is required after the specified unit number.
• File information is shown below:
Example
The following example shows how to display all file information:
whichboot
This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up.
Syntax
whichboot [unit]
unit - Stack unit. (Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Table 4-26 File Directory Information
Column Heading Description
file name The name of the file.
file type File types: Boot-Rom, Operation Code, and Config file.
startup Shows if this file is used when the system is started.
size The length of the file in bytes.
Console#dir 1:
file name file type startup size (byte)
----------------------------------- -------------- ------- -------------
Unit1:
YAD2212.bix Boot-Rom image Y 169908
V2.2.6.0.bix Operation Code Y 1751624
Factory_Default_Config.cfg Config File Y 5013
IP103 Config File N 3597
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total free space: 5111808
Console#

4-70
4
Example
This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command. See
the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by
this command.
boot system
This command specifies the image used to start up the system.
Syntax
boot system [unit:] {boot-rom| config | opcode}: filename
The type of file or image to set as a default includes:
• boot-rom* - Boot ROM.
• config* - Configuration file.
• opcode* - Run-time operation code.
• filename - Name of the configuration file or code image.
• unit* - Specifies the unit number.
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
* The colon (:) is required.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
• A colon (:) is required after the specified unit number and file type.
• If the file contains an error, it cannot be set as the default file.
Example
Related Commands
dir (4-68)
whichboot (4-69)
Console#whichboot
file name file type startup size (byte)
----------------- -------------- ------- -----------
Unit1:
YAD2212.bix Boot-Rom image Y 169908
V2.2.6.0.bix Operation Code Y 1751624
Factory_Default_Config.cfg Config File Y 5013
Console#
Console(config)#boot system config: startup
Console(config)#

Authentication Commands
4-71
4
You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for
management access using local or RADIUS authentication methods. You can also
enable port-based authentication for network client access using IEEE 802.1X.
Authentication Sequence
authentication login
This command defines the login authentication method and precedence. Use the no
form to restore the default.
Syntax
authentication login {[local] [radius] [tacacs]}
no authentication login
• local - Use local password.
• radius - Use RADIUS server password.
• tacacs - Use TACACS server password.
Default Setting
Local
Command Mode
Command Usage
• RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort
delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that
RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the
client to the server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.
Table 4-27 Authentication Commands
Command Group Function Page
Authentication Sequence Defines logon authentication method and precedence 4-71
RADIUS Client Configures settings for authentication via a RADIUS server 4-73
TACACS+ Client Configures settings for authentication via a TACACS+ server 4-76
Port Security Configures secure addresses for a port 4-79
Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802.1X 4-81
Table 4-28 Authentication Sequence
authentication login Defines logon authentication method and precedence GC 4-71
authentication enable Defines the authentication method and precedence for
command mode change
GC 4-72

4-72
4
• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level
for each user name and password pair. The user name, password, and
privilege level must be configured on the authentication server.
• You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate
the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter “authentication login
radius tacacs local,” the user name and password on the RADIUS server is
verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is
attempted on the TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server is not available,
the local user name and password is checked.
Example
Related Commands
username - for setting the local user names and passwords (4-26)
authentication enable
This command defines the authentication method and precedence to use when
changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command mode with the
enable command (see page 4-19). Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
authentication enable {[local] [radius] [tacacs]}
no authentication enable
• local - Use local password only.
• radius - Use RADIUS server password only.
• tacacs - Use TACACS server password.
Default Setting
Local
Command Mode
Command Usage
• RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort
delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that
RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the
client to the server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.
• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level
for each user name and password pair. The user name, password, and
privilege level must be configured on the authentication server.
• You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate
the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter “authentication
enable radius tacacs local,” the user name and password on the RADIUS
server is verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then
Console(config)#authentication login radius
Console(config)#

4-73
4
authentication is attempted on the TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server
is not available, the local user name and password is checked.
Example
Related Commands
enable password - sets the password for changing command modes (4-27)
RADIUS Client
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is a logon authentication
protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to
RADIUS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a
database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels for
each user or group that require management access to a switch.
radius-server host
This command specifies primary and backup RADIUS servers and authentication
parameters that apply to each server. Use the no form to restore the default values.
Syntax
[no] radius-server index host {host_ip_address | host_alias}
[auth-port auth_port] [timeout timeout] [retransmit retransmit] [key key]
• index - Allows you to specify up to five servers. These servers are queried
in sequence until a server responds or the retransmit period expires.
• host_ip_address - IP address of server.
• host_alias - Symbolic name of server. (Maximum length: 20 characters)
• port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages.
(Range: 1-65535)
• timeout - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending
a request. (Range: 1-65535)
Console(config)#authentication enable radius
Console(config)#
Table 4-29 RADIUS Client Commands
radius-server host Specifies the RADIUS server GC 4-74
radius-server port Sets the RADIUS server network port GC 4-74
radius-server key Sets the RADIUS encryption key GC 4-74
radius-server retransmit Sets the number of retries GC 4-75
radius-server timeout Sets the interval between sending authentication requests GC 4-75
show radius-server Shows the current RADIUS settings PE 4-76

4-74
4
• retransmit - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access
via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1-30)
• key - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do not
use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)
Default Setting
• auth-port - 1812
• timeout - 5 seconds
• retransmit - 2
Command Mode
Example
radius-server port
This command sets the RADIUS server network port. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
radius-server port port_number
no radius-server port
port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication
messages. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
1812
Command Mode
Example
radius-server key
This command sets the RADIUS encryption key. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
radius-server key key_string
no radius-server key
key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client.
Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)
Console(config)#radius-server 1 host 192.168.1.20 auth-port 181 timeout
10 retransmit 5 key green
Console(config)#
Console(config)#radius-server port 181
Console(config)#

4-75
4
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Example
radius-server retransmit
This command sets the number of retries. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
radius-server retransmit number_of_retries
no radius-server retransmit
number_of_retries - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate
logon access via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1-30)
Default Setting
2
Command Mode
Example
radius-server timeout
This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the
RADIUS server. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
radius-server timeout number_of_seconds
no radius-server timeout
number_of_seconds - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply
before resending a request. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
5
Command Mode
Console(config)#radius-server key green
Console(config)#
Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5
Console(config)#

4-76
4
Example
show radius-server
This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
TACACS+ Client
Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS+) is a logon
authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control
access to TACACS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server
contains a database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege
levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch.
Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10
Console(config)#
Console#show radius-server
Remote RADIUS server configuration:
Global settings
Communication key with RADIUS server:
Retransmit times: 2
Request timeout: 5
Sever 1:
Retransmit times: 2
Request timeout: 5
Console#
Table 4-30 TACACS Commands
tacacs-server host Specifies the TACACS+ server GC 4-77
tacacs-server port Specifies the TACACS+ server network port GC 4-77
tacacs-server key Sets the TACACS+ encryption key GC 4-78
show tacacs-server Shows the current TACACS+ settings GC 4-78

4-77
4
tacacs-server host
This command specifies the TACACS+ server. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
tacacs-server host host_ip_address
no tacacs-server host
host_ip_address - IP address of a TACACS+ server.
Default Setting
10.11.12.13
Command Mode
Example
tacacs-server port
This command specifies the TACACS+ server network port. Use the no form to
restore the default.
Syntax
tacacs-server port port_number
no tacacs-server port
port_number - TACACS+ server TCP port used for authentication
Default Setting
49
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#tacacs-server host 192.168.1.25
Console(config)#
Console(config)#tacacs-server port 181
Console(config)#

4-78
4
tacacs-server key
This command sets the TACACS+ encryption key. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
tacacs-server key key_string
no tacacs-server key
key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the
client. Do not use blank spaces in the string.
(Maximum length: 20 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Example
show tacacs-server
This command displays the current settings for the TACACS+ server.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config)#tacacs-server key green
Console(config)#
Console#show tacacs-server
Remote TACACS server configuration:
Communication key with TACACS server: *****
Console#

4-79
4
Port Security Commands
These commands can be used to enable port security on a port. When using port
security, the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it
has reached a configured maximum number. Only incoming traffic with source
addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table for this port will be
authorized to access the network. The port will drop any incoming frames with a
source MAC address that is unknown or has been previously learned from another
port. If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port,
the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by
disabling the port and sending a trap message.
port security
This command enables or configures port security. Use the no form without any
keywords to disable port security. Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to
restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum
number of allowed addresses.
Syntax
port security [action {shutdown | trap | trap-and-shutdown}
| max-mac-count address-count]
no port security [action | max-mac-count]
• action - Response to take when port security is violated.
- shutdown - Disable port only.
- trap - Issue SNMP trap message only.
- trap-and-shutdown - Issue SNMP trap message and disable port.
• max-mac-count
- address-count - The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be
learned on a port. (Range: 0-1024)
Default Setting
• Status: Disabled
• Action: None
• Maximum Addresses: 0
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Table 4-31 Port Security Commands
port security Configures a secure port IC 4-79
mac-address-table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC 4-134
show mac-address-table Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding database PE 4-135

4-80
4
Command Usage
• If you enable port security, the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on
the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number. Only
incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static
address table will be accepted.
• First use the port security max-mac-count command to set the number of
addresses, and then use the port security command to enable security on the
port.
• Use the no port security max-mac-count command to disable port security
and reset the maximum number of addresses to the default.
• You can also manually add secure addresses with the mac-address-table
static command.
• A secure port has the following restrictions:
- Cannot use port monitoring.
- Cannot be a multi-VLAN port.
- Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device.
- Cannot be a trunk port.
• If a port is disabled due to a security violation, it must be manually re-enabled
using the no shutdown command.
Example
The following example enables port security for port 5, and sets the response to a
security violation to issue a trap message:
Related Commands
shutdown (4-113)
mac-address-table static (4-134)
show mac-address-table (4-135)
Console(config-if)#port security action trap

4-81
4
802.1X Port Authentication
The switch supports IEEE 802.1X (dot1x) port-based access control that prevents
unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for
authentication. Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server
using EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol).
dot1x system-auth-control
This command enables 802.1X port authentication globally on the switch. Use the
no form to restore the default.
Syntax
[no] system-auth-control
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Example
Table 4-32 802.1X Port Authentication
dot1x system-auth-control Enables dot1x globally on the switch. GC 4-81
dot1x default Resets all dot1x parameters to their default values GC 4-82
dot1x max-req Sets the maximum number of times that the switch
retransmits an EAP request/identity packet to the client
before it times out the authentication session
IC 4-82
dot1x port-control Sets dot1x mode for a port interface IC 4-82
dot1x operation-mode Allows single or multiple hosts on an dot1x port IC 4-83
dot1x re-authenticate Forces re-authentication on specific ports PE 4-84
dot1x re-authentication Enables re-authentication for all ports IC 4-84
dot1x timeout quiet-period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max
Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to
acquire a new client
IC 4-84
dot1x timeout re-authperiod Sets the time period after which a connected client must
be re-authenticated
IC 4-85
dot1x timeout tx-period Sets the time period during an authentication session that
the switch waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet
IC 4-85
show dot1x Shows all dot1x related information PE 4-86
Console(config)#dot1x system-auth-control
Console(config)#

4-82
4
dot1x default
This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default
values.
Command Mode
Example
dot1x max-req
This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an
EAP request/identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication
session. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
dot1x max-req count
no dot1x max-req
count – The maximum number of requests (Range: 1-10)
Default
2
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
dot1x port-control
This command sets the dot1x mode on a port interface. Use the no form to restore
the default.
Syntax
dot1x port-control {auto | force-authorized | force-unauthorized}
no dot1x port-control
• auto – Requires a dot1x-aware connected client to be authorized by the
RADIUS server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied access.
• force-authorized – Configures the port to grant access to all clients, either
dot1x-aware or otherwise.
• force-unauthorized – Configures the port to deny access to all clients,
either dot1x-aware or otherwise.
Console(config)#dot1x default
Console(config)#
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x max-req 2
Console(config-if)#

4-83
4
Default
force-authorized
Command Mode
Example
dot1x operation-mode
This command allows single or multiple hosts (clients) to connect to an
802.1X-authorized port. Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to
single host. Use the no form with the multi-host max-count keywords to restore the
default maximum count.
Syntax
dot1x operation-mode {single-host | multi-host [max-count count]}
no dot1x operation-mode [multi-host max-count]
• single-host – Allows only a single host to connect to this port.
• multi-host – Allows multiple host to connect to this port.
• max-count – Keyword for the maximum number of hosts.
- count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port.
(Range: 1-1024; Default: 5)
Default
Single-host
Command Mode
Command Usage
• The “max-count” parameter specified by this command is only effective if the
dot1x mode is set to “auto” by the dot1x port-control command (page 4-82).
• In “multi-host” mode, only one host connected to a port needs to pass
authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access. Similarly, a
port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached host fails
re-authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message.
Example
Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto
Console(config-if)#
Console(config-if)#dot1x operation-mode multi-host max-count 10
Console(config-if)#

4-84
4
dot1x re-authenticate
This command forces re-authentication on all ports or a specific interface.
Syntax
dot1x re-authenticate [interface]
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit.
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/50)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
dot1x re-authentication
This command enables periodic re-authentication globally for all ports. Use the no
form to disable re-authentication.
Syntax
[no] dot1x re-authentication
Command Mode
Example
dot1x timeout quiet-period
This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count
has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client. Use the no form to
reset the default.
Syntax
dot1x timeout quiet-period seconds
no dot1x timeout quiet-period
seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)
Default
60 seconds
Console#dot1x re-authenticate
Console#
Console(config-if)#dot1x re-authentication
Console(config-if)#

4-85
4
Command Mode
Example
dot1x timeout re-authperiod
This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be
re-authenticated.
Syntax
dot1x timeout re-authperiod seconds
no dot1x timeout re-authperiod
Default
3600 seconds
Command Mode
Example
dot1x timeout tx-period
This command sets the time that an interface on the switch waits during an
authentication session before re-transmitting an EAP packet. Use the no form to
reset to the default value.
Syntax
dot1x timeout tx-period seconds
no dot1x timeout tx-period
Default
30 seconds
Command Mode
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 350
Console(config-if)#
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout re-authperiod 300
Console(config-if)#

4-86
4
Example
show dot1x
This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or a
specific interface.
Syntax
show dot1x [statistics] [interface interface]
• statistics - Displays dot1x status for each port.
• interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command displays the following information:
• Global 802.1X Parameters – Shows whether or not 802.1X port
authentication is globally enabled on the switch.
• 802.1X Port Summary – Displays the port access control parameters for
each interface, including the following items:
- Status – Administrative state for port access control.
- Operation Mode – Dot1x port control operation mode (page 4-83).
- Mode – Dot1x port control mode (page 4-82).
- Authorized – Authorization status (yes or n/a - not authorized).
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout tx-period 300
Console(config-if)#

4-87
4
• 802.1X Port Details – Displays the port access control parameters for each
interface, including the following items:
- reauth-enabled – Periodic re-authentication (page 4-84).
- reauth-period – Time after which a connected client must be
re-authenticated (page 4-85).
- quiet-period – Time a port waits after Max Request Count is
exceeded before attempting to acquire a new
client (page 4-84).
- tx-period – Time a port waits during authentication session
before re-transmitting EAP packet (page 4-85).
- supplicant-timeout – Supplicant timeout.
- server-timeout – Server timeout.
- reauth-max – Maximum number of reauthentication attempts.
- max-req – Maximum number of times a port will retransmit
an EAP request/identity packet to the client
before it times out the authentication session
(page 4-82).
- Status – Authorization status (authorized or not).
- Operation Mode – Shows if single or multiple hosts (clients) can
connect to an 802.1X-authorized port.
- Max Count – The maximum number of hosts allowed to
access this port (page 4-83).
- Port-control – Shows the dot1x mode on a port as auto,
force-authorized, or force-unauthorized
(page 4-82).
- Supplicant – MAC address of authorized client.
- Current Identifier – The integer (0-255) used by the Authenticator to
identify the current authentication session.
• Authenticator State Machine
- State – Current state (including initialize, disconnected,
connecting, authenticating, authenticated, aborting,
held, force_authorized, force_unauthorized).
- Reauth Count – Number of times connecting state is re-entered.
• Backend State Machine
- State – Current state (including request, response,
success, fail, timeout, idle, initialize).
- Request Count – Number of EAP Request packets sent to the
Supplicant without receiving a response.
- Identifier(Server) – Identifier carried in the most recent EAP Success,
Failure or Request packet received from the
Authentication Server.
• Reauthentication State Machine
- State – Current state (including initialize, reauthenticate).

4-88
4
Example
Console#show dot1x
802.1X Port Summary
1/2 enabled Single-Host auto yes...
802.1X Port Details
802.1X is enabled on port 1/2
reauth-enabled: Enable
reauth-period: 1800
quiet-period: 30
tx-period: 40
supplicant-timeout: 30
server-timeout: 10
reauth-max: 2
max-req: 5
Status Authorized
Operation mode Single-Host
Max count 5
Port-control Auto
Supplicant 00-00-e8-49-5e-dc
Current Identifier 3
Authenticator State Machine
State Authenticated
Reauth Count 0
Backend State Machine
State Idle
Request Count 0
Identifier(Server) 2
Reauthentication State Machine
State Initialize...802.1X is disabled on port 1/26
Console#

Access Control List Commands
4-89
4
Access Control Lists (ACL) provide packet filtering for IP frames (based on address,
protocol, Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code) or any frames (based
on MAC address or Ethernet type). To filter packets, first create an access list, add
the required rules and then bind the list to a specific port.
An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses,
MAC addresses, or other more specific criteria. This switch tests ingress or egress
packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one. A packet will be accepted as
soon as it matches a permit rule, or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule. If no
rules match for a list of all permit rules, the packet is dropped; and if no rules match
for a list of all deny rules, the packet is accepted.
There are three filtering modes:
• Standard IP ACL mode (STD-ACL) filters packets based on the source IP address.
• Extended IP ACL mode (EXT-ACL) filters packets based on source or destination
IP address, as well as protocol type and protocol port number. If the TCP protocol
is specified, then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code.
• MAC ACL mode (MAC-ACL) filters packets based on the source or destination
MAC address and the Ethernet frame type (RFC 1060).
The following restrictions apply to ACLs:
• Each ACL can have up to 32 rules.
• The maximum number of ACLs is 88.
• However, due to resource restrictions, the average number of rules bound the
ports should not exceed 20.
• This switch supports ACLs for ingress filtering only. You can only bind one IP ACL
to any port and one MAC ACL globally for ingress filtering. In other words, only two
ACLs can be bound to an interface - Ingress IP ACL and Ingress MAC ACL.
The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows:
1. User-defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.
2. User-defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.
3. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.
4. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.
5. If no explicit rule is matched, the implicit default is permit all.

4-90
4
IP ACLs
access-list ip
This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or
extended IP ACLs. Use the no form to remove the specified ACL.
Syntax
[no] access-list ip {standard | extended} acl_name
• standard – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP
address.
• extended – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or
destination IP address, and other more specific criteria.
• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Table 4-33 Access Control Lists
Command Groups Function Page
IP ACLs Configures ACLs based on IP addresses, TCP/UDP port number,
protocol type, and TCP control code
4-90
MAC ACLs Configures ACLs based on hardware addresses, packet format, and
Ethernet type
4-97
ACL Information Displays ACLs and associated rules; shows ACLs assigned to each port 4-102
Table 4-34 IP ACLs
access-list ip Creates an IP ACL and enters configuration mode GC 4-90
permit, deny Filters packets matching a specified source IP address STD-ACL 4-91
permit, deny Filters packets meeting the specified criteria, including
source and destination IP address, TCP/UDP port number,
protocol type, and TCP control code
EXT-ACL 4-92
show ip access-list Displays the rules for configured IP ACLs PE 4-94
ip access-group Adds a port to an IP ACL IC 4-94
show ip access-group Shows port assignments for IP ACLs PE 4-94
map access-list ip Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for
packets matching an ACL rule
IC 4-95
show map access-list ip Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface PE 4-96

4-91
4
Command Usage
• When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL,
use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list.
To create an ACL, you must add at least one rule to the list.
• To remove a rule, use the no permit or no deny command followed by the
exact text of a previously configured rule.
• An ACL can contain up to 32 rules.
Example
Related Commands
permit, deny 4-91
ip access-group (4-94)
show ip access-list (4-94)
permit, deny (Standard ACL)
This command adds a rule to a Standard IP ACL. The rule sets a filter condition for
packets emanating from the specified source. Use the no form to remove a rule.
Syntax
[no] {permit | deny} {any | source bitmask | host source}
• any – Any source IP address.
• source – Source IP address.
• bitmask – Decimal number representing the address bits to match.
• host – Keyword followed by a specific IP address.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Standard ACL
Command Usage
• New rules are appended to the end of the list.
• Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask, containing four integers from
0 to 255, each separated by a period. The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate
“match” and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the
specified source IP address, and then compared with the address for each IP
packet entering the port(s) to which this ACL has been assigned.
Console(config)#access-list ip standard david

4-92
4
Example
This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10.1.1.21 and
another rule for the address range 168.92.16.x – 168.92.31.x using a bitmask.
Related Commands
access-list ip (4-90)
permit, deny (Extended ACL)
This command adds a rule to an Extended IP ACL. The rule sets a filter condition for
packets with specific source or destination IP addresses, protocol types, source or
destination protocol ports, or TCP control codes. Use the no form to remove a rule.
Syntax
[no] {permit | deny} [protocol-number | udp]
{any | source address-bitmask | host source}
{any | destination address-bitmask | host destination}
[precedence precedence] [tos tos] [dscp dscp]
[source-port sport [end]] [destination-port dport [end]]
[no] {permit | deny} tcp
{any | source address-bitmask | host source}
{any | destination address-bitmask | host destination}
[precedence precedence] [tos tos] [dscp dscp]
[source-port sport [end]] [destination-port dport [end]]
[control-flag control-flags flag-bitmask]
• protocol-number – A specific protocol number. (Range: 0-255)
• source – Source IP address.
• destination – Destination IP address.
• address-bitmask – Decimal number representing the address bits to match.
• host – Keyword followed by a specific IP address.
• precedence – IP precedence level. (Range: 0-7)
• tos – Type of Service level. (Range: 0-15)
• dscp – DSCP priority level. (Range: 0-63)
• sport – Protocol17 source port number. (Range: 0-65535)
• dport – Protocol17 destination port number. (Range: 0-65535)
• end – Upper bound of the protocol port range. (Range: 0-65535)
• control-flags – Decimal number (representing a bit string) that specifies flag
bits in byte 14 of the TCP header. (Range: 0-63)
• flag-bitmask – Decimal number representing the code bits to match.
(Range: 0-63)
Console(config-std-acl)#permit host 10.1.1.21
Console(config-std-acl)#permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0
17. Includes TCP, UDP or other protocol types.

4-93
4
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Extended ACL
Command Usage
• All new rules are appended to the end of the list.
• Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask, containing four integers from
0 to 255, each separated by a period. The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate
“match” and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the
specified source IP address, and then compared with the address for each IP
packet entering the port(s) to which this ACL has been assigned.
• You can specify both Precedence and ToS in the same rule. However, if
DSCP is used, then neither Precedence nor ToS can be specified.
• The control-code bitmask is a decimal number (representing an equivalent bit
mask) that is applied to the control code. Enter a decimal number, where the
equivalent binary bit “1” means to match a bit and “0” means to ignore a bit.
The following bits may be specified:
- 1 (fin) – Finish
- 2 (syn) – Synchronize
- 4 (rst) – Reset
- 8 (psh) – Push
- 16 (ack) – Acknowledgement
- 32 (urg) – Urgent pointer
For example, use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the
following flags set:
- SYN flag valid, use “control-code 2 2”
- Both SYN and ACK valid, use “control-code 18 18”
- SYN valid and ACK invalid, use “control-code 2 18”
Example
This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet
10.7.1.x. For example, if the rule is matched; i.e., the rule (10.7.1.0 & 255.255.255.0)
equals the masked address (10.7.1.2 & 255.255.255.0), the packet passes through.
This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 to any destination
address when set for destination TCP port 80 (i.e., HTTP).
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any
destination-port 80

4-94
4
This permits all TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 with the TCP
control code set to “SYN.”
Related Commands
access-list ip (4-90)
show ip access-list
This command displays the rules for configured IP ACLs.
Syntax
show ip access-list {standard | extended} [acl_name]
• standard – Specifies a standard IP ACL.
• extended – Specifies an extended IP ACL.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
permit, deny 4-91
ip access-group
This command binds a port to an IP ACL. Use the no form to remove the port.
Syntax
[no] ip access-group acl_name in
• in – Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
control-flag 2 2
Console#show ip access-list standard
IP standard access-list david:
permit host 10.1.1.21
permit 168.92.0.0 255.255.255.0
Console#

4-95
4
Command Usage
• A port can only be bound to one ACL.
• If a port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL, the
switch will replace the old binding with the new one.
• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port.
Example
Related Commands
show ip access-list (4-94)
show ip access-group
This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
map access-list ip
This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule. The
specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue; it
is not written to the packet itself. Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping.
Syntax
[no] map access-list ip acl_name cos cos-value
• cos-value – CoS value. (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Console(config)#int eth 1/25
Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in
Console(config-if)#
Console#show ip access-group
Interface ethernet 1/25
IP access-list david in
Console#

4-96
4
Command Usage
A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the
output queues as shown in the following table. For information on mapping the
CoS values to output queues, see queue cos-map on page 4-171.
Example
Related Commands
queue cos-map (4-171)
show map access-list ip (4-96)
show map access-list ip
This command shows the CoS value mapped to an IP ACL for the current interface.
(The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule.)
Syntax
show map access-list ip [interface]
interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
- port - Port number.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
map access-list ip (4-95)
Queue 0 1 2 3
Priority 1,2 0,3 4,5 6,7
Console(config-if)#map access-list ip bill cos 0
Console(config-if)#
Console#show map access-list ip
Eth 1/25
access-list ip bill cos 0
Console#

4-97
4
MAC ACLs
access-list mac
This command adds a MAC access list and enters MAC ACL configuration mode.
Use the no form to remove the specified ACL.
Syntax
[no] access-list mac acl_name
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
• When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL,
use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list.
To create an ACL, you must add at least one rule to the list.
• To remove a rule, use the no permit or no deny command followed by the
exact text of a previously configured rule.
• An ACL can contain up to 32 rules.
Example
Table 4-36 MAC ACLs
access-list mac Creates a MAC ACL and enters configuration mode GC 4-97
permit, deny Filters packets matching a specified source and
destination address, packet format, and Ethernet type
MAC-ACL 4-98
show mac access-list Displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs PE 4-99
mac access-group Adds a port to a MAC ACL IC 4-99
show mac access-group Shows port assignments for MAC ACLs PE 4-100
map access-list mac Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for
IC 4-100
show map access-list
mac
Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface PE 4-101
Console(config)#access-list mac jerry

4-98
4
Related Commands
permit, deny (MAC ACL) (4-98)
mac access-group (4-99)
show mac access-list (4-99)
permit, deny (MAC ACL)
This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL. The rule filters packets matching a
specified MAC source or destination address (i.e., physical layer address), or
Ethernet protocol type. Use the no form to remove a rule.
Syntax
[no] {permit | deny}
{any | host source | source address-bitmask}
{any | host destination | destination address-bitmask}
[vid vid [vid-end]] [ethertype protocol [protocol-end]]
Note:- The default is for Ethernet II packets.
• any – Any MAC source or destination address.
• host – A specific MAC address.
• source – Source MAC address.
• destination – Destination MAC address range with bitmask.
• address-bitmask18 – Bitmask for MAC address (in hexidecimal format).
• vid – VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)
• vid-end – Upper bound of VID range. (Range: 1-4094)
• protocol – A specific Ethernet protocol number. (Range: 0-65535)
• protocol-end – Upper bound of protocol range. (Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
MAC ACL
Command Usage
• New rules are added to the end of the list.
• The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets.
• A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060. A few
of the more common types include the following:
- 0800 - IP
- 0806 - ARP
- 8137 - IPX
18. For all bitmasks, “1” means care and “0” means ignore.

4-99
4
Example
This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address
00-e0-29-94-34-de where the Ethernet type is 0800.
Related Commands
access-list mac (4-97)
show mac access-list
This command displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs.
Syntax
show mac access-list [acl_name]
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
permit, deny 4-98
mac access-group
This command binds a port to a MAC ACL. Use the no form to remove the port.
Syntax
mac access-group acl_name in
• in – Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype 0800
Console#show mac access-list
MAC access-list jerry:
permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype 800 800
Console#

4-100
4
Command Usage
• A port can only be bound to one ACL.
• If a port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL, the
switch will replace the old binding with the new one.
Example
Related Commands
show mac access-list (4-99)
show mac access-group
This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
map access-list mac
This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule. The
specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue; it
is not written to the packet itself. Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping.
Syntax
[no] map access-list mac acl_name cos cos-value
• cos-value – CoS value. (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
None
Console(config-if)#mac access-group jerry in
Console(config-if)#
Console#show mac access-group
MAC access-list jerry in
.
.
.
Console#

4-101
4
Command Mode
Command Usage
• You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule.
• A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the
output queues as shown below.
Example
Related Commands
queue cos-map (4-171)
show map access-list mac (4-101)
show map access-list mac
This command shows the CoS value mapped to a MAC ACL for the current
interface. (The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an
ACL rule.)
Syntax
show map access-list mac [interface]
interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
- port - Port number.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Queue 0 1 2 3
Priority 1,2 0,3 4,5 6,7
Console(config)#int eth 1/5
Console(config-if)#map access-list mac jerry cos 0
Console(config-if)#
Console#show map access-list mac
Eth 1/5
access-list mac jerry cos 0
Console#

4-102
4
Related Commands
map access-list mac (4-100)
ACL Information
show access-list
This command shows all ACLs and associated rules, as well as all the user-defined
masks.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Once the ACL is bound to an interface (i.e., the ACL is active), the order in
which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask.
Example
show access-group
This command shows the port assignments of ACLs.
Command Mode
Privileged Executive
Table 4-38 ACL Information
show access-list Show all ACLs and associated rules PE 4-102
show access-group Shows the ACLs assigned to each port PE 4-102
Console#show access-list
IP standard access-list david:
permit host 10.1.1.21
permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0
IP extended access-list bob:
permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any
permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any destination-port 80 80
permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any protocol tcp control-code 2 2
MAC access-list jerry:
permit any host 00-30-29-94-34-de ethertype 800 800
IP extended access-list A6:
deny tcp any any control-flag 2 2
permit any any
Console#

SNMP Commands
4-103
4
Example
SNMP Commands
Controls access to this switch from management stations using the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP), as well as the error types sent to trap managers.
snmp-server community
This command defines the community access string for the Simple Network
Management Protocol. Use the no form to remove the specified community string.
Syntax
snmp-server community string [ro|rw]
no snmp-server community string
• string - Community string that acts like a password and permits access to
the SNMP protocol. (Maximum length: 32 characters, case sensitive;
Maximum number of strings: 5)
• ro - Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations are only
able to retrieve MIB objects.
• rw - Specifies read/write access. Authorized management stations are able
to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.
Default Setting
• public - Read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to
retrieve MIB objects.
• private - Read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both
retrieve and modify MIB objects.
Console#show access-group
.
.
.
Console#
Table 4-39 SNMP Commands
snmp-server community Sets up the community access string to permit access to
SNMP commands
GC 4-103
snmp-server contact Sets the system contact string GC 4-104
snmp-server location Sets the system location string GC 4-104
snmp-server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification operation GC 4-105
snmp-server enable traps Enables the device to send SNMP traps
(i.e., SNMP notifications)
GC 4-106
show snmp Displays the status of SNMP communications NE, PE 4-107

4-104
4
Command Mode
Command Usage
The first snmp-server community command you enter enables SNMP. The
no snmp-server community command disables SNMP.
Example
snmp-server contact
This command sets the system contact string. Use the no form to remove the
system contact information.
Syntax
snmp-server contact string
no snmp-server contact
string - String that describes the system contact information.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Example
Related Commands
snmp-server location (4-104)
snmp-server location
This command sets the system location string. Use the no form to remove the
location string.
Syntax
snmp-server location text
no snmp-server location
text - String that describes the system location.
Default Setting
None
Console(config)#snmp-server community alpha rw
Console(config)#
Console(config)#snmp-server contact Paul
Console(config)#

SNMP Commands
4-105
4
Command Mode
Example
Related Commands
snmp-server contact (4-104)
snmp-server host
This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol
notification operation. Use the no form to remove the specified host.
Syntax
snmp-server host host-addr community-string [version {1 | 2c}]
no snmp-server host host-addr
• host-addr - Internet address of the host (the targeted recipient).
(Maximum host addresses: 5 trap destination IP address entries)
• community-string - Password-like community string sent with the
notification operation. Although you can set this string using the
snmp-server host command by itself, we recommend that you define this
string using the snmp-server community command prior to using the
snmp-server host command. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
• version - Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1 or v2c traps.
(Range: 1, 2c; Default: 1)
Default Setting
Host Address: None
SNMP Version: 1
Command Mode
Command Usage
• If you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications are sent.
In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications, you must enter at
least one snmp-server host command. In order to enable multiple hosts, you
must issue a separate snmp-server host command for each host.
• The snmp-server host command is used in conjunction with the
snmp-server enable traps command. Use the snmp-server enable traps
command to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally. For a host to
receive notifications, at least one snmp-server enable traps command and
the snmp-server host command for that host must be enabled.
• Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp-server enable
traps command. For example, some notification types are always enabled.
Console(config)#snmp-server location WC-19
Console(config)#

4-106
4
• The switch can send SNMP version 1 or version 2c notifications to a host IP
address, depending on the SNMP version that the management station
supports. If the snmp-server host command does not specify the SNMP
version, the default is to send SNMP version 1 notifications.
Example
Related Commands
snmp-server enable traps (4-106)
snmp-server enable traps
This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol
traps (SNMP notifications). Use the no form to disable SNMP notifications.
Syntax
[no] snmp-server enable traps [authentication | link-up-down]
• authentication - Keyword to issue authentication failure traps.
• link-up-down - Keyword to issue link-up or link-down traps.
Default Setting
Issue authentication and link-up-down traps.
Command Mode
Command Usage
• If you do not enter an snmp-server enable traps command, no notifications
controlled by this command are sent. In order to configure this device to send
SNMP notifications, you must enter at least one snmp-server enable traps
command. If you enter the command with no keywords, both authentication
and link-up-down notifications are enabled. If you enter the command with a
keyword, only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled.
• The snmp-server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the
snmp-server host command. Use the snmp-server host command to
specify which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications. In order to send
notifications, you must configure at least one snmp-server host command.
Example
Related Commands
snmp-server host (4-105)
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.23 batman
Console(config)#
Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps link-up-down
Console(config)#

SNMP Commands
4-107
4
show snmp
This command checks the status of SNMP communications.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command provides information on the community access strings, counter
information for SNMP input and output protocol data units, and whether or not
SNMP logging has been enabled with the snmp-server enable traps
command.
Example
Console#show snmp
SNMP traps:
Authentication: enabled
Link-up-down: enabled
SNMP communities:
1. private, and the privilege is read-write
2. public, and the privilege is read-only
0 SNMP packets input
0 Bad SNMP version errors
0 Unknown community name
0 Illegal operation for community name supplied
0 Encoding errors
0 Number of requested variables
0 Number of altered variables
0 Get-request PDUs
0 Get-next PDUs
0 Set-request PDUs
0 SNMP packets output
0 Too big errors
0 No such name errors
0 Bad values errors
0 General errors
0 Response PDUs
0 Trap PDUs
SNMP logging: disabled
Console#

4-108
4
Interface Commands
These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an
Ethernet port, aggregated link, or VLAN.
interface
This command configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode.
Use the no form to remove a trunk.
Syntax
interface interface
no interface port-channel channel-id
interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
• vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
None
Table 4-40 Interface Commands
interface Configures an interface type and enters interface configuration
mode
GC 4-108
description Adds a description to an interface configuration IC 4-109
speed-duplex Configures the speed and duplex operation of a given interface
when autonegotiation is disabled
IC 4-109
negotiation Enables autonegotiation of a given interface IC 4-110
capabilities Advertises the capabilities of a given interface for use in
autonegotiation
IC 4-111
flowcontrol Enables flow control on a given interface IC 4-112
shutdown Disables an interface IC 4-113
switchport broadcast
packet-rate
Configures the broadcast storm control threshold IC 4-114
clear counters Clears statistics on an interface PE 4-114
show interfaces status Displays status for the specified interface NE, PE 4-115
show interfaces
counters
Displays statistics for the specified interfaces NE, PE 4-116
show interfaces
switchport
Displays the administrative and operational status of an
interface
NE, PE 4-117

Interface Commands
4-109
4
Command Mode
Example
To specify port 24, enter the following command:
description
This command adds a description to an interface. Use the no form to remove the
description.
Syntax
description string
no description
string - Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached
to this interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Example
The following example adds a description to port 24.
speed-duplex
This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when
autonegotiation is disabled. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
speed-duplex {1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full | 10half}
no speed-duplex
• 1000full - Forces 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation
• 100half - Forces 100 Mbps half-duplex operation
• 10half - Forces 10 Mbps half-duplex operation
Console(config-if)#
Console(config-if)#description RD-SW#3
Console(config-if)#

4-110
4
Default Setting
• Auto-negotiation is enabled by default.
• When auto-negotiation is disabled, the default speed-duplex setting is 100half
for 100BASE-TX ports and 1000full for Gigabit Ethernet ports.
Command Mode
Command Usage
• To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed-duplex
command, use the no negotiation command to disable auto-negotiation on
the selected interface.
• When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation, the
optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command. To set the
speed/duplex mode under auto-negotiation, the required mode must be
specified in the capabilities list for an interface.
Example
The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.
Related Commands
negotiation (4-110)
capabilities (4-111)
negotiation
This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface. Use the no form to
disable autonegotiation.
Syntax
[no] negotiation
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
• When auto-negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings
for a link based on the capabilities command. When auto-negotiation is
disabled, you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed-duplex
and flowcontrol commands.
Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half
Console(config-if)#no negotiation
Console(config-if)#

Interface Commands
4-111
4
• If autonegotiation is disabled, auto-MDI/MDI-X pin signal configuration will
also be disabled for the RJ-45 ports.
Example
The following example configures port 11 to use autonegotiation.
Related Commands
capabilities (4-111)
speed-duplex (4-109)
capabilities
This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during
autonegotiation. Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised
capability, or the no form without parameters to restore the default values.
Syntax
[no] capabilities {1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full | 10half | flowcontrol |
symmetric}
• 1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation
• 100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation
• 10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation
• flowcontrol - Supports flow control
• symmetric (Gigabit only) - When specified, the port transmits and receives
pause frames; when not specified, the port will auto-negotiate to determine
the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames. (The current switch
ASIC only supports symmetric pause frames.)
Default Setting
• 100BASE-TX: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full
• 1000BASE-T: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full
• SFP: 1000full
Command Mode
Command Usage
When auto-negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command, the switch
will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilites command.
When auto-negotiation is disabled, you must manually specify the link
attributes with the speed-duplex and flowcontrol commands.
Console(config-if)#negotiation
Console(config-if)#

4-112
4
Example
The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100half, 100full and
flow control.
Related Commands
negotiation (4-110)
speed-duplex (4-109)
flowcontrol (4-112)
flowcontrol
This command enables flow control. Use the no form to disable flow control.
Syntax
[no] flowcontrol
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
• Flow control can eliminate frame loss by “blocking” traffic from end stations or
segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill. When enabled,
back pressure is used for half-duplex operation and IEEE 802.3x for
full-duplex operation.
• To force flow control on or off (with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol
command), use the no negotiation command to disable auto-negotiation on
the selected interface.
• When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation, the
optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command. To enable
flow control under auto-negotiation, “flowcontrol” must be included in the
capabilities list for any port
• Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually
required to solve a problem. Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may
degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub.
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full
Console(config-if)#capabilities flowcontrol
Console(config-if)#

Interface Commands
4-113
4
Example
The following example enables flow control on port 5.
Related Commands
negotiation (4-110)
capabilities (flowcontrol, symmetric) (4-111)
shutdown
This command disables an interface. To restart a disabled interface, use the no
form.
Syntax
[no] shutdown
Default Setting
All interfaces are enabled.
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior
(e.g., excessive collisions), and then reenable it after the problem has been
resolved. You may also want to disable a port for security reasons.
Example
The following example disables port 5.
Console(config-if)#flowcontrol
Console(config-if)#no negotiation
Console(config-if)#
Console(config-if)#shutdown
Console(config-if)#

4-114
4
switchport broadcast packet-rate
This command configures broadcast storm control. Use the no form to disable
broadcast storm control.
Syntax
switchport broadcast octet-rate rate
no switchport broadcast
rate - Threshold level as a rate; i.e., octets per second.
(Range: 64-95232000)
Default Setting
Enabled for all ports
Packet-rate limit: 32000 octets per second
Command Mode
Command Usage
• When broadcast traffic exceeds the specified threshold, packets above that
threshold are dropped.
• This command can enable or disable broadcast storm control for the selected
interface. However, the specified threshold value applies to all ports on the
switch.
Example
The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 packets per
second:
clear counters
This command clears statistics on an interface.
Syntax
clear counters interface
interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast octet-rate 600
Console(config-if)#

Interface Commands
4-115
4
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Statistics are only initialized for a power reset. This command sets the base
value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session.
However, if you log out and back into the management interface, the statistics
displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset.
Example
The following example clears statistics on port 5.
show interfaces status
This command displays the status for an interface.
Syntax
show interfaces status [interface]
interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
• vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
Shows the status for all interfaces.
Command Mode
Command Usage
If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed. For a
description of the items displayed by this command, see “Displaying
Connection Status” on page 3-64.
Console#clear counters ethernet 1/5
Console#

4-116
4
Example
show interfaces counters
This command displays interface statistics.
Syntax
show interfaces counters [interface]
interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Default Setting
Shows the counters for all interfaces.
Command Mode
Command Usage
If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed. For a
description of the items displayed by this command, see “Showing Port
Statistics” on page 3-85.
Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/5
Basic information:
Port type: 100TX
Mac address: 00-30-F1-12-34-61
Configuration:
Name:
Port admin: Up
Speed-duplex: Auto
Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full,
Broadcast storm: Enabled
Broadcast storm limit: 32000 octets/second
Lacp: Disabled
Max MAC count: 0
Port security action: None
Current status:
Link status: Up
Console#show interfaces status vlan 1
Information of VLAN 1
MAC address: 00-30-F1-12-34-56
Console#

Interface Commands
4-117
4
Example
show interfaces switchport
This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified
interfaces.
Syntax
show interfaces switchport [interface]
interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
- port - Port number. (RAnge: 1-26/50)
Default Setting
Shows all interfaces.
Command Mode
Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/7
Ethernet 1/7
Iftable stats:
Octets input: 30658, Octets output: 196550
Unicast input: 6, Unicast output: 5
Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0
Error input: 0, Error output: 0
Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0
Extended iftable stats:
Multi-cast input: 0, Multi-cast output: 3064
Broadcast input: 262, Broadcast output: 1
Ether-like stats:
Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0
Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0
SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0
Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0
Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0
Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0
Symbol errors: 0
RMON stats:
Drop events: 0, Octets: 227208, Packets: 3338
Broadcast pkts: 263, Multi-cast pkts: 3064
Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0
Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0
CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0
Packet size <= 64 octets: 3150, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 139
Console#

4-118
4
Command Usage
If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed.
Example
This example shows the configuration setting for port 24.
Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/24
Broadcast threshold: Enabled, 32000 octets/second
LACP status: Enabled
Ingress rule: Disabled
Acceptable frame type: All frames
Native VLAN: 1
Gvrp status: Disabled
Allowed Vlan: 1(u),
Forbidden Vlan:
Console#
Table 4-41 Interfaces Switchport Statistics
Field Description
Broadcast threshold Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled; if enabled it also
shows the threshold level (page 4-114).
Lacp status Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled
(page 4-125).
Ingress/Egress rate limit Shows if rate limiting is enabled, and the current rate limit. (page 4-121).
VLAN membership mode Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid (page 4-152).
Ingress rule Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled (page 4-153).
Acceptable frame type Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged frames only
(page 4-152).
Native VLAN Indicates the default Port VLAN ID (page 4-154).
Priority for untagged traffic Indicates the default priority for untagged frames (page 4-168).
Gvrp status Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or disabled (page 4-165).
Allowed Vlan Shows the VLANs this interface has joined, where “(u)” indicates untagged and
“(t)” indicates tagged (page 4-155).
Forbidden Vlan Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via GVRP (page 4-156).
Private VLAN mode Shows the private VLAN mode as host, promiscuous, or none (4-161).
Private VLAN
host-association
Shows the secondary (or community) VLAN with which this port is associated
(4-161).
Private VLAN mapping Shows the primary VLAN mapping for a promiscuous port (4-163).

Mirror Port Commands
4-119
4
Mirror Port Commands
This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port.
port monitor
This command configures a mirror session. Use the no form to clear a mirror
session.
Syntax
port monitor interface [rx | tx]
no port monitor interface
• interface - ethernet unit/port (source port)
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
• rx - Mirror received packets.
• tx - Mirror transmitted packets.
Default Setting
No mirror session is defined.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, destination port)
Command Usage
• You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real-time
analysis. You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the
destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely
unobtrusive manner.
• The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface.
• The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match, otherwise traffic may
be dropped from the monitor port.
• You can only create a single mirror session from the source port to target port.
• When mirroring port traffic, the target port must be included in the same VLAN
as the source port
Table 4-42 Mirror Port Commands
port monitor Configures a mirror session IC 4-119
show port monitor Shows the configuration for a mirror port PE 4-120

4-120
4
Example
The following example configures the switch to mirror received packets from port 6
to 11:
show port monitor
This command displays mirror information.
Syntax
show port monitor [interface]
interface - ethernet unit/port (source port)
• unit - Stack unit.
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
• port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/50)
Default Setting
Shows all sessions.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command displays the currently configured source port, destination port,
and mirror mode (i.e., RX, TX).
Example
The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11:
Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6 rx
Console(config-if)#
Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6 rx
Console#show port monitor
Port Mirroring
-------------------------------------
Destination port(listen port):Eth1/11
Source port(monitored port) :Eth1/6
Mode :RX
Console#

Rate Limit Commands
4-121
4
Rate Limit Commands
This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic
transmitted or received on an interface. Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at
the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network. Traffic that falls within
the rate limit is transmitted, while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of
traffic are dropped.
Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks. When an interface is
configured with this feature, the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to
verify conformity. Non-conforming traffic is dropped, conforming traffic is forwarded
without any changes.
Note: The “rate limit granularity” is multiplied by the “rate limit” (page 4-121) to set the
actual rate limit for an interface. Granularity is a global setting that applies to Fast
Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
rate-limit
Use this command to define the rate limit level for a specific interface. Use this
command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate limit level. Use the no
form to restore the default status of disabled.
Syntax
rate-limit {input | output} level [rate]
no rate-limit {input | output}
• input – Input rate
• output – Output rate
• rate – Maximum value.
(Fast Ethernet: Range: 1-255; Gigabit Ethernet: Range: 1-30)
Default Setting
• Fast Ethernet: 255
• Gigabit Ethernet: 30
Command Mode
Command Usage
Actual rate limit = Rate limit level * Granularity
Table 4-43 Rate Limit Commands
rate-limit Configures the maximum input or output rate for a port IC 4-121
rate-limit granularity Sets the Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet granularity IC 4-122
show rate-limit Shows the rate limit granularity PE 4-122

4-122
4
Example
rate-limit granularity
Use this command to define the rate limit granularity for the Fast Ethernet ports, and
the Gigabit Ethernet ports. Use the no form of this command to restore the default
setting.
Syntax
rate-limit {fastethernet | gigabitethernet} granularity [granularity]
no rate-limit {fastethernet | gigabitethernet} granularity
• fastethernet – Fast Ethernet granularity
• gigabitethernet – Gigabit Ethernet granularity
• granularity – Sets rate limit granularity for the system. For Fast Ethernet,
choose 8 Kbps, 64 Kbps, 512 Kbps, 1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, or 3.3 Mbps. For Gigabit
Ethernet, choose 32 Kbps, 64 Kbps, 512 Kbps, 1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 3.3 Mbps, 10
Mbps, or 33.3 Mbps.
Default Setting
Fast Ethernet interface – 3.3 Mbps
Gigabit Ethernet interface – 33.3 Mbps
Command Mode
Global Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
Actual rate limit = Rate limit level * Granularity
Example
The following sets Fast Ethernet granularity to 1 Mbps, and Gigabit Ethernet
granularity to 33.3 Mbps.
show rate-limit
Use this command to display the rate limit granularity.
Default Setting
Fast Ethernet interface – 3.3 Mbps
Gigabit Ethernet interface – 33.3 Mbps
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console(config-if)#rate-limit input level 20
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#rate-limit fastethernet granularity 1000
Console(config)#rate-limit gigabitethernet granularity 33300
Console(config)#

Link Aggregation Commands
4-123
4
Command Usage
• For Fast Ethernet interfaces, the rate limit granularity is 8 Kbps, 64 Kbps, 512
Kbps, 1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, or 3.3 Mbps.
• For Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, the rate limit granularity is 32 Kbps, 64 Kbps,
512 Kbps, 1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 3.3 Mbps, 10 Mbps, or 33.3 Mbps.
Example
Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link (i.e., trunk) to increase the
bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery. Or you can use the
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) to automatically negotiate a trunk link
between this switch and another network device. For static trunks, the switches have
to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard. For dynamic trunks, the switches
have to comply with LACP. This switch supports up to four trunks. For example, a
trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of
4 Gbps when operating at full duplex.
Console#show rate-limit
Fast ethernet granularity: 1000
Gigabit ethernet granularity: 33300
Console#
Table 4-44 Link Aggregation Commands
Manual Configuration Commands
interface port-channel Configures a trunk and enters interface
configuration mode for the trunk
GC 4-108
channel-group Adds a port to a trunk IC (Ethernet) 4-124
Dynamic Configuration Command
lacp Configures LACP for the current interface IC (Ethernet) 4-125
lacp system-priority Configures a port's LACP system priority IC (Ethernet) 4-126
lacp admin-key Configures a port's administration key IC (Ethernet) 4-127
lacp admin-key Configures an port channel’s administration key IC (Port Channel) 4-128
lacp port-priority Configures a port's LACP port priority IC (Ethernet) 4-129
Trunk Status Display Command
show interfaces status
port-channel
Shows trunk information NE, PE 4-115
show lacp Shows LACP information PE 4-129

4-124
4
Guidelines for Creating Trunks
General Guidelines –
• Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network
cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.
• A trunk can have up to eight ports.
• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports.
• All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner, including
communication mode (i.e., speed, duplex mode and flow control), VLAN
assignments, and CoS settings.
• All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to,
added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port-channel.
• STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the
specified port-channel.
Dynamically Creating a Port Channel –
Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria:
• Ports must have the same LACP system priority.
• Ports must have the same port admin key (Ethernet Interface).
• If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not set when
a channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this key is set to the
same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key - Ethernet Interface) used
by the interfaces that joined the group.
• However, if the port channel admin key is set, then the port admin key must
be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group.
• If a link goes down, LACP port priority is used to select the backup link.
channel-group
This command adds a port to a trunk. Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk.
Syntax
channel-group channel-id
no channel-group
channel-id - Trunk index (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
The current port will be added to this trunk.
Command Mode
Command Usage
• When configuring static trunks, the switches must comply with the Cisco
EtherChannel standard.
• Use no channel-group to remove a port group from a trunk.
• Use no interfaces port-channel to remove a trunk from the switch.

4-125
4
Example
The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 11:
lacp
This command enables 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the
current interface. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] lacp
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
• The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex,
either by forced mode or auto-negotiation.
• A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned
the next available port-channel ID.
• If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports, the trunk
will be activated automatically.
• If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP
enabled, the additional ports will be placed in standby mode, and will only be
enabled if one of the active links fails.
Console(config)#interface port-channel 1
Console(config-if)#channel-group 1
Console(config-if)#

4-126
4
Example
The following shows LACP enabled on ports 11-13. Because LACP has also been
enabled on the ports at the other end of the links, the show interfaces status
port-channel 1 command shows that Trunk 1 has been established.
lacp system-priority
This command configures a port's LACP system priority. Use the no form to restore
Syntax
lacp {actor | partner} system-priority priority
no lacp {actor | partner} system-priority
• actor - The local side an aggregate link.
• partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.
• priority - This priority is used to determine link aggregation group (LAG)
membership, and to identify this device to other switches during LAG
negotiations. (Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
32768
Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1
Basic information:
Port type: 100TX
Mac address: 00-30-F1-12-34-72
Configuration:
Name:
Port admin: Up
Speed-duplex: Auto
Flow control status: Disabled
Max MAC count: 0
Current status:
Created by: LACP
Link status: Up
Member Ports: Eth1/11, Eth1/12, Eth1/13,
Console#

4-127
4
Command Mode
Command Usage
• Port must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG.
• System priority is combined with the switch’s MAC address to form the LAG
identifier. This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP
negotiations with other systems.
• Once the remote side of a link has been established, LACP operational
settings are already in use on that side. Configuring LACP settings for the
partner only applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and
will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the
partner.
Example
lacp admin-key (Ethernet Interface)
This command configures a port's LACP administration key. Use the no form to
restore the default setting.
Syntax
lacp {actor | partner} admin-key key
[no] lacp {actor | partner} admin-key
• key - The port admin key must be set to the same value for ports that belong
to the same link aggregation group (LAG). (Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
0
Command Mode
Command Usage
• Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if (1) the LACP system priority
matches, (2) the LACP port admin key matches, and (3) the LACP port
channel key matches (if configured).
by the interfaces that joined the group.
Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3
Console(config-if)#

4-128
4
partner.
Example
lacp admin-key (Port Channel)
This command configures a port channel's LACP administration key string. Use the
no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
lacp {actor | partner} admin-key key
[no] lacp {actor | partner} admin-key
key - The port channel admin key is used to identify a specific link
aggregation group (LAG) during local LACP setup on this switch.
(Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
0
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Port Channel)
Command Usage
• Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if (1) the LACP system priority
matches, (2) the LACP port admin key matches, and (3) the LACP port
channel key matches (if configured).
by the interfaces that joined the group. Note that when the LAG is no longer
used, the port channel admin key is reset to 0.
Example
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface port-channel 1
Console(config-if)#

4-129
4
lacp port-priority
This command configures LACP port priority. Use the no form to restore the default
setting.
Syntax
lacp {actor | partner} port-priority priority
no lacp {actor | partner} port-priority
• priority - LACP port priority is used to select a backup link. (Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
32768
Command Mode
Command Usage
• Setting a lower value indicates a higher effective priority.
• If an active port link goes down, the backup port with the highest priority is
selected to replace the downed link. However, if two or more ports have the
same LACP port priority, the port with the lowest physical port number will be
selected as the backup port.
partner.
Example
show lacp
This command displays LACP information.
Syntax
show lacp [port-channel] {counters | internal | neighbors | sysid}
• port-channel - Local identifier for a link aggregation group. (Range: 1-4)
• counters - Statistics for LACP protocol messages.
• internal - Configuration settings and operational state for local side.
• neighbors - Configuration settings and operational state for remote side.
• sysid - Summary of system priority and MAC address for all channel groups.
Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 128

4-130
4
Default Setting
Port Channel: all
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show lacp 1 counters
Port channel : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/ 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LACPDUs Sent : 21
LACPDUs Received : 21
Marker Sent : 0
Marker Received : 0
LACPDUs Unknown Pkts : 0
LACPDUs Illegal Pkts : 0...
Table 4-45 show lacp counters - display description
Field Description
LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group.
LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group.
Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group.
Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group.
LACPDUs Unknown Pkts Number of frames received that either (1) Carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet
Type value, but contain an unknown PDU, or (2) are addressed to the Slow
Protocols group MAC Address, but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet
Type.
LACPDUs Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value, but contain
a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype.

4-131
4
Console#show lacp 1 internal
Port channel : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oper Key : 4
Admin Key : 0
Eth 1/1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LACPDUs Internal : 30 sec
LACP System Priority : 32768
LACP Port Priority : 32768
Admin Key : 4
Oper Key : 4
Oper State : distributing, collecting, synchronization, aggregation,
long timeout, LACP-activity...
Table 4-46 show lacp internal - display description
Field Description
Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port.
Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port.
LACPDUs Internal Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information.
LACP System Priority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel.
LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group.
Admin State,
Oper State
Administrative or operational values of the actor’s state parameters:
• Expired – The actor’s receive machine is in the expired state;
• Defaulted – The actor’s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner
information, administratively configured for the partner.
• Distributing – If false, distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled; i.e.,
distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence
of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.
• Collecting – Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled; i.e., collection is
currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of
administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.
• Synchronization – The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC; i.e., it has been
allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group, the group has been associated
with a compatible Aggregator, and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is
consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted.
• Aggregation – The system considers this link to be aggregatable; i.e., a potential
candidate for aggregation.
• Long timeout – Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate.
• LACP-Activity – Activity control value with regard to this link. (0: Passive; 1: Active)

4-132
4
Console#show lacp 1 neighbors
Port channel 1 neighbors
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Partner Admin System ID : 32768, 00-00-00-00-00-00
Partner Oper System ID : 32768, 00-00-00-00-00-01
Partner Admin Port Number : 1
Partner Oper Port Number : 1
Port Admin Priority : 32768
Port Oper Priority : 32768
Admin Key : 0
Oper Key : 4
Admin State : defaulted, distributing, collecting, synchronization,
long timeout,
Oper State : distributing, collecting, synchronization, aggregation,
long timeout, LACP-activity...
Table 4-47 show lacp neighbors - display description
Field Description
Partner Admin System ID LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the user.
Partner Oper System ID LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol.
Partner Admin
Port Number
Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner.
Partner Oper
Port Number
Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port’s protocol
partner.
Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner.
Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner.
Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner.
Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner.
Admin State Administrative values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)
Oper State Operational values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)

Address Table Commands
4-133
4
These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified
addresses, displaying current entries, clearing the table, or setting the aging time.
Console#show lacp sysid
Port Channel System Priority System MAC Address
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 32768 00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7
2 32768 00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7
3 32768 00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7
4 32768 00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7
Console#
Table 4-48 show lacp sysid - display description
Field Description
Channel group A link aggregation group configured on this switch.
System Priority* LACP system priority for this channel group.
System MAC Address* System MAC address.
* The LACP system priority and system MAC address are concatenated to form the LAG system ID.
Table 4-49 Address Table Commands
mac-address-table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC 4-134
clear mac-address-table
dynamic
Removes any learned entries from the forwarding database PE 4-135
show mac-address-table Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding database PE 4-135
mac-address-table
aging-time
Sets the aging time of the address table GC 4-136
show mac-address-table
aging-time
Shows the aging time for the address table PE 4-136

4-134
4
mac-address-table static
This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN. Use the no
form to remove an address.
Syntax
mac-address-table static mac-address interface interface
vlan vlan-id [action]
no mac-address-table static mac-address vlan vlan-id
• mac-address - MAC address.
• interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
• vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)
• action -
- delete-on-reset - Assignment lasts until the switch is reset.
- permanent - Assignment is permanent.
Default Setting
No static addresses are defined. The default mode is permanent.
Command Mode
Command Usage
The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within
a specific VLAN. Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC
Address Table. Static addresses have the following characteristics:
• Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given
interface link is down.
• Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved.
When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be
ignored and will not be written to the address table.
• A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is
removed with the no form of this command.
Example
Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-e0-29-94-34-de interface
ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset
Console(config)#

4-135
4
clear mac-address-table dynamic
This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and
clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This command shows classes of entries in the bridge-forwarding database.
Syntax
show mac-address-table [address mac-address [mask]] [interface interface]
[vlan vlan-id] [sort {address | vlan | interface}]
• mac-address - MAC address.
• mask - Bits to match in the address.
• interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
• sort - Sort by address, vlan or interface.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each
interface. Note that the Type field may include the following types:
- Learned - Dynamic address entries
- Permanent - Static entry
- Delete-on-reset - Static entry to be deleted when system is reset
• The mask should be hexadecimal numbers (representing an equivalent bit
mask) in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx that is applied to the specified MAC
Console#clear mac-address-table dynamic
Console#

4-136
4
address. Enter hexadecimal numbers, where an equivalent binary bit “0”
means to match a bit and “1” means to ignore a bit. For example, a mask of
00-00-00-00-00-00 means an exact match, and a mask of
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF means “any.”
• The maximum number of address entries is 8191.
Example
mac-address-table aging-time
This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table. Use the no form
to restore the default aging time.
Syntax
mac-address-table aging-time seconds
no mac-address-table aging-time
seconds - Aging time. (Range: 10-30000 seconds; 0 to disable aging)
Default Setting
300 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information.
Example
show mac-address-table aging-time
This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console#show mac-address-table
Interface Mac Address Vlan Type
--------- ----------------- ---- -----------------
Eth 1/1 00-e0-29-94-34-de 1 Delete-on-reset
Trunk 2 00-E0-29-8F-AA-1B 1 Learned
Console#
Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 100
Console(config)#

Spanning Tree Commands
4-137
4
Example
This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA)
globally for the switch, and commands that configure STA for the selected interface.
spanning-tree
This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch. Use the
no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree
Default Setting
Spanning tree is enabled.
Console#show mac-address-table aging-time
Aging time: 100 sec.
Console#
Table 4-50 Spanning Tree Commands
spanning-tree Enables the spanning tree protocol GC 4-137
spanning-tree mode Configures STP or RSTP GC 4-138
spanning-tree forward-time Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time GC 4-139
spanning-tree hello-time Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time GC 4-140
spanning-tree max-age Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age GC 4-140
spanning-tree priority Configures the spanning tree bridge priority GC 4-141
spanning-tree
path-cost method
Configures the path cost method for RSTP GC 4-141
spanning-tree
transmission-limit
Configures the transmission limit for RSTP GC 4-142
spanning-tree
spanning-disabled
Disables spanning tree for an interface IC 4-142
spanning-tree cost Configures the spanning tree path cost of an interface IC 4-143
spanning-tree port-priority Configures the spanning tree priority of an interface IC 4-144
spanning-tree edge-port Enables fast forwarding for edge ports IC 4-144
spanning-tree portfast Sets an interface to fast forwarding IC 4-145
spanning-tree link-type Configures the link type for RSTP IC 4-146
spanning-tree
protocol-migration
Re-checks the appropriate BPDU format PE 4-147
show spanning-tree Shows spanning tree configuration for the common
spanning tree (i.e., overall bridge) or a selected interface
PE 4-147

4-138
4
Command Mode
Command Usage
The Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA) can be used to detect and disable
network loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or
routers. This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices (that is,
an STA-compliant switch, bridge or router) in your network to ensure that only
one route exists between any two stations on the network, and provide backup
links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down.
Example
This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch:
spanning-tree mode
This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch. Use the no form to
Syntax
spanning-tree mode {stp | rstp}
no spanning-tree mode
• stp - Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)
• rstp - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)
Default Setting
rstp
Command Mode
Command Usage
• Spanning Tree Protocol
Uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D BPDUs.
• Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring
the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of
protocol messages the RSTP node transmits, as described below:
- STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU after a port’s migration
delay timer expires, the switch assumes it is connected to an 802.1D bridge
and starts using only 802.1D BPDUs.
Console(config)#spanning-tree
Console(config)#

4-139
4
- RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an
RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP restarts the migration
delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port.
Example
The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree:
spanning-tree forward-time
This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this
switch. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree forward-time seconds
no spanning-tree forward-time
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 4-30 seconds)
The minimum value is the higher of 4 or [(max-age / 2) + 1].
Default Setting
15 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait
before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is
required because every device must receive information about topology
changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to
listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding
state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree mode rstp
Console(config)#
Console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 20
Console(config)#

4-140
4
spanning-tree hello-time
This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch.
Syntax
spanning-tree hello-time time
no spanning-tree hello-time
time - Time in seconds. (Range: 1-10 seconds).
The maximum value is the lower of 10 or [(max-age / 2) -1].
Default Setting
2 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command sets the time interval (in seconds) at which the root device
transmits a configuration message.
Example
spanning-tree max-age
This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this
switch. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree max-age seconds
no spanning-tree max-age
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 6-40 seconds)
The minimum value is the higher of 6 or [2 x (hello-time + 1)].
The maximum value is the lower of 40 or [2 x (forward-time - 1)].
Default Setting
20 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without
receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device
ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at
regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last
Console(config)#spanning-tree hello-time 5
Console(config)#

4-141
4
configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If
it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports
attached to the network.
Example
spanning-tree priority
This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch. Use the
no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree priority priority
no spanning-tree priority
priority - Priority of the bridge.
(Range – 0-61440, in steps of 4096; Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288,
16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152,
53248, 57344, 61440)
Default Setting
32768
Command Mode
Command Usage
Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated
port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device.
address will then become the root device.
Example
spanning-tree pathcost method
This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree. Use
the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree pathcost method {long | short}
no spanning-tree pathcost method
• long - Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 0-200,000,000.
• short - Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 0-65535.
Console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 40
Console(config)#
Console(config)#spanning-tree priority 40960
Console(config)#

4-142
4
Default Setting
Long method
Command Mode
Command Usage
The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices.
Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media,
and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. Note that path cost
(page 4-143) takes precedence over port priority (page 4-144).
Example
spanning-tree transmission-limit
This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of
consecutive RSTP BPDUs. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree transmission-limit count
no spanning-tree transmission-limit
count - The transmission limit in seconds. (Range: 1-10)
Default Setting
3
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs.
Example
spanning-tree spanning-disabled
This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface. Use
the no form to reenable the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree spanning-disabled
Console(config)#spanning-tree pathcost method long
Console(config)#
Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4
Console(config)#

4-143
4
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs.
Example
This example disables the spanning tree algorithm for port 5.
spanning-tree cost
This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface.
Syntax
spanning-tree cost cost
no spanning-tree cost
cost - The path cost for the port. (Range: 1-200,000,000))
The recommended range is:
• Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000
• Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000
• Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000
Default Setting
• Ethernet – half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000
• Fast Ethernet – half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000
• Gigabit Ethernet – full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000
Command Mode
Command Usage
• This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best
path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports
attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower
media.
• Path cost takes precedence over port priority.
• When the spanning-tree pathcost method (page 4-141) is set to short, the
maximum value for path cost is 65,535.
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree spanning-disabled
Console(config-if)#

4-144
4
Example
spanning-tree port-priority
This command configures the priority for the specified interface. Use the no form to
Syntax
spanning-tree port-priority priority
no spanning-tree port-priority
priority - The priority for a port. (Range: 0-240, in steps of 16)
Default Setting
128
Command Mode
Command Usage
• This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree
Algorithm. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with
the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as an active link in
the spanning tree.
• Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with the
lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.
Example
Related Commands
spanning-tree cost (4-143)
spanning-tree edge-port
This command specifies an interface as an edge port. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree edge-port
Default Setting
Disabled
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 5000
Console(config-if)#
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 128
Console(config-if)#

4-145
4
Command Mode
Command Usage
• You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that
is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes cannot
cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree
forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for
devices such as workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding
database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address
tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to
initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state, and also overcomes
other STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge Port
should only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node device.
• This command has the same effect as the spanning-tree portfast.
Example
Related Commands
spanning-tree portfast (4-145)
spanning-tree portfast
This command sets an interface to fast forwarding. Use the no form to disable fast
forwarding.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree portfast
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
• This command is used to enable/disable the fast spanning-tree mode for the
selected port. In this mode, ports skip the Discarding and Learning states, and
proceed straight to Forwarding.
• Since end-nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can be passed through
the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard
convergence time. Fast forwarding can achieve quicker convergence for
end-node workstations and servers, and also overcome other STA related
timeout problems. (Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for
Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree edge-port
Console(config-if)#

4-146
4
ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for
an end-node device.)
• This command is the same as spanning-tree edge-port, and is only included
for backward compatibility with earlier products. Note that this command may
be removed for future software versions.
Example
Related Commands
spanning-tree edge-port (4-144)
spanning-tree link-type
This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree. Use the no form to
Syntax
spanning-tree link-type {auto | point-to-point | shared}
no spanning-tree link-type
• auto - Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting.
• point-to-point - Point-to-point link.
• shared - Shared medium.
Default Setting
auto
Command Mode
Command Usage
• Specify a point-to-point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly
one other bridge, or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges.
• When automatic detection is selected, the switch derives the link type from the
duplex mode. A full-duplex interface is considered a point-to-point link, while
a half-duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link.
• RSTP only works on point-to-point links between two bridges. If you designate
a port as a shared link, RSTP is forbidden.
Example
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree portfast
Console(config-if)#
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type point-to-point

4-147
4
spanning-tree protocol-migration
This command re-checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected
interface.
Syntax
spanning-tree protocol-migration interface
interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including Configuration or
Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected
interface to forced STP-compatible mode. However, you can also use the
spanning-tree protocol-migration command at any time to manually
re-check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces (i.e.,
RSTP or STP-compatible).
Example
show spanning-tree
This command shows the configuration for the spanning tree.
Syntax
show spanning-tree [interface]
interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
Console#spanning-tree protocol-migration ethernet 1/5
Console#

4-148
4
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• Use the show spanning-tree command with no parameters to display the
spanning tree configuration for the switch and for every interface in the tree.
• Use the show spanning-tree interface command to display the spanning tree
configuration for a specific interface.
• For a description of the items displayed under “Spanning-tree information,”
see “Configuring Global Settings” on page 3-96. For a description of the items
displayed for specific interfaces, see “Displaying Interface Settings” on
page 3-99.
Example
Console#show spanning-tree
Spanning-tree information
---------------------------------------------------------------
Spanning tree mode: RSTP
Spanning tree enabled/disabled: enabled
Priority: 40960
Bridge Hello Time (sec.): 2
Bridge Max Age (sec.): 20
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.): 15
Root Hello Time (sec.): 2
Root Max Age (sec.): 20
Root Forward Delay (sec.): 15
Designated Root: 32768.0.0000ABCD0000
Current root port: 1
Current root cost: 50000
Number of topology changes: 5
Last topology changes time (sec.):226
Transmission limit: 3
Path Cost Method: long
---------------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/ 1 information
---------------------------------------------------------------
Admin status: enabled
Role: root
State: forwarding
Path cost: 100000
Priority: 128
Designated cost: 200000
Designated port: 128.24
Designated root: 32768.0.0000ABCD0000
Designated bridge: 32768.0.0030F1552000
Fast forwarding: enabled
Forward transitions: 1
Admin edge port: enabled
Oper edge port: disabled
Admin Link type: auto
Oper Link type: point-to-point
Spanning Tree Status: enabled
...
Console#

VLAN Commands
4-149
4
VLAN Commands
A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but
communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment. This section
describes commands used to create VLAN groups, add port members, specify how
VLAN tagging is used, and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected
interface.
Editing VLAN Groups
vlan database
This command enters VLAN database mode. All commands in this mode will take
effect immediately.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
• Use the VLAN database command mode to add, change, and delete VLANs.
After finishing configuration changes, you can display the VLAN settings by
entering the show vlan command.
• Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode
and add or remove ports from a VLAN. The results of these commands are
written to the running-configuration file, and you can display this file by
entering the show running-config command.
Table 4-51 VLANs
Editing VLAN Groups Sets up VLAN groups, including name, VID and state 4-149
Configuring VLAN
Interfaces
Configures VLAN interface parameters, including ingress and egress
tagging mode, ingress filtering, PVID, and GVRP
4-151
Displaying VLAN
Information
Displays VLAN groups, status, port members, and MAC addresses 4-156
Configuring Private VLANs Configures private VLANs, including uplink and downlink ports 4-158
Table 4-52 Editing VLAN Groups
vlan database Enters VLAN database mode to add, change, and delete
VLANs
GC 4-149
vlan Configures a VLAN, including VID, name and state VC 4-150

4-150
4
Example
Related Commands
show vlan (4-157)
vlan
This command configures a VLAN. Use the no form to restore the default settings or
delete a VLAN.
Syntax
vlan vlan-id [name vlan-name] media ethernet [state {active | suspend}]
no vlan vlan-id [name | state]
• vlan-id - ID of configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)
• name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.
- vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.
• media ethernet - Ethernet media type.
• state - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state.
- active - VLAN is operational.
- suspend - VLAN is suspended. Suspended VLANs do not pass packets.
Default Setting
By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active.
Command Mode
VLAN Database Configuration
Command Usage
• no vlan vlan-id deletes the VLAN.
• no vlan vlan-id name removes the VLAN name.
• no vlan vlan-id state returns the VLAN to the default state (i.e., active).
• You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch.
Example
The following example adds a VLAN, using VLAN ID 105 and name RD5. The VLAN
is activated by default.
Related Commands
show vlan (4-157)
Console(config)#vlan database
Console(config-vlan)#vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet

VLAN Commands
4-151
4
Configuring VLAN Interfaces
interface vlan
This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs, which is used to
configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface.
Syntax
interface vlan vlan-id
vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Example
The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to
VLAN 1, and then assign an IP address to the VLAN:
Related Commands
shutdown (4-113)
Table 4-53 Configuring VLAN Interfaces
interface vlan Enters interface configuration mode for a specified VLAN IC 4-151
switchport mode Configures VLAN membership mode for an interface IC 4-152
switchport
acceptable-frame-types
Configures frame types to be accepted by an interface IC 4-152
switchport ingress-filtering Enables ingress filtering on an interface IC 4-153
switchport native vlan Configures the PVID (native VLAN) of an interface IC 4-154
switchport allowed vlan Configures the VLANs associated with an interface IC 4-155
switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4-165
switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface IC 4-156
switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC 4-169
Console(config-if)#

4-152
4
switchport mode
This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port. Use the no form
to restore the default.
Syntax
switchport mode {trunk | hybrid | private-vlan}
no switchport mode
• trunk - Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A trunk is a direct
link between two switches, so the port transmits tagged frames that identify
the source VLAN. Note that frames belonging to the port’s default VLAN
(i.e., associated with the PVID) are also transmitted as tagged frames.
• hybrid - Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit tagged
or untagged frames.
• private-vlan - For an explanation of this command see “switchport mode
private-vlan” on page 4-161.
Default Setting
All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1.
Command Mode
Example
The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1, and then set the
switchport mode to hybrid:
Related Commands
switchport acceptable-frame-types (4-152)
switchport acceptable-frame-types
This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port. Use the no form to
Syntax
switchport acceptable-frame-types {all | tagged}
no switchport acceptable-frame-types
• all - The port accepts all frames, tagged or untagged.
• tagged - The port only receives tagged frames.
Default Setting
All frame types
Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid
Console(config-if)#

VLAN Commands
4-153
4
Command Mode
Command Usage
When set to receive all frame types, any received frames that are untagged
are assigned to the default VLAN.
Example
The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged
frames:
Related Commands
switchport mode (4-152)
switchport ingress-filtering
This command enables ingress filtering for an interface. Use the no form to restore
the default.
Syntax
[no] switchport ingress-filtering
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
• Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.
• If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for
which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded to all other ports (except
for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port).
• If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for
which it is not a member, these frames will be discarded.
• Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such as
GVRP or STA. However, they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames, such
as GMRP.
Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged
Console(config-if)#

4-154
4
Example
The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then enable
ingress filtering:
switchport native vlan
This command configures the PVID (i.e., default VLAN ID) for a port. Use the no
form to restore the default.
Syntax
switchport native vlan vlan-id
no switchport native vlan
vlan-id - Default VLAN ID for a port. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)
Default Setting
VLAN 1
Command Mode
Command Usage
• If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this
VLAN, the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged
member. For all other VLANs, an interface must first be configured as an
untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group.
• If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid, the
PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port.
Example
The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3:
Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering
Console(config-if)#
Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3
Console(config-if)#

VLAN Commands
4-155
4
switchport allowed vlan
This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface. Use the no form
to restore the default.
Syntax
switchport allowed vlan {add vlan-list [tagged | untagged] |
remove vlan-list}
no switchport allowed vlan
• add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.
• remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.
• vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no
spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. Do not enter leading
zeros. (Range: 1-4094).
Default Setting
All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default.
The default frame type is untagged.
Command Mode
Command Usage
• A port, or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid, must be assigned to at
least one VLAN as untagged.
• If a trunk has switchport mode set to trunk (i.e., 1Q Trunk), then you can only
assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member.
• Frames are always tagged within the switch. The tagged/untagged parameter
used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or
remove the tag from a frame on egress.
• If none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the
connection supports VLANs, the interface should be added to these VLANs
as an untagged member. Otherwise, it is only necessary to add at most one
VLAN as untagged, and this should correspond to the native VLAN for the
interface.
• If a VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that
interface, the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that
interface.
Example
The following example shows how to add VLANs 1, 2, 5 and 6 to the allowed list as
tagged VLANs for port 1:
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1,2,5,6 tagged
Console(config-if)#

4-156
4
switchport forbidden vlan
This command configures forbidden VLANs. Use the no form to remove the list of
forbidden VLANs.
Syntax
switchport forbidden vlan {add vlan-list | remove vlan-list}
no switchport forbidden vlan
• add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.
• remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.
• vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no
spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. Do not enter leading
zeros. (Range: 1-4094).
Default Setting
No VLANs are included in the forbidden list.
Command Mode
Command Usage
• This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the
specified interface via GVRP.
• If a VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an interface, then
you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for that same interface.
Example
The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to VLAN 3:
Displaying VLAN Information
Console(config-if)#switchport forbidden vlan add 3
Console(config-if)#
Table 4-54 Show VLAN Commands
show vlan Shows VLAN information NE, PE 4-157
show interfaces status vlan Displays status for the specified VLAN interface NE, PE 4-115
show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status of an
interface
NE, PE 4-117

VLAN Commands
4-157
4
show vlan
This command shows VLAN information.
Syntax
show vlan [id vlan-id | name vlan-name | private-vlan private-vlan-type]
• id - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID.
- vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)
• name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.
- vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.
• private-vlan - For an explanation of this command see “show vlan
private-vlan” on page 4-163
- private-vlan-type - Indicates the private vlan type.
(Options: Community, Isolated, Primary)
Default Setting
Shows all VLANs.
Command Mode
Example
The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1:
Console#show vlan id 1
Vlan ID: 1
Type: Static
Name: DefaultVlan
Status: Active
Ports/Port channel: Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 5(S)
Eth1/26(S)
Console#

4-158
4
Configuring Private VLANs
Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within
the assigned VLAN. This switch supports two types of private VLANs: primary/
secondary associated groups, and stand-alone isolated VLANs. A primary VLAN
contains promiscuous ports that can communicate with all other ports in the private
VLAN group, while a secondary (or community) VLAN contains community ports
that can only communicate with other hosts within the secondary VLAN and with any
of the promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN. Isolated VLANs, on the
other hand, consist a single stand-alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port
and one or more isolated (or host) ports. In all cases, the promiscuous ports are
designed to provide open access to an external network such as the Internet, while
the community or isolated ports provide restricted access to local users.
Multiple primary VLANs can be configured on this switch, and multiple community
VLANs can be associated with each primary VLAN. One or more isolated VLANs
can also be configured. (Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist
simultaneously within the same switch.)
This section describes commands used to configure private VLANs.
To configure primary/secondary associated groups, follow these steps:
1. Use the private-vlan command to designate one or more community VLANs
and the primary VLAN that will channel traffic outside of the community groups.
2. Use the private-vlan association command to map the community VLAN(s) to
the primary VLAN.
Table 4-55 Private VLAN Commands
Edit Private VLAN Groups
private-vlan Adds or deletes primary, community, or isolated VLANs VC 4-159
private-vlan association Associates a community VLAN with a primary VLAN VC 4-160
Configure Private VLAN Interfaces
switchport mode
private-vlan
Sets an interface to host mode or promiscuous mode IC 4-161
switchport private-vlan
host-association
Associates an interface with a secondary VLAN IC 4-161
isolated
Associates an interface with an isolated VLAN. IC 4-162
mapping
Maps an interface to a primary VLAN IC 4-163
Display Private VLAN Information
show vlan private-vlan Shows private VLAN information NE,
PE
4-163

VLAN Commands
4-159
4
3. Use the switchport mode private-vlan command to configure ports as
promiscuous (i.e., having access to all ports in the primary VLAN) or host (i.e.,
community port).
4. Use the switchport private-vlan host-association command to assign a port
to a secondary VLAN.
5. Use the switchport private-vlan mapping command to assign a port to a
primary VLAN.
6. Use the show vlan private-vlan command to verify your configuration settings.
To configure isolated VLANs, follow these steps:
1. Use the private-vlan command to designate an isolated VLAN that will contain
a single promiscuous port and one or more isolated ports.
2. Use the switchport mode private-vlan command to configure one port as
promiscuous (i.e., having access to all ports in the isolated VLAN) one or more
ports as host (i.e., isolated port).
3. Use the switchport private-vlan isolated command to assign a port to an
isolated VLAN.
4. Use the show vlan private-vlan command to verify your configuration settings.
private-vlan
Use this command to create a primary, community, or isolated private VLAN. Use
the no form to remove the specified private VLAN.
Syntax
private-vlan vlan-id {community | primary | isolated}
no private-vlan vlan-id
• vlan-id - ID of private VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes).
• community - A VLAN in which traffic is restricted to host members in the
same VLAN and to promiscuous ports in the associate primary VLAN.
• primary - A VLAN which can contain one or more community VLANs, and
serves to channel traffic between community VLANs and other locations.
• isolated – Specifies an isolated VLAN. Ports assigned to an isolated VLAN
can only communicate with the promiscuous port within their own VLAN.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
VLAN Configuration
Command Usage
• Private VLANs are used to restrict traffic to ports within the same community
or isolated VLAN, and channel traffic passing outside the community through
promiscuous ports. When using community VLANs, they must be mapped to

4-160
4
an associated “primary” VLAN that contains promiscuous ports. When using
an isolated VLAN, it must be configured to contain a single promiscuous port.
• Port membership for private VLANs is static. Once a port has been assigned
to a private VLAN, it cannot be dynamically moved to another VLAN via GVRP.
• Private VLAN ports cannot be set to trunked mode. (See “switchport mode” on
page 4-152.)
Example
private vlan association
Use this command to associate a primary VLAN with a secondary (i.e., community)
VLAN. Use the no form to remove all associations for the specified primary VLAN.
Syntax
private-vlan primary-vlan-id association {secondary-vlan-id |
add secondary-vlan-id | remove secondary-vlan-id}
no private-vlan primary-vlan-id association
• primary-vlan-id - ID of primary VLAN.
(Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes).
• secondary-vlan-id - ID of secondary (i.e, community) VLAN.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
VLAN Configuration
Command Usage
Secondary VLANs provide security for group members. The associated
primary VLAN provides a common interface for access to other network
resources within the primary VLAN (e.g., servers configured with promiscuous
ports) and to resources outside of the primary VLAN (via promiscuous ports).
Example
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 2 primary
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 3 community
Console(config)#
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 2 association 3
Console(config)#

VLAN Commands
4-161
4
switchport mode private-vlan
Use this command to set the private VLAN mode for an interface. Use the no form to
restore the default setting.
Syntax
switchport mode private-vlan {host | promiscuous}
no switchport mode private-vlan
• host – This port type can subsequently be assigned to a community or
isolated VLAN.
• promiscuous – This port type can communicate with all other promiscuous
ports in the same primary VLAN, as well as with all the ports in the
associated secondary VLANs.
Default Setting
Normal VLAN
Command Mode
Command Usage
• To assign a promiscuous port to a primary VLAN, use the switchport
private-vlan mapping command. To assign a host port to a community
VLAN, use the private-vlan host association command.
• To assign a promiscuous port or host port to an isolated VLAN, use the
switchport private-vlan isolated command.
Example
switchport private-vlan host-association
Use this command to associate an interface with a secondary VLAN. Use the no
form to remove this association.
Syntax
switchport private-vlan host-association secondary-vlan-id
no switchport private-vlan host-association
secondary-vlan-id - ID of secondary (i.e., community) VLAN.
Default Setting
None
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan host
Console(config-if)#

4-162
4
Command Mode
Command Usage
All ports assigned to a secondary (i.e., community) VLAN can pass traffic
between group members, but must communicate with resources outside of the
group via promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN.
Example
switchport private-vlan isolated
Use this command to assign an interface to an isolated VLAN. Use the no form to
remove this assignment.
Syntax
switchport private-vlan isolated isolated-vlan-id
no switchport private-vlan isolated
isolated-vlan-id - ID of isolated VLAN. (Range: 1-4094).
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
Host ports assigned to a isolated VLAN cannot pass traffic between group
members, and must communicate with resources outside of the group via a
promiscuous port.
Example
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 3
Console(config-if)#
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan isolated 3
Console(config-if)#

VLAN Commands
4-163
4
switchport private-vlan mapping
Use this command to map an interface to a primary VLAN. Use the no form to
remove this mapping.
Syntax
switchport private-vlan mapping primary-vlan-id
no switchport private-vlan mapping
primary-vlan-id – ID of primary VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes).
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
Promiscuous ports assigned to a primary VLAN can communicate with any
other promiscuous ports in the same VLAN, and with the group members
within any associated secondary VLANs.
Example
show vlan private-vlan
Use this command to show the private VLAN configuration settings on this switch.
Syntax
show vlan private-vlan [community | isolated | primary]
• community – Displays all community VLANs, along with their associated
primary VLAN and assigned host interfaces.
• isolated – Displays an isolated VLAN, along with the assigned
promiscuous interface and host interfaces. The Primary and Secondary
fields both display the isolated VLAN ID.
• primary – Displays all primary VLANs, along with any assigned
promiscuous interfaces.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Executive
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan mapping 2
Console(config-if)#

4-164
4
Example
GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN
information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across
the network. This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces
and globally for the switch, as well as how to display default configuration settings
for the Bridge Extension MIB.
bridge-ext gvrp
This command enables GVRP globally for the switch. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] bridge-ext gvrp
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to
register VLAN members on ports across the network. This function should be
enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration, and to support VLANs which
extend beyond the local switch.
Console#show vlan private-vlan
-------- ----------- ---------- ------------------------------
5 primary Eth1/ 3
0 8 isolated
Console#
Table 4-56 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands
bridge-ext gvrp Enables GVRP globally for the switch GC 4-164
show bridge-ext Shows the global bridge extension configuration PE 4-165
switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4-165
switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface IC 4-156
show gvrp configuration Displays GVRP configuration for the selected interface NE, PE 4-166
garp timer Sets the GARP timer for the selected function IC 4-166
show garp timer Shows the GARP timer for the selected function NE, PE 4-167

4-165
4
Example
show bridge-ext
This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
See “Displaying Basic VLAN Information” on page 3-107 and “Displaying
Bridge Extension Capabilities” on page 3-11 for a description of the displayed
items.
Example
switchport gvrp
This command enables GVRP for a port. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] switchport gvrp
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#bridge-ext gvrp
Console(config)#
Console#show bridge-ext
Max support vlan numbers: 255
Max support vlan ID: 4094
VLAN learning: IVL
Global GVRP status: Enabled
GMRP: Disabled
Console#
Console(config-if)#switchport gvrp
Console(config-if)#

4-166
4
show gvrp configuration
This command shows if GVRP is enabled.
Syntax
show gvrp configuration [interface]
interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Default Setting
Shows both global and interface-specific configuration.
Command Mode
Example
garp timer
This command sets the values for the join, leave and leaveall timers. Use the no
form to restore the timers’ default values.
Syntax
garp timer {join | leave | leaveall} timer_value
no garp timer {join | leave | leaveall}
• {join | leave | leaveall} - Which timer to set.
• timer_value - Value of timer.
Ranges:
join: 20-1000 centiseconds
leave: 60-3000 centiseconds
leaveall: 500-18000 centiseconds
Default Setting
• join: 20 centiseconds
• leave: 60 centiseconds
• leaveall: 1000 centiseconds
Command Mode
Console#show gvrp configuration ethernet 1/6
Eth 1/ 6:
GVRP configuration: Enabled
Console#

4-167
4
Command Usage
• Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to register
or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN. The
default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access
method or data rate. These values should not be changed unless you are
experiencing difficulties with GMRP or GVRP registration/deregistration.
• Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs.
• Timer values must meet the following restrictions:
- leave >= (2 x join)
- leaveall > leave
Note: Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same network to
the same values. Otherwise, GVRP may not operate successfully.
Example
Related Commands
show garp timer (4-167)
show garp timer
This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface.
Syntax
show garp timer [interface]
interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Default Setting
Shows all GARP timers.
Command Mode
Console(config-if)#garp timer join 100
Console(config-if)#

4-168
4
Example
Related Commands
garp timer (4-166)
Priority Commands
The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets
have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion.
This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each port. Data packets in a
port’s high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority
queues. You can set the default priority for each interface, the relative weight of each
queue, and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch’s priority queues.
Priority Commands (Layer 2)
Console#show garp timer ethernet 1/1
Eth 1/ 1 GARP timer status:
Join timer: 100 centiseconds
Leave timer: 60 centiseconds
Leaveall timer: 1000 centiseconds
Console#
Table 4-57 Priority Commands
Priority (Layer 2) Configures default priority for untagged frames, sets queue weights,
and maps class of service tags to hardware queues
4-168
Priority (Layer 3 and 4) Maps TCP ports, IP precedence tags, or IP DSCP tags to class of
service values
4-174
Table 4-58 Priority Commands (Layer 2)
queue mode Sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted
Round-Robin (WRR)
GC 4-169
switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC 4-169
queue bandwidth Assigns round-robin weights to the priority queues GC 4-170
queue cos map Assigns class-of-service values to the priority queues IC 4-171
show queue mode Shows the current queue mode PE 4-172
show queue bandwidth Shows round-robin weights assigned to the priority queues PE 4-172
show queue cos-map Shows the class-of-service map PE 4-173
showinterfacesswitchport Displays the administrative and operational status of an
interface
PE 4-117

Priority Commands
4-169
4
queue mode
This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round-Robin
(WRR) for the class of service (CoS) priority queues. Use the no form to restore the
default value.
Syntax
queue mode {strict | wrr}
no queue mode
• strict - Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting all
traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues.
• wrr - Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using
scheduling weights 1, 2, 4, 6 for queues 0 - 3 respectively.
Default Setting
Weighted Round Robin
Command Mode
Command Usage
You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that
requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower
priority queues are serviced, or use Weighted Round-Robin (WRR) queuing
that specifies a relative weight of each queue. WRR uses a predefined relative
weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the
switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue. This
prevents the head-of-line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing.
Example
The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode:
switchport priority default
This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames. Use the no form to
restore the default value.
Syntax
switchport priority default default-priority-id
no switchport priority default
default-priority-id - The priority number for untagged ingress traffic.
The priority is a number from 0 to 7. Seven is the highest priority.
Console(config)#queue mode strict
Console(config)#

4-170
4
Default Setting
The priority is not set, and the default value for untagged frames received on
the interface is zero.
Command Mode
Command Usage
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,
and default switchport priority.
• The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to
accept all frame types (i.e, receives both untagged and tagged frames). This
priority does not apply to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frames. If the incoming
frame is an IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frame, the IEEE 802.1p User Priority
bits will be used.
• This switch provides eight priority queues for each port. It is configured to use
Weighted Round Robin, which can be viewed with the show queue
bandwidth command. Inbound frames that do not have VLAN tags are
tagged with the input port’s default ingress user priority, and then placed in the
appropriate priority queue at the output port. The default priority for all ingress
ports is zero. Therefore, any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will
be placed in queue 0 of the output port. (Note that if the output port is an
untagged member of the associated VLAN, these frames are stripped of all
VLAN tags prior to transmission.)
Example
The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5:
queue bandwidth
This command assigns weighted round-robin (WRR) weights to the four class of
service (CoS) priority queues. Use the no form to restore the default weights.
Syntax
queue bandwidth weight1...weight3
no queue bandwidth
weight1...weight3 - The ratio of weights for queues 0-3 determines the
weights used by the WRR scheduler. However, note that Queue 0 is fixed
at a weight of 1, and cannot be configured. (Range: 1-31)
Default Setting
Weights 1, 2, 4, 6 are assigned to queues 0-3 respectively.
Queue 0 is non-configurable.
Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5

Priority Commands
4-171
4
Command Mode
Command Usage
WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling
weights.
Example
This example shows how to assign WRR weights to priority queues 1 - 3:
Related Commands
show queue bandwidth (4-172)
queue cos-map
This command assigns class of service (CoS) values to the priority queues (i.e.,
hardware output queues 0 - 3). Use the no form set the CoS map to the default
values.
Syntax
queue cos-map queue_id [cos1 ... cosn]
no queue cos-map
• queue_id - The ID of the priority queue.
Ranges are 0 to 3, where 3 is the highest priority queue.
• cos1 .. cosn - The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID. It is a
space-separated list of numbers. The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7,
where 7 is the highest priority.
Default Setting
This switch supports Class of Service by using four priority queues, with
Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port. Eight separate traffic classes
are defined in IEEE 802.1p. The default priority levels are assigned according
to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard as shown below.
Command Mode
Console(config)#queue bandwidth 6 9 12
Console(config)#
Table 4-59 Default CoS Priority Levels
Queue 0 1 2 3
Priority 1, 2 0, 3 4, 5 6, 7

4-172
4
Command Usage
• CoS values assigned at the ingress port are also used at the egress port.
• This command sets the CoS priority for all interfaces.
Example
The following example shows how to map CoS values 0, 1 and 2 to egress queue 0,
value 3 to egress queue 1, values 4 and 5 to egress queue 2, and values 6 and 7 to
egress queue 3:
Related Commands
show queue cos-map (4-173)
show queue mode
This command shows the current queue mode.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
show queue bandwidth
This command displays the weighted round-robin (WRR) bandwidth allocation for
the four priority queues.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 0 0 1 2
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 2 4 5
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 3 6 7
Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1
CoS Value : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Console#
Console#show queue mode
Queue mode: wrr
Console#

Priority Commands
4-173
4
Example
show queue cos-map
This command shows the class of service priority map.
Syntax
show queue cos-map [interface]
interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show queue bandwidth
Queue ID Weight
-------- ------
0 1
1 2
2 4
3 6
Console#
Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1
CoS Value : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Console#

4-174
4
Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4)
map ip port (Global Configuration)
This command enables IP port mapping (i.e., class of service mapping for TCP/UDP
sockets). Use the no form to disable IP port mapping.
Syntax
[no] map ip port
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,
Example
The following example shows how to enable TCP/UDP port mapping globally:
Table 4-60 Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4)
map ip port Enables TCP class of service mapping GC 4-174
map ip port Maps TCP socket to a class of service IC 4-175
map ip precedence Enables IP precedence class of service mapping GC 4-174
map ip precedence Maps IP precedence value to a class of service IC 4-176
map ip dscp Enables IP DSCP class of service mapping GC 4-177
map ip dscp Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service IC 4-177
map access-list ip Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for
IC 4-95
map access-list mac Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for
IC 4-100
show map ip port Shows the IP port map PE 4-179
show map ip precedence Shows the IP precedence map PE 4-179
show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map PE 4-180
show map access-list ip Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface PE 4-96
show map access-list mac Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface PE 4-101
Console(config)#map ip port
Console(config)#

Priority Commands
4-175
4
map ip port (Interface Configuration)
This command set IP port priority (i.e., TCP/UDP port priority). Use the no form to
remove a specific setting.
Syntax
map ip port port number cos cos-value
no map ip port port-number
• port-number - 16-bit TCP/UDP port number.(Range 1-65535)
• cos-value - Class-of-Service value. (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
• This command sets the IP port priority for all interfaces.
Example
The following example shows how to map HTTP traffic to CoS value 0:
map ip precedence (Global Configuration)
This command enables IP precedence mapping (i.e., IP Type of Service). Use the
no form to disable IP precedence mapping.
Syntax
[no] map ip precedence
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
• IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of these
priority types will automatically disable the other type.
Console(config-if)#map ip port 80 cos 0
Console(config-if)#

4-176
4
Example
The following example shows how to enable IP precedence mapping globally:
map ip precedence (Interface Configuration)
This command sets IP precedence priority (i.e., IP Type of Service priority). Use the
no form to restore the default table.
Syntax
map ip precedence ip-precedence-value cos cos-value
no map ip precedence
• precedence-value - 3-bit precedence value. (Range: 0-7)
• cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
The list below shows the default priority mapping.
Command Mode
Command Usage
• IP Precedence values are mapped to default Class of Service values on a
one-to-one basis according to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard,
and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues.
• This command sets the IP Precedence for all interfaces.
Example
The following example shows how to map IP precedence value 1 to CoS value 0:
Console(config)#map ip precedence
Console(config)#
Table 4-61 Mapping IP Precedence Values
IP Precedence Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CoS Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Console(config-if)#map ip precedence 1 cos 0
Console(config-if)#

Priority Commands
4-177
4
map ip dscp (Global Configuration)
This command enables IP DSCP mapping (i.e., Differentiated Services Code Point
mapping). Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping.
Syntax
[no] map ip dscp
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
• IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of these
priority types will automatically disable the other type.
Example
The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally:
map ip dscp (Interface Configuration)
This command sets IP DSCP priority (i.e., Differentiated Services Code Point
priority). Use the no form to restore the default table.
Syntax
map ip dscp dscp-value cos cos-value
no map ip dscp
• dscp-value - 8-bit DSCP value. (Range: 0-63)
• cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)
Console(config)#map ip dscp
Console(config)#

4-178
4
Default Setting
The DSCP default values are defined in the following table. Note that all the
DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0.
Command Mode
Command Usage
• DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according
to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard, and then subsequently
mapped to the four hardware priority queues.
• This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces.
Example
The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 to CoS value 0:
Table 4-62 IP DSCP to CoS Vales
IP DSCP Value CoS Value
0 0
8 1
10, 12, 14, 16 2
18, 20, 22, 24 3
26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36 4
38, 40, 42 5
48 6
46, 56 7
Console(config-if)#map ip dscp 1 cos 0
Console(config-if)#

Priority Commands
4-179
4
show map ip port
Use this command to show the IP port priority map.
Syntax
show map ip port [interface]
interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following shows that HTTP traffic has been mapped to CoS value 0:
Related Commands
map ip port (Global Configuration) (4-174)
map ip port (Interface Configuration) (4-175)
show map ip precedence
This command shows the IP precedence priority map.
Syntax
show map ip precedence [interface]
interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Console#show map ip port
TCP port mapping status: disabled
Port Port no. COS
--------- -------- ---
Eth 1/ 5 80 0
Console#

4-180
4
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
map ip port (Global Configuration) (4-174)
map ip precedence (Interface Configuration) (4-176)
show map ip dscp
This command shows the IP DSCP priority map.
Syntax
show map ip dscp [interface]
interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console#show map ip precedence ethernet 1/5
Precedence mapping status: disabled
Port Precedence COS
--------- ---------- ---
Eth 1/ 5 0 0
Eth 1/ 5 1 1
Eth 1/ 5 2 2
Eth 1/ 5 3 3
Eth 1/ 5 4 4
Eth 1/ 5 5 5
Eth 1/ 5 6 6
Eth 1/ 5 7 7
Console#

Multicast Filtering Commands
4-181
4
Example
Related Commands
map ip dscp (Global Configuration) (4-177)
map ip dscp (Interface Configuration) (4-177)
This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) to query for any
attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service. It identifies the ports
containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only. It then
propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch/router to
ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.
IGMP Snooping Commands
Console#show map ip dscp ethernet 1/1
DSCP mapping status: disabled
Port DSCP COS
--------- ---- ---
Eth 1/ 1 0 0
Eth 1/ 1 1 0
Eth 1/ 1 2 0
Eth 1/ 1 3 0...
Eth 1/ 1 61 0
Eth 1/ 1 62 0
Eth 1/ 1 63 0
Console#
Table 4-63 Multicast Filtering Commands
IGMP Snooping Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping or static assignment,
sets the IGMP version, displays current snooping and query settings,
and displays the multicast service and group members
4-181
IGMP Query Configures IGMP query parameters for multicast filtering at Layer 2 4-185
Static Multicast Routing Configures static multicast router ports 4-188
Table 4-64 IGMP Snooping Commands
ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP snooping GC 4-182
ip igmp snooping vlan static Adds an interface as a member of a multicast group GC 4-182
ip igmp snooping version Configures the IGMP version for snooping GC 4-183
show ip igmp snooping Shows the IGMP snooping and query configuration PE 4-183
multicast
Shows the IGMP snooping MAC multicast list PE 4-184

4-182
4
ip igmp snooping
This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Example
The following example enables IGMP snooping.
ip igmp snooping vlan static
This command adds a port to a multicast group. Use the no form to remove the port.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id static ip-address interface
• ip-address - IP address for multicast group
• interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Example
The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port:
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping
Console(config)#
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224.0.0.12 ethernet 1/5
Console(config)#

4-183
4
ip igmp snooping version
This command configures the IGMP snooping version. Use the no form to restore
the default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping version {1 | 2}
no ip igmp snooping version
• 1 - IGMP Version 1
• 2 - IGMP Version 2
Default Setting
IGMP Version 2
Command Mode
Command Usage
• All systems on the subnet must support the same version. If there are legacy
devices in your network that only support Version 1, you will also have to
configure this switch to use Version 1.
• Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2, including ip igmp
query-max-response-time and ip igmp query-timeout.
Example
The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1:
show ip igmp snooping
This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
See “Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters” on page 3-135 for a
description of the displayed items.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version 1
Console(config)#

4-184
4
Example
The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration:
show mac-address-table multicast
This command shows known multicast addresses.
Syntax
show mac-address-table multicast [vlan vlan-id] [user | igmp-snooping]
• vlan-id - VLAN ID (1 to 4094)
• user - Display only the user-configured multicast entries.
• igmp-snooping - Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Member types displayed include IGMP or USER, depending on selected
options.
Example
The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for
VLAN 1:
Console#show ip igmp snooping
Service status: Enabled
Querier status: Enabled
Query count: 2
Query interval: 125 sec
Query max response time: 10 sec
Router port expire time: 300 sec
IGMP snooping version: Version 2
Console#
Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1 igmp-snooping
---- --------------- ------------ -------
1 224.1.2.3 Eth1/11 IGMP
Console#

4-185
4
IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2)
ip igmp snooping querier
This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping querier
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
If enabled, the switch will serve as querier if elected. The querier is
responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic.
Example
ip igmp snooping query-count
This command configures the query count. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping query-count count
no ip igmp snooping query-count
count - The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been
no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the
multicast group. (Range: 2-10)
Table 4-65 IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2)
ip igmp snooping querier Allows this device to act as the querier for IGMP snooping GC 4-185
ip igmp snooping
query-count
Configures the query count GC 4-185
ip igmp snooping
query-interval
Configures the query interval GC 4-186
ip igmp snooping
query-max-response-time
Configures the report delay GC 4-187
ip igmp snooping
router-port-expire-time
Configures the query timeout GC 4-187
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier
Console(config)#

4-186
4
Default Setting
2 times
Command Mode
Command Usage
The query count defines how long the querier waits for a response from a
multicast client before taking action. If a querier has sent a number of queries
defined by this command, but a client has not responded, a countdown timer
is started using the time defined by ip igmp snooping query-max-
response-time. If the countdown finishes, and the client still has not
responded, then that client is considered to have left the multicast group.
Example
The following shows how to configure the query count to 10:
Related Commands
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time (4-187)
ip igmp snooping query-interval
This command configures the query interval. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping query-interval seconds
no ip igmp snooping query-interval
seconds - The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host-query
Default Setting
125 seconds
Command Mode
Example
The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds:
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-count 10
Console(config)#
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 100
Console(config)#

4-187
4
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time
This command configures the query report delay. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time seconds
no ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time
seconds - The report delay advertised in IGMP queries. (Range: 5-25)
Default Setting
10 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
• The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect.
• This command defines the time after a query, during which a response is
expected from a multicast client. If a querier has sent a number of queries
defined by the ip igmp snooping query-count, but a client has not
responded, a countdown timer is started using an initial value set by this
command. If the countdown finishes, and the client still has not responded,
then that client is considered to have left the multicast group.
Example
The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds:
Related Commands
ip igmp snooping version (4-183)
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time (4-187)
ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time
This command configures the query timeout. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time seconds
no ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time
seconds - The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before
it considers the router port (i.e., the interface which had been receiving
query packets) to have expired.
(Range: 300-500)
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 20
Console(config)#

4-188
4
Default Setting
300 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
The switch must use IGMPv2 for this command to take effect.
Example
The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds:
Related Commands
ip igmp snooping version (4-183)
Static Multicast Routing Commands
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter
This command statically configures a multicast router port. Use the no form to
remove the configuration.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter interface
• interface
(Range – XB30330: 1-8, XB30350: 1-4)
Default Setting
No static multicast router ports are configured.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 300
Console(config)#
Table 4-66 Static Multicast Routing Commands
ip igmp snooping vlan
mrouter
Adds a multicast router port GC 4-188
show ip igmp snooping
mrouter
Shows multicast router ports PE 4-189

4-189
4
Command Mode
Command Usage
Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be
able to locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a known
multicast router/switch connected over the network to an interface (port or
trunk) on your router, you can manually configure that interface to join all the
current multicast groups.
Example
The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1:
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned
multicast router ports.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-id]
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Multicast router port types displayed include Static.
Example
The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router:
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/11
Console(config)#
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1
VLAN M'cast Router Ports Type
---- ------------------- -------
1 Eth 1/11 Static
2 Eth 1/12 Static
Console#

4-190
4
IP Interface Commands
An IP addresses may be used for management access to the switch over your
network. The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default. You can
manually configure a specific IP address, or direct the device to obtain an address
from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is powered on. You may also need to a
establish a default gateway between this device and management stations or other
devices that exist on another network segment.
ip address
This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VLAN interface. Use
the no form to restore the default IP address.
Syntax
ip address {ip-address netmask | bootp | dhcp}
no ip address
• ip-address - IP address
• netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies
the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets.
• bootp - Obtains IP address from BOOTP.
• dhcp - Obtains IP address from DHCP.
Default Setting
DHCP
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN)
Command Usage
• You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access
over the network. You can manually configure a specific IP address, or direct
the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server. Valid IP
addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything
outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program.
Table 4-67 IP Interface Commands
ip address Sets the IP address for the current interface IC 4-190
ip default-gateway Defines the default gateway through which this switch can reach
other subnetworks
GC 4-191
ip dhcp restart Submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request PE 4-192
show ip interface Displays the IP settings for this device PE 4-192
show ip redirects Displays the default gateway configured for this device PE 4-193
ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the
network
NE,
PE
4-193

4-191
4
• If you select the bootp or dhcp option, IP is enabled but will not function until
a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received. Requests will be broadcast
periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address. (BOOTP and
DHCP values can include the IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask).
• You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an ip dhcp
restart command, or by rebooting the switch.
Note: Only one VLAN interface can be assigned an IP address (the default is
VLAN 1). This defines the management VLAN, the only VLAN through
which you can gain management access to the switch. If you assign an IP
address to any other VLAN, the new IP address overrides the original IP
address and this becomes the new management VLAN.
Example
In the following example, the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1.
Related Commands
ip dhcp restart (4-192)
ip default-gateway
This command establishes a static route between this switch and devices that exist
on another network segment. Use the no form to remove the static route.
Syntax
ip default-gateway gateway
no ip default-gateway
gateway - IP address of the default gateway
Default Setting
No static route is established.
Command Mode
Command Usage
A gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a different
IP segment.
Example
The following example defines a default gateway for this device:
Related Commands
show ip redirects (4-193)
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#

4-192
4
ip dhcp restart
This command submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface
that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip address command.
• DHCP requires the server to reassign the client’s last address if available.
• If the BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain, the
network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new
domain.
Example
In the following example, the device is reassigned the same address.
Related Commands
ip address (4-190)
show ip interface
This command displays the settings of an IP interface.
Default Setting
All interfaces
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
show ip redirects (4-193)
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp
Console#ip dhcp restart
and address mode: DHCP.
Console#
Console#

4-193
4
show ip redirects
This command shows the default gateway configured for this device.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
ip default-gateway (4-191)
ping
This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network.
Syntax
ping host [size size] [count count]
• host - IP address or IP alias of the host.
• size - Number of bytes in a packet. (Range: 32-512, default: 32)
The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified
because the switch adds header information.
• count - Number of packets to send. (Range: 1-16, default: 5)
Default Setting
This command has no default for the host.
Command Mode
Command Usage
• Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached.
• Following are some results of the ping command:
- Normal response - The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds,
depending on network traffic.
- Destination does not respond - If the host does not respond, a “timeout”
appears in ten seconds.
- Destination unreachable - The gateway for this destination indicates that
the destination is unreachable.
- Network or host unreachable - The gateway found no corresponding entry
in the route table.
• Press <Esc> to stop pinging.
Console#show ip redirects
IP default gateway 10.1.0.254
Console#

4-194
4
Example
Related Commands
interface (4-108)
Console#ping 10.1.0.9
Type ESC to abort.
PING to 10.1.0.9, by 5 32-byte payload ICMP packets, timeout is 5 seconds
response time: 10 ms
Ping statistics for 10.1.0.9:
5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received (100%), 0 packets lost (0%)
Approximate round trip times:
Minimum = 10 ms, Maximum = 20 ms, Average = 10 ms
Console#

A-1
Appendix A: Software Specifications
Software Features
Authentication
Local, RADIUS, TACACS, Port (802.1X), HTTPS, SSH, Port Security
IP, MAC (up to 88 lists)
DHCP Client
Port Configuration
100BASE-TX: 10/100 Mbps, half/full duplex
1000BASE-T: 10/100 Mbps at half/full duplex, 1000 Mbps at full duplex
Flow Control
Full Duplex: IEEE 802.3-2002
Half Duplex: Back pressure
Broadcast Storm Control
Traffic throttled above a critical threshold
Port Mirroring
One source port, one destination port
Rate Limits
Input Limit
Output limit
Range (configured per port)
Port Trunking
Static trunks (Cisco EtherChannel compliant)
Dynamic trunks (Link Aggregation Control Protocol)
Spanning Tree Algorithm
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP, IEEE 802.1D)
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP, IEEE 802.1w)
VLAN Support
Up to 255 groups; port-based or tagged (802.1Q),
GVRP for automatic VLAN learning, private VLANs
Class of Service
Supports four levels of priority and Weighted Round Robin Queueing
(which can be configured by VLAN tag or port),
Layer 3/4 priority mapping: IP Port, IP Precedence, IP DSCP
Multicast Filtering
IGMP Snooping (Layer 2)

Software Specifications
A-2
A
Additional Features
BOOTP client
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
RMON (Remote Monitoring, groups 1,2,3,9)
SMTP Email Alerts
Management Features
In-Band Management
Telnet, Web-based HTTP or HTTPS, SNMP manager, or Secure Shell
Out-of-Band Management
RS-232 DB-9 console port
Software Loading
TFTP in-band or XModem out-of-band
SNMP
Management access via MIB database
Trap management to specified hosts
RMON
Groups 1, 2, 3, 9 (Statistics, History, Alarm, Event)
Standards
IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities
IEEE 802.1p Priority tags
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1X Port Authentication
IEEE 802.3-2002
Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet
Full-duplex flow control
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
IEEE 802.3ac VLAN tagging
DHCP Client (RFC 1541)
HTTPS
IGMP (RFC 1112)
IGMPv2 (RFC 2236)
RADIUS+ (RFC 2618)
RMON (RFC 1757 groups 1,2,3,9)
SNMP (RFC 1157)
SNMPv2 (RFC 2571)
SNTP (RFC 2030)
SSH (Version 2.0)
TFTP (RFC 1350)

Management Information Bases
A-3
A
Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)
Entity MIB (RFC 2737)
Ether-like MIB (RFC 2665)
Extended Bridge MIB (RFC 2674)
Extensible SNMP Agents MIB (RFC 2742)
Forwarding Table MIB (RFC 2096)
IGMP MIB (RFC 2933)
Interface Group MIB (RFC 2233)
Interfaces Evolution MIB (RFC 2863)
IP Multicasting related MIBs
MAU MIB (RFC 2668)
MIB II (RFC 1213)
Port Access Entity MIB (IEEE 802.1X)
Port Access Entity Equipment MIB
Private MIB
RADIUS Authentication Client MIB (RFC 2621)
RMON MIB (RFC 2819)
RMON II Probe Configuration Group (RFC 2021, partial implementation)
SNMP Community MIB (RFC 2576)
SNMPv2 IP MIB (RFC 2011)
TACACS+ Authentication Client MIB
TCP MIB (RFC 2013)
Trap (RFC 1215)
UDP MIB (RFC 2012)

B-1
Appendix B: Troubleshooting
Problems Accessing the Management Interface
Table B-1 Troubleshooting Chart
Symptom Action
CannotconnectusingTelnet,
web browser, or SNMP
software
• Be sure the switch is powered up.
• Check network cabling between the management station and the switch.
• Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the
port you are using has not been disabled.
• Be sure you have configured the VLAN interface through which the
management station is connected with a valid IP address, subnet mask
and default gateway.
• Be sure the management station has an IP address in the same subnet as
the switch’s IP interface to which it is connected.
• If you are trying to connect to the switch via the IP address for a tagged
VLAN group, your management station, and the ports connecting
intermediate switches in the network, must be configured with the
appropriate tag.
• If you cannot connect using Telnet, you may have exceeded the maximum
number of concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions permitted. Try connecting
again at a later time.
Cannot connect using
Secure Shell
• If you cannot connect using SSH, you may have exceeded the maximum
number of concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions permitted. Try connecting
again at a later time.
• Be sure the control parameters for the SSH server are properly configured
on the switch, and that the SSH client software is properly configured on
the management station.
• Be sure you have generated a public key on the switch, and exported this
key to the SSH client.
• Be sure you have set up an account on the switch for each SSH user,
including user name, authentication level, and password.
• Be sure you have imported the client’s public key to the switch (if public
key authentication is used).
Cannot access the on-board
configuration program via a
serial port connection
• Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible,
8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, and 9600 bps.
• Check that the null-modem serial cable conforms to the pin-out
connections provided in the Installation Guide.
Forgot or lost the password • Contact your local distributor.

Troubleshooting
B-2
B
Using System Logs
If a fault does occur, refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the problem you
encountered is actually caused by the switch. If the problem appears to be caused
by the switch, follow these steps:
1. Enable logging.
2. Set the error messages reported to include all categories.
3. Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages.
4. Repeat the sequence of commands or other actions that lead up to the error.
5. Make a list of the commands or circumstances that led to the fault. Also make a
list of any error messages displayed.
6. Contact your distributor’s service engineer.
For example:
Console(config)#logging on
Console(config)#logging history flash 7
Console(config)#snmp-server host 192.168.1.23
.
.
.

Glossary-1
Glossary
Access Control List (ACL)
ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by
checking each packet for certain IP or MAC (i.e., Layer 2) information.
Boot Protocol (BOOTP)
BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices, including IP
address information, the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices
system files, and the name of the boot file.
Class of Service (CoS)
CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service, and
then placing them in the appropriate output queue. Data is transmitted from the
queues using weighted round-robin service to enforce priority service and prevent
blockage of lower-level queues. Priority may be set according to the port default, the
packet’s priority bit (in the VLAN tag), TCP/UDP port number, IP Precedence bit, or
DSCP priority bit.
Differentiated Services Code Point Service (DSCP)
DSCP uses a six-bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors. Based
on network policies, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of
forwarding. The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories, and then
into the output queues.
Domain Name Service (DNS)
A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses.
Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP)
Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP/IP
network. DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability
of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration
options.
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL)
EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network
access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch. A user name and
password is requested by the switch, and then passed to an authentication server
(e.g., RADIUS) for verification. EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802.1X
Port Authentication standard.

Glossary
Glossary-2
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)
Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register
necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined
in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network.
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)
GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and
propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so
that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN
containing registered endstations. Formerly called Group Address Registration
Protocol.
Generic Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)
GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups. GMRP
requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE
802.1p standard.
Group Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)
See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol.
IEEE 802.1D
Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges, including the
Spanning Tree Protocol.
IEEE 802.1Q
VLAN Tagging—Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information. It
allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs, and defines a
standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks.
IEEE 802.1p
An IEEE standard for providing quality of service (QoS) in Ethernet networks. The
standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches
to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value.
IEEE 802.1X
Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first
enter a user ID and password for authentication.
IEEE 802.3ac
Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging.
IEEE 802.3x
Defines Ethernet frame start/stop requests and timers used for flow control on
full-duplex links. (Now incorporated in IEEE 802.3-2002)

Glossary-3
Glossary
IGMP Snooping
Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast
Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members.
IGMP Query
On each subnetwork, one IGMP-capable device will act as the querier — that is, the
device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to
which they already belong. The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP
address in the subnetwork.
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast
services. If there is more than one multicast switch/router on a given subnetwork,
one of the devices is made the “querier” and assumes responsibility for keeping
track of group membership.
In-Band Management
Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network.
IP Multicast Filtering
A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts.
IP Precedence
The Type of Service (ToS) octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits
defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control
packets to lowest priority for routine traffic. The eight values are mapped one-to-one
to the Class of Service categories by default, but may be configured differently to
suit the requirements for specific network applications.
Layer 2
Data Link layer in the ISO 7-Layer Data Communications Protocol. This is related
directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on
MAC addresses.
Link Aggregation
See Port Trunk.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP-configured ports on
another device.
Management Information Base (MIB)
An acronym for Management Information Base. It is a set of database objects that
contains information about a specific device.

Glossary
Glossary-4
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm
An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures. It is intended for use with 32 bit
machines and is safer than the MD4 algorithm, which has been broken. MD5 is a
one-way hash function, meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed
string of digits, also called a message digest.
Multicast Switching
A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for
which no attached host has registered, or forwards them to all ports contained within
the designated multicast VLAN group.
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network. The time
servers operate in a hierarchical-master-slave configuration in order to synchronize
local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio.
Out-of-Band Management
Management of the network from a station not attached to the network.
Port Authentication
See IEEE 802.1X.
Port Mirroring
A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for
troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe. This allows data on the target
port to be studied unobstructively.
Port Trunk
Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to
create a single high-speed logical link that combines several lower-speed physical
links.
Private VLANs
Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within the
assigned VLAN. Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to, and from,
uplink ports.
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)
RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central
server to control access to RADIUS-compliant devices on the network.

Glossary-5
Glossary
Remote Monitoring (RMON)
RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities. It eliminates the
polling required in standard SNMP, and can set alarms on a variety of traffic
conditions, including specific error types.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10% of
that required by the older IEEE 802.1D STP standard.
Secure Shell (SSH)
A secure replacement for remote access functions, including Telnet. SSH can
authenticate users with a cryptographic key, and encrypt data connections between
management clients and the switch.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network
management services.
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a
Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. Updates can be requested from a specific NTP
server, or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers.
Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA)
A technology that checks your network for any loops. A loop can often occur in
complicated or backup linked network systems. Spanning Tree detects and directs
data along the shortest available path, maximizing the performance and efficiency of
the network.
Telnet
Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over
TCP/IP.
Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+)
TACACS+ is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central
server to control access to TACACS-compliant devices on the network.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol, and IP as the
network layer protocol.
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
A TCP/IP protocol commonly used for software downloads.

Glossary
Glossary-6
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
UDP provides a datagram mode for packet-switched communications. It uses IP as
the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP-like services. UDP
packets are delivered just like IP packets – connection-less datagrams that may be
discarded before reaching their targets. UDP is useful when TCP would be too
complex, too slow, or just unnecessary.
Virtual LAN (VLAN)
A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain
regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network. A VLAN
serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers, and allows users to share
information and resources as though located on the same LAN.
XModem
A protocol used to transfer files between devices. Data is grouped in 128-byte
blocks and error-corrected.

Index-1
Numerics
802.1X, port authentication 3-49
A
acceptable frame type 3-114, 4-152
Access Control List See ACL
ACL
Extended IP 3-58, 4-89, 4-90, 4-92
MAC 3-58, 4-89, 4-97, 4-97–4-99
Standard IP 3-58, 4-89, 4-90, 4-91
address table 3-89, 4-133
aging time 3-92, 4-136
B
BOOTP 3-14, 4-190
BPDU 3-93
broadcast storm, threshold 3-80, 4-114
C
Class of Service See CoS
CLI, showing commands 4-4
command line interface See CLI
community ports 3-116, 4-158
community string 2-8, 3-33, 4-103
community VLANs 3-118, 4-159
configuration settings, saving or
restoring 2-9, 3-18, 4-65
console port, required connections 2-2
CoS
configuring 3-122, 4-168
DSCP 3-130, 3-132, 4-177
IP precedence 3-128, 4-174, 4-175
layer 3/4 priorities 3-127, 4-174
queue mapping 3-124, 4-171
queue mode 3-125, 4-169
traffic class weights 3-126, 4-170
D
default gateway, configuration 3-12,
4-191
default priority, ingress port 3-122,
4-169
default settings, system 1-5
DHCP 3-14, 4-190
client 3-12
dynamic configuration 2-7
Differentiated Code Point Service See
DSCP
downloading software 3-16, 4-65
DSCP
enabling 3-128, 4-177
mapping priorities 3-130, 3-132,
4-177
dynamic addresses, displaying 3-90,
4-135
E
edge port, STA 3-101, 3-103, 4-144
event logging 4-43
F
firmware
displaying version 3-9, 4-63
upgrading 3-16, 4-65
G
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol See
GVRP
gateway, default 3-12, 4-191
GVRP
global setting 4-164
interface configuration 3-114, 4-165
GVRP, global setting 3-107
H
hardware version, displaying 3-9, 4-63
HTTPS 3-40, 4-31
HTTPS, secure server 3-40, 4-31
I
IEEE 802.1D 3-92, 4-138
IEEE 802.1w 3-92, 4-138
IEEE 802.1X 3-49, 4-81
Index

Index-2
Index
IGMP
groups, displaying 3-139, 4-184
Layer 2 3-134, 4-181
query 3-134, 4-185
query, Layer 2 3-135, 4-185
snooping 3-134, 4-182
snooping, configuring 3-135, 4-181
ingress filtering 3-114, 4-153
IP address
BOOTP/DHCP 3-14, 4-190, 4-192
setting 2-6, 3-12, 4-190
IP precedence
enabling 3-128, 4-174, 4-175
mapping priorities 3-128, 4-176
isolated ports 3-116, 4-158
J
jumbo frame 4-64
L
LACP
local parameters 4-129
partner parameters 4-129
protocol message statistics 4-129
link type, STA 3-101, 3-103, 4-146
logging
syslog traps 4-46
to syslog servers 4-45
log-in, Web interface 3-2
logon authentication 3-35, 4-71
RADIUS client 4-73
RADIUS server 4-73
TACACS+ client 3-37, 4-76
TACACS+ server 3-37, 4-76
logon authentication, sequence 3-38,
4-71, 4-72
M
main menu 3-4
(MIBs) A-3
mirror port, configuring 3-82, 4-119
multicast filtering 3-134, 4-181
multicast groups 3-139, 4-184
displaying 4-184
static 3-139, 4-182, 4-184
multicast services
displaying 3-139, 4-184
multicast, static router port 3-137,
4-188
P
password, line 4-12, 4-13
passwords 2-5
administrator setting 3-35, 4-26
path cost 3-94, 3-100
method 3-97, 4-141
STA 3-94, 3-100, 4-141
port authentication 3-49
port priority
default ingress 3-122, 4-169
STA 3-100, 4-144
port security, configuring 3-47, 4-79
port, statistics 3-85, 4-116
ports
autonegotiation 3-67, 4-110
broadcast storm threshold 3-80,
4-114
capabilities 3-67, 4-111
duplex mode 3-66, 4-109
flow control 3-67, 4-112
speed 3-66, 4-109
ports, configuring 3-64, 4-108
ports, mirroring 3-82, 4-119
primary VLAN 3-117
priority, default port ingress 3-122,
4-169
private VLANs, configuring 3-116,
4-158
problems, troubleshooting B-1
promiscuous ports 3-116, 4-158
protocol migration 3-103, 4-147
PVLAN
association 3-118
community ports 3-116, 4-158
interface configuration 3-120
isolated ports 3-116, 4-158
primary VLAN 3-117
promiscuous ports 3-116, 4-158

Index-3
Index
Q
queue weights 3-126, 4-170
R
RADIUS, logon authentication 4-73
rate limits, setting 3-83, 4-121
remote logging 4-46
restarting the system 3-30, 4-22
RSTP 3-92, 4-138
global configuration 3-93, 4-138
S
secure shell 3-42, 4-34
Secure Shell configuration 3-42, 4-37
serial port
configuring 4-10
See SNMP
SNMP 3-33
community string 3-33, 4-103
enabling traps 3-34, 4-106
filtering IP addresses 3-55
trap manager 3-34, 4-105
software
displaying version 3-9, 4-63
downloading 3-16, 4-65
Spanning Tree Protocol See STA
specifications, software A-1
SSH, configuring 3-42, 4-37
STA 3-92, 4-137
edge port 3-101, 3-103, 4-144
global settings, configuring 3-96,
4-137–4-142
global settings, displaying 3-93,
4-147
interface settings 3-99,
4-143–4-147, 4-148
link type 3-101, 3-103, 4-146
path cost 3-94, 3-100, 4-143
path cost method 3-97, 4-141
port priority 3-100, 4-144
protocol migration 3-103, 4-147
transmission limit 3-97, 4-142
standards, IEEE A-2
startup files
creating 3-19, 4-65
displaying 3-16, 4-58
setting 3-16, 4-70
static addresses, setting 3-89, 4-134
statistics
port 3-85, 4-116
STP 3-96, 4-138
STP Also see STA
system clock, setting 3-31, 4-53
System Logs 3-24
system software, downloading from
server 3-16, 4-65
T
TACACS+, logon authentication 3-37,
4-76
time, setting 3-31, 4-53
traffic class weights 3-126, 4-170
trap manager 2-9, 3-34, 4-105
troubleshooting B-1
trunk
configuration 3-68, 4-123
LACP 3-70, 4-125
static 3-69, 4-124
U
upgrading software 3-16, 4-65
user password 3-35, 4-26, 4-27
V
VLANs 3-104–3-122, 4-149–4-164
adding static members 3-111,
3-113, 4-155
creating 3-110, 4-150
description 3-104, 3-122
displaying basic information 3-107,
4-165
displaying port members 3-108,
4-157
egress mode 3-115, 4-152
interface configuration 3-114,
4-152–4-156
private 3-116, 4-158

Index-4
Index
W
Web interface
access requirements 3-1
configuration buttons 3-3
home page 3-2
menu list 3-4
panel display 3-3

XB30330
XB30350
E032005-R01
149100006100H

Xb30330.xb30350 management guide

More Related Content

Similar to Xb30330.xb30350 management guide

Recently uploaded

Xb30330.xb30350 management guide